Manual de Usuario SPC 820dn Ricoh

Operating Instructions
Hardware Guide
1 Guide to the Printer

2 Installing Options
3 Connecting the Printer Cables
4 Configuration
5 Paper and Other Media
6 Replacing Consumables
7 Cleaning the Printer
8 Adjusting the Printer
9 Troubleshooting
10 Removing Misfed Paper
11 Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information
before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this printer. For your safety and
benefit, read this manual carefully before using the printer. Keep this manual in a handy place for quick
reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the "Safety Information" before using the machine.
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, Acrobat Reader, Adobe Type Manager, Flash, Macromedia, PageMaker and PostScript
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, Mac OS, Mac OS X and True Type are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the
U.S. and other countries.
Citrix® and MetaFrame® are registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
Monotype® is a registered trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Netware®, IPXTM, IPX/SPXTM, Novell ClientTM are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Netscape® and Netscape Navigator® are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc.
SolarisTM is trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnPTM is a trademark of the UPnPTM Implementers Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, MS-DOS®, and Windows Vista® are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
* The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
* The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
* The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Web Edition
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Web Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Datacenter
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION Labels...............................................................................................6
Manuals for This Printer......................................................................................................................................9
How to Read This Manual...............................................................................................................................10
Symbols........................................................................................................................................................10
Model-Specific Information.............................................................................................................................11
List of Options...................................................................................................................................................12
Installing the Operating Instructions...............................................................................................................14
Installing the HTML Format Manuals..........................................................................................................14
Opening the HTML Format Manuals.........................................................................................................14
1. Guide to the Printer
Exterior: Front View..........................................................................................................................................17
Exterior: Side View...........................................................................................................................................19
Interior...............................................................................................................................................................21
Control Panel....................................................................................................................................................23
Power on and off..............................................................................................................................................25
Turning on the Power...................................................................................................................................25
Turning off the Power...................................................................................................................................26
Display Panel....................................................................................................................................................28
Reading the Display and Using Keys.........................................................................................................29
2. Installing Options
Available Options............................................................................................................................................31
Order of Option Installation........................................................................................................................31
Where to Install Options.............................................................................................................................32
Cautions When Re-installing the Controller Board...................................................................................35
Attaching the Paper Feed Unit........................................................................................................................36
Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit to the 1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit......................................37
Attaching the 500-sheet/1000-sheet/2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit....................................................39
Installing the Memory Expansion Units..........................................................................................................45
Installing the SDRAM Module....................................................................................................................45
Installing the Hard Disk................................................................................................................................48
Installing the Interface Units.............................................................................................................................54
Installing the Gigabit Ethernet Board.........................................................................................................54
Installing the Wireless LAN Interface Board..............................................................................................58
1
Installing the Bluetooth Interface Unit.........................................................................................................62
Installing the IEEE 1284 Interface Board...................................................................................................65
Installing SD Card Options..............................................................................................................................67
3. Connecting the Printer Cables
Ethernet Cable Connection.............................................................................................................................71
Reading the LED Lamps...............................................................................................................................74
USB Cable Connection....................................................................................................................................75
Digital Camera Connection........................................................................................................................75
Parallel Cable Connection..............................................................................................................................77
4. Configuration
Ethernet Configuration.....................................................................................................................................79
Specifying an IP Address (No DHCP)........................................................................................................80
Receiving an IP Address Automatically (DHCP)........................................................................................82
Configuring Network Settings When Using NetWare.............................................................................84
Setting the Ethernet Speed..........................................................................................................................85
Wireless LAN Configuration...........................................................................................................................88
Setting the SSID............................................................................................................................................90
Cautions When Using a Wireless LAN......................................................................................................91
Setting Security Method of Wireless LAN......................................................................................................93
Setting a WEP Key.......................................................................................................................................93
Setting WPA.................................................................................................................................................94
Configuring 802.1X (WPA/WPA2)..............................................................................................................98
Installing a Site Certificate...........................................................................................................................98
Installing Device Certificate.........................................................................................................................98
Setting Items of WPA/WPA2...................................................................................................................100
5. Paper and Other Media
Supported Paper for Each Tray....................................................................................................................101
Symbols......................................................................................................................................................101
Tray 1.........................................................................................................................................................101
Tray 2, 500/1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit (Tray 3 to 5)......................................................................102
2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit (Tray 3).....................................................................................................104
Bypass Tray................................................................................................................................................104
Paper Weight and Capacity....................................................................................................................106
2
Paper Recommendations..............................................................................................................................107
Storing Paper.............................................................................................................................................107
Types of Paper and Other Media............................................................................................................107
Paper Not Supported by This Printer.......................................................................................................116
Print Area....................................................................................................................................................116
Loading Paper................................................................................................................................................118
Paper Tray, 500/1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit.....................................................................................118
2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit....................................................................................................................126
Bypass Tray................................................................................................................................................128
Using Paper Types that Have Unique Names.............................................................................................135
From Registration of User Paper Types to Use........................................................................................135
Registering Names to Paper Types..........................................................................................................136
Setting User Paper Types to Trays............................................................................................................137
Printing Using Registered Paper Types....................................................................................................138
6. Replacing Consumables
Adding Toner.................................................................................................................................................139
Replacing the Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Units......................................................................................143
Replacing the Transfer Unit...........................................................................................................................150
Replacing the Transfer Unit.......................................................................................................................150
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle................................................................................................................156
Replacing the Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, and Dustproof Filter................................................................161
Replacing the Fusing Unit.........................................................................................................................161
Replacing the Transfer Roller....................................................................................................................165
Replacing the Dustproof Filter..................................................................................................................167
Adding Staples...............................................................................................................................................169
When the Booklet Finisher is Installed.....................................................................................................169
When the 2 Tray Finisher is Installed.......................................................................................................173
7. Cleaning the Printer
Cautions When Cleaning..............................................................................................................................177
Cleaning the Friction Pads............................................................................................................................178
Paper Trays, 500/1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit....................................................................................178
2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit....................................................................................................................179
Cleaning the Registration Roller...................................................................................................................181
3
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass.......................................................................................................................182
8. Adjusting the Printer
Adjusting the Color Registration...................................................................................................................185
Correcting the Color Gradation...................................................................................................................187
Setting the Gradation Correction Value..................................................................................................187
Viewing the Color Calibration Sample Sheet and Gradation Correction Sheet.................................190
Resetting the Gradation Correction Value to the Initial Value...............................................................192
Adjusting Printing Position.............................................................................................................................194
9. Troubleshooting
Error and Status Messages that Appear on the Control Panel..................................................................197
Panel Tones....................................................................................................................................................208
Printer Does Not Print....................................................................................................................................209
Checking the Port Connection..................................................................................................................211
Printing Problems............................................................................................................................................212
Additional Troubleshooting...........................................................................................................................220
Removing Jammed Staples...........................................................................................................................222
Removing Punch Waste.................................................................................................................................228
10. Removing Misfed Paper
Removing Misfed Paper................................................................................................................................231
Paper Misfeed Message (A).........................................................................................................................232
Paper Misfeed Message (B).........................................................................................................................234
Paper Misfeed Message (C).........................................................................................................................236
Paper Misfeed Message (D).........................................................................................................................240
Paper Misfeed Message (R).........................................................................................................................242
Paper Misfeed Message (W).......................................................................................................................252
Paper Misfeed Message (Y).........................................................................................................................253
Paper Misfeed Message (Z).........................................................................................................................254
4
Duplex Print Always Misfeeds......................................................................................................................257
11. Appendix
Moving and Transporting the Printer............................................................................................................259
Moving the Printer.....................................................................................................................................259
Consumables..................................................................................................................................................262
Print Cartridge............................................................................................................................................262
Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Unit...........................................................................................................262
Waste Toner Bottle....................................................................................................................................263
Staple Cartridge........................................................................................................................................263
Transfer Unit...............................................................................................................................................264
Fusing Unit..................................................................................................................................................264
Specifications.................................................................................................................................................265
Mainframe.................................................................................................................................................265
Options.......................................................................................................................................................268
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................281
5
Positions of WARNING and CAUTION Labels
This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety,
please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.
BMW036S
BJA052S
Do not touch the parts a label indicates. The inside of the machine could be very hot. Caution should be
taken when removing misfed paper.
2
BJA067S
High temperature parts. Wait a while to allow the Fusing Unit to cool down before removing misfed paper.
3
BJA055S
6
BJA065S
5
BJA046S
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Otherwise, an
injury might occur.
BMW037S
7
6
BJA066S
Do not touch! Surface may be very hot.

7
BJA044S
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not. Take care not to touch the booklet finisher
tray during operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
8
BJA043S
Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple unit,
or removing paper jam. You might trap your fingers if you do not.
8
Manuals for This Printer
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the printer.
• Media differ according to manual.

• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
Safety Information
Contains information about safe usage of this printer.
To avoid injury and prevent damage to the printer, be sure to read this.
Quick Installation Guide
Contains procedures for removing the printer from its box, connecting it to a computer, and installing
its driver.
Hardware Guide (This manual)
Contains information about paper and procedures such as installing options, replacing consumables,
responding to error messages, and resolving jams.
Software Guide
Contains information about using this printer, its software, and its security functions.
Security Guide
Contains information for administrators of the printer. It explains security functions that the
administrators can use to prevent data tampering or unauthorized use of the printer. Also refer to this
manual for the procedure for registering an administrator, as well as setting user and administrator
authentication.
UNIX Supplement
For "UNIX Supplement", please visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer.
This manual includes descriptions of functions and settings that might not be available on this printer.
• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.
9
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates important safety notes.

Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found
in the “Safety Information” section of this manual.

Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the machine or to property. Be
sure to read these notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of this manual.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's control panel.
10
Model-Specific Information
In this manual, the following symbols indicate information that relates to a specific printer model.
This indicates information about the 220 to 240 V model printer.

Read if you have purchased this model.
This indicates information about the 120 V model printer.

• Check the label on the rear of the printer to identify the printer's model.
BMW031S
11
List of Options
This section provides a list of options for this printer, and how they are referred to as in this manual.
Some printer models have a hard disk installed by default. In this manual, the models with the hard disk
drive are referred to as the HDD standard model. The models for which the hard disk drive is optional are
referred to as the Basic model.
Option name Referred to as
IEEE802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J

Wireless LAN interface board
IEEE802.11g Interface Unit Type K
Memory Unit Type J 256 MB

SDRAM module
Printer Hard Disk Drive Type 820 Hard disk
Gigabit Ethernet Type B Gigabit Ethernet board
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A IEEE 1284 interface board
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245 Bluetooth interface unit
HDD ENCRYPTION UNIT Type D HDD encryption unit
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M Data overwrite security unit
Camera Direct Print Card Type F Camera direct print card
SD card for NetWare printing Type A NetWare card
VM Card Type K VM card
Finisher SR3030 2 tray finisher
Booklet Finisher SR3000 Booklet finisher
Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2

Punch Unit Type 3260 EU 2/4 Punch unit
Punch Unit Type 3260 SC
Output Jogger Unit Type 3260 Output jogger unit
Paper Feed Unit PB3080 500-sheet paper feed unit
12
LCIT PB3050 2000-sheet paper feed unit
Bridge Unit BU3030 Bridge unit
Punch Kit PU3000 NA

Punch Kit PU3000 EU Punch kit
Punch Kit PU3000 SC
Mail Bin Type C820 Mailbox
13
Installing the Operating Instructions
This section explains how to use HTML format manuals.
Installing the HTML Format Manuals
The supplied “Manuals” CD-ROMs contain HTML format manuals. For easy access, we recommend you
install the manuals on a computer.
• The system requirements for installing the manuals are as follows:

• Minimum display resolution: 800 × 600 pixels
• Recommended browsers:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2 or later
• Netscape 6.2 or later
• Non-recommended browsers can display the simplified manual only.
• If you are using a Macintosh, click [Read HTML manuals] to view manuals.
1. Select a language and a product, and then click [OK].

2. Click [Install manuals].
If you want to read manuals from the CD-ROM, click [Read HTML manuals].
3. Install the manual you require according to the displayed instructions.
4. When installation is complete, click [Finish].
5. Click [Finish].
• Depending on the printer model, PDF manuals may be supplied in the CD-ROM. To open PDF
manuals, click [Read PDF manuals] in step 2.
• If you cannot install a manual, copy the “MANUAL_HTML” folder to your computer's hard drive, and
then run “Setup.exe”.
• To delete an installed manual, on the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], then [Product Name], and
then click [Uninstall]. Follow the instructions to delete the manual.
Opening the HTML Format Manuals
This section explains how to open the HTML format manuals.
14
Opening from the Icon
This section explains how to open a manual using its desktop icon.
1. Double-click the icon on your desktop.
The browser opens and the manual appears.
Opening from the [Start] Menu

This section explains how to open a manual from the [Start] menu.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs] (for operating systems other than Windows
XP: [Programs]), then [Product Name], and then click the manual you want to view.
The browser opens, and then the manual appears.
• Depending on the settings made during installation, menu folder names may differ.
Opening from the CD-ROM

This section explains how to open a manual from the supplied “Manuals” CD-ROM.
1. Click [Read HTML manuals].

2. Click the title of the manual you want to view.
The browser opens, and then the manual appears.
15
16
This chapter explains the names and functions of the printer's components.
1
Exterior: Front View
This section explains names and functions of the parts on the front and right side of the printer.
BMV003S
1. Standard Output Tray

Printed pages are output here.
2. Upper Right Cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper.
3. Bypass Tray
Up to 100 sheets of plain paper can be loaded.
4. Bypass Tray Extension
When loading paper larger than A4 , pull out the bypass tray extension. For details about the sizes and types
of paper that can be used, see "Supported Paper for Each Tray".
5. Right Cover
Open this cover to replace the fusing unit and transfer roller, or to remove jammed paper.
6. Handle
Pull out this handle when lifting the printer.
7. Tray 1, Tray 2
Up to 550 sheets of paper can be loaded in each tray, when using plain paper.
In this manual, tray 1, tray 2, the optional 500-sheet paper feed unit tray, and the 1000-sheet paper feed unit
trays (trays 3 to 5) are collectively referred to as 500-sheet trays.
17
8. Left Front Cover

Open this cover when replacing the waste toner bottle. The waste toner bottle collects toner that is left over during
printing.
1 If the " Waste Toner Bottle full" message appears on the display, replace the waste toner bottle.
9. Power Switch
Use this switch to turn the power on or off.
Perform the shutdown procedure before turning the power off. For details about how to shut down the printer,
see "Power on and off".
10. Front Cover
Open this when replacing the toner, black drum unit/color drum units or transfer unit.
11. Control Panel
Contains keys for printer control and a display that shows printer status.
12. Paper Support
Extend the paper support when printing to paper larger than A3 .
• p.25 "Power on and off"

• p.101 "Supported Paper for Each Tray"
18
Exterior: Side View
Exterior: Side View

This section explains names and functions of the parts on the rear side of the printer.
1
BMV004S
1. Optional Interface Board Slot

Optional interface boards can be inserted.
Insert an optional IEEE 802.11 wireless interface unit, Bluetooth interface unit or IEEE 1284 interface board.
2. Expansion Card Slots
Remove the cover to install SD cards.
Upper slot: Data overwrite security unit, camera direct print card, NetWare card
Lower slot: HDD encryption unit, VM card
3. USB Port B
Use a USB cable to connect the printer to a host computer.
4. Ethernet Port
Use a network interface cable to connect the printer to the network.
5. USB Port A
Connect external devices to the printer, such as a digital camera.
6. Controller Board
Slide this out to install options such as the SDRAM module, hard disk, or Gigabit Ethernet board.
7. Ventilator
Releases heat from internal components to prevent overheating. Do not place objects against or near these holes.
Doing so results in printer malfunction.
19
Replace the dustproof filter when the "Replace IntTrans Unit soon." message appears on the display. Replace it
with the transfer unit together.
8. Power Connector
1 Connect the power cable to the printer. Insert the other end into an electrical outlet.
9. Drying Heater Switch
If the paper in the paper tray is moist due to high humidity, the print quality may decrease. The drying heater
prevents moisture. If humidity is high, turn the switch on.
10. Handle
Hold this handle when you pull out the controller board.
11. Optional Gigabit Ethernet Board Slot
By removing this cover and installing the optional Gigabit Ethernet board, you can connect an Ethernet cable to
the printer.
• A hard disk is pre-installed in the HDD standard model.
20
Interior
Interior
This section explains names and functions of the parts inside of the printer.
1
BMV005S
1. Fusing Unit
Replace the fusing unit when the following messages appear:
• "Replace Fusing Unit."
Replace the fusing unit and the transfer roller together.
2. Transfer Roller
Replace the transfer roller when the following messages appear:
• "Replace Fusing Unit."
Replace the transfer roller and the fusing unit together.
3. Inner Cover
Open this cover when replacing the black drum unit/color drum units or transfer unit.
4. Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Units
From the left, the drum units are installed in the order of yellow (Y), cyan (C), magenta (M), and black (K). Replace
the relevant black drum unit/color drum units when the following messages appear:
• "Replace PCU:Black."
• "Replace PCU:Color."
5. Transfer Unit
Replace the transfer unit when the following messages appear:
• "Replace IntTrans Unit soon."
• "Replace IntTrans Unit."
6. Toner
From the left, the toner is installed in the order of black (K), yellow (Y), cyan (C), and magenta (M).
21
Replace the relevant toner when the following messages appear:

• " Out of toner."
• " Add toner<K,C,M,Y>"
22
Control Panel
Control Panel
This section explains names and usage of the parts of the control panel.
1
BMV029S
1. Display
Displays current printer status and error messages.
Entering energy saver mode turns off the back light. For details about energy saver mode, see Software Guide.
2. Selection Keys
Correspond to the function items shown on the bottom line of the display.
3. [Escape] Key
Press this key to return to the previous display.
4. Scroll Keys
Press to move the cursor in each direction.
When the [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] keys appear in this manual, press the scroll key of the same direction.
5. [OK] Key
Use this key to confirm settings, or setting values, or move to the next menu level.
6. Data In Indicator
Blinks when the printer is receiving data from a computer. Lights up if there is data to be printed.
7. Alert Indicator
Lights up in red or yellow when a printer error occurs.
Red: printing is not possible/possible but print quality cannot be ensured.
Yellow: printer requires maintenance, such as replacing consumables, shortly.
Follow the instructions that appear on the display.
8. Power Indicator
Remains lit while the power is on. It is unlit when the power is off or while the printer is in energy saver mode.
23
9. [Suspend/Resume] Key
Press this key to suspend a print job. The key lights up while the job is suspended. To resume the job, press this
key again.
1 10. [Job Reset] Key

Press this key to cancel an ongoing print job.
11. [Menu] Key
Press this key to configure and check the current printer settings.
While configuring settings, press this key to return to the initial screen.
24
Power on and off
Power on and off

This section explains how to turn on or off the printer's power.
1
• It is dangerous to handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this may result in receiving an electric shock.
• Do not turn off the power switch before following the shutdown procedure shown here. Doing so can
result in damage to the hard disk or memory, leading to malfunction.
• Do not physically disturb the printer while printing is in progress. Doing so may damage the printer.
Turning on the Power
This section explains how to turn on the printer's power.
1. Make sure the power switch is set to Off.

2. Plug the power cord into the rear of the printer.
BMV277S
Make sure the power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet.
Turn the power switch off when plugging and unplugging the power plug.
25
3. Turn the power switch on.
BMV278S
The power indicator on the control panel lights up.
• Wait until "Ready" appears on the display panel.

• The machine may make a noise while initializing. This noise does not indicate a malfunction.
Turning off the Power
This section explains how to turn off the printer's power.
1. Press the [Menu] key.
BMW028S
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Shutdown], and then press the [OK] key.
26
Power on and off
3. Press [Yes].
4. Wait until a screen prompting you to turn off the main power appears, then turn off the main
power switch.
• Even if you follow the shutdown procedure, the machine might not shutdown in the following cases:
• If it is communicating with external devices.
• If the hard disk is active.
• If the printer's cover is opened.
27
Display Panel
This section explains configuration using the initial screen of the display panel.
1 The items are highlighted when selected.
• Do not touch the display panel.

The following screen appears when you turn on the printer.
AQC060S
1. Operational Status or Messages

Displays the printer status or the messages.
2. [Option]
Press to display the status of options installed in the printer.
3. [Prt.Jobs]
Press to display print jobs sent from a computer.
4. [Supplies]
Press to display the menu of supplies for the printer.
• [Prt.Jobs] is displayed only when the hard disk is installed in the printer.
• By default, the remaining amount of toner is displayed. To not display the remaining amount of toner,
press the [Menu] key, and then select [Maintenance] on the display. Select [General Settings], then
[Display Supply Info], and then select [Off].
• Adjust the brightness if the screen is dark. To adjust the display contrast, press the [Menu] key, and
then select [Maintenance] on the display. Select [General Settings] and then [Display Contrast].
28
Display Panel
Reading the Display and Using Keys
BMW030S
1. [Escape] key
Cancels an operation or returns to the previous display.
2. Scroll keys
Move the cursor in each direction.
3. [OK] key
Confirms settings and setting values, or moves to the next menu level.
4. Selection keys
When this manual instructs you to "press [Option]", press the left selection key.
29
30
This chapter explains how to install various options for this printer.
Available Options
By installing options, you can improve printer performance and expand the available features. 2
• Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged for at least an hour.
Components inside the machine become very hot, and can cause a burn if touched.
Order of Option Installation
When installing multiple options, the following order is recommended:
1. Attach the 500-sheet paper feed unit

The 500-sheet paper feed unit can be used in combination with the 1000-sheet paper feed unit. In
this case, attach the 500-sheet paper feed unit to the 1000-sheet paper feed unit before attaching
to the printer.
2. Attach the 1000-sheet paper feed unit or 2000-sheet paper feed unit
Either the 1000-sheet paper feed unit or 2000-sheet paper feed unit can be attached, but not both.
3. Install the SDRAM module
Install in the slot inside the controller board.
4. Install the hard disk
Install inside the controller board.
5. Install the Gigabit Ethernet board
Install inside the controller board.
6. Install the interface board
Install in the slot of the controller board.
Only one interface board can be installed.
7. Insert SD card options
Insert in the SD card slot of the controller board.
There are two slots for SD cards.
Each slot supports different types of SD cards.
If you want to use two or more SD cards that can be inserted in the same slot, contact your sales or
service representative.
31
8. Attach the bridge unit

To attach this option, contact your sales or service representative.
9. Attach the booklet finisher or 2 tray finisher
Either the booklet finisher or 2 tray finisher can be attached, but not both.
The bridge unit and the 1000-sheet paper feed unit or 2000-sheet paper feed unit must have been
2 attached.
10. Attach the punch unit to the finisher
11. Attach the output jogger unit to the 2 tray finisher
12. Attach the mailbox
Where to Install Options
Install options in the locations shown in the following illustrations.

External options
BMW002S
1. 500-sheet paper feed unit.
32
Available Options
Attach to the underside of the printer. If you are also attaching the 1000-sheet paper feed unit,
attach the 500-sheet paper feed unit to the 1000-sheet paper feed unit first. See "Attaching the
Paper Feed Unit".
2. 1000-sheet paper feed unit
Attach to the underside of the printer. See “Attaching the Paper Feed Unit”.
Attach to the underside of the printer. See “Attaching the Paper Feed Unit”.
2
4. Bridge unit
Remove the output tray and attach the bridge unit.
5. Booklet finisher
Attach to the left side of the printer.
This option is not available when the 500-sheet paper feed unit is attached to the printer.
• *1: Finisher upper tray
• *2: Finisher shift tray
• *3: Finisher booklet tray
6. 2 Tray finisher
Attach to the left side of the printer.
• *4: Finisher upper tray
• *5: Finisher shift tray
7. Output jogger unit
Attach to the 2 tray finisher.
8. Mailbox
Attach to the topside of the printer.
• *6: Mailbox tray 4
33
Internal options
BMV141S
1. Data overwrite security unit/HDD encryption unit/NetWare card/Camera direct print card/
VM card
If you want to use two or more SD cards that can be inserted in the same slot, contact your sales
or service representative.
• Upper slot: Data overwrite security unit, camera direct print card, or NetWare card
• Lower slot: HDD encryption unit or VM card
See “Installing SD Card Options”.
2. Optional interface board
Only one interface board can be installed.
• IEEE 1284 interface board
• IEEE 802.11 g interface board
• IEEE 802.11 a/g interface board
• Bluetooth interface unit
See “Installing the Interface Units”.
3. Hard disk
See "Installing the Memory Expansion Units".
4. SDRAM module
34
Available Options
See "Installing the Memory Expansion Units".

5. Gigabit Ethernet board
See "Installing the Interface Units".
• For the specifications of each option, see "Specifications".

2
• p.36 "Attaching the Paper Feed Unit"
• p.67 "Installing SD Card Options"
• p.54 "Installing the Interface Units"
• p.45 "Installing the Memory Expansion Units"
• p.265 "Specifications"
Cautions When Re-installing the Controller Board
When installing options inside the controller board, handle the board carefully while it is outside the printer.
To re-install the controller board, holding the handle in the center of the board, push the board firmly into
the printer.
• The following may occur if the controller board is not correctly installed:
1. All control panel indicators are lit.
2. No control panel indicators are lit.
3. The "SC670" error message appears on the display.
BMV142S
35
Attaching the Paper Feed Unit

This section explains how to attach the paper feed units.
• When attaching multiple options, attach the paper feed unit first.
2 • Four people are required to attach the paper feed unit. Make sure that the necessary number of people
is available before beginning.
Option configurations
The table below shows the possible configurations of printer and options.
BMW026S
1. Printer 500-sheet paper feed unit

See "Attaching the 500-sheet/1000-sheet/2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit" for attachment instructions.
2. Printer 500-sheet paper feed unit 1000-sheet paper feed unit
To install options in this configuration, first see "Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit to the 1000-sheet
Paper Feed Unit" for instructions about attaching the 500-sheet paper feed unit to the 1000-sheet paper
feed unit. Then, see "Attaching the 500-sheet/1000-sheet/2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit" for instructions
about attaching this to the printer.
• p.37 "Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit to the 1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit"
• p.39 "Attaching the 500-sheet/1000-sheet/2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit"
36
Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit to the 1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit
The 500-sheet paper feed unit can be used in combination with the 1000-sheet paper feed unit. In this
case, attach the 500-sheet paper feed unit to the 1000-sheet paper feed unit before attaching to the printer.
This section explains how to attach the 500-sheet paper feed unit to the 1000-sheet paper feed unit.
• The 500-sheet paper feed unit weighs approximately 15 kg (33.1 lb.).

2
• When moving the paper feed unit, hold the bottom at both sides, and then lift the optional paper feed
unit slowly. Lifting it carelessly or dropping it may cause an injury.
1. Check the contents of the package.
BMV009S

2. Two brackets
3. Three screws
2. Remove the packaging from the paper feed unit.
3. Hold the 500-sheet paper feed unit as shown in the illustration below, and then lift it.
BMV010S
4. Align it with the top of the 1000-sheet paper feed unit, and slowly lower it straight down.
Place it so that it is held firmly in place by the vertical pins.
37
2
BMW050S
5. Pull the tray of the 500-sheet paper feed unit out slowly until it stops, then lift the front of
the tray slightly, and pull it out completely.
BMW051S
Place the tray on a flat surface.

6. Attach a screw in the hole on the left side of the tray opening to secure it to the paper feed
unit.
Tighten the screw firmly using a coin.
BMW052S
38
7. Lift the front of the tray, and slide it carefully into the paper feed unit until it stops.
BMW053S
8. On the rear of the unit, attach two brackets using the remaining screws.
Tighten the screws firmly using a coin.
BMW054S
Attaching the 500-sheet/1000-sheet/2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit
This section describes how to attach the 500-sheet paper feed unit, 1000-sheet paper feed unit, and 2000-
sheet paper feed unit. The procedure is the same for all three units. The 1000-sheet paper feed unit is used
as an example.
• The printer weights approximately 97 kg (214 lb.).

• Four or more people are required to move the printer. Hold the handles located on both sides, and
then lift it slowly. Lifting it carelessly or dropping it may cause an injury.
• When using the 1000-sheet paper feed unit with the 500-sheet paper feed unit, attach the 500-sheet
paper feed unit to the 1000-sheet paper feed unit before attaching to the printer.
• When the 1000-sheet paper feed unit is attached, the 2000-sheet paper feed unit cannot be attached.
• When the 2000-sheet paper feed unit is attached, neither the 500-sheet paper feed unit nor the
1000-sheet paper feed unit can be attached.
39
• Before using the new paper feed unit, you must configure settings in the printer driver.
• Four or more people are required for installation.

• Package contents for 500-sheet paper feed unit
BMV009S

2. Two brackets
3. Three screws
BMW044S

2. Two brackets
3. Three screws
40
2
BMW043S

2. Two brackets
3. Three screws
2. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cable.
3. Remove the packaging from the paper feed unit.
4. When using the 1000-sheet paper feed unit with the 500-sheet paper feed unit, attach the
units to each other first, and then attach them to the printer.
For instructions, see "Attaching the 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit to the 1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit".
5. Pull out the handle from the right side of the printer.
BMV016S
6. Lift the printer using the handles on both sides of it.
BMV017S
41
The printer should always be lifted by at least four people.

7. Align the front of the printer with the front of the paper feed unit, and slowly lower it.
Place it so that it is held firmly in place by the vertical pins.
BMW045S
Return the handle you pulled out from the printer to its original position.
8. Pull tray 2 of the printer out slowly until it stops, then lift the front of the tray slightly, and
pull it out completely.
BMW046S
Place the tray on a flat surface.

9. Attach a screw in the hole on the left side of the tray opening to secure the printer to the
paper feed unit.
Tighten the screw firmly using a coin.
42
2
BMW047S
10. Lift the front of the tray, and slide it carefully into the printer until it stops.
BMW048S
11. On the rear of the unit, attach two brackets using the remaining screws.
Tighten the screws firmly using a coin.
BMW049S
12. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the printer.
13. Print the configuration page to confirm that the unit was attached correctly.
• To confirm whether the optional paper feed unit was correctly attached, print the configuration page,
and check "Attached Equipment" on the configuration page. If the unit was attached correctly, the
following will be displayed:
• 500-sheet paper feed unit: Single Tray
43
• 1000-sheet paper feed unit: Twin Trays

• 2000-sheet paper feed unit: LCT
• If the optional paper feed unit was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning.
If it cannot be installed correctly even after reattempting installation, contact your sales or service
representative.
• If the print area is not centered correctly, adjust the printing position for the 500-sheet paper feed unit
2 (tray 3) and/or the 1000-sheet paper feed unit (tray 3 to tray 5). For details, see "Adjusting Printing
Position".
• For information about printing the configuration page, see "List/Test Print Menu", Software Guide.
• To use the 500-sheet, 1000-sheet or 2000-sheet paper feed unit, configure the printer options in
"Change Accessories" in the printer driver. For details about opening "Change Accessories", see
"Making printer default settings - the printer properties", Software Guide.
• p.194 "Adjusting Printing Position"
44
Installing the Memory Expansion Units

This section describes how to install the memory expansion units.
Installing the SDRAM Module

2
• Do not touch the inside of the controller board compartment. It may cause a machine malfunction or
a burn.
• Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the SDRAM module.
• Do not subject the SDRAM module to physical shocks.
• When installing the SDRAM module and wireless LAN interface board together, install the SDRAM
module first, and then install the wireless LAN interface board. If the wireless LAN interface board is
already installed, remove it before installing the SDRAM module.
• The printer comes equipped with 512 MB of memory. This can be expanded to a maximum of 1024
MB.
• Before using the new SDRAM module, you must configure settings in the printer driver.
1. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.

2. Remove the five screws securing the controller board.
BMV143S
The removed screws will be used to secure the controller board again later.
3. Holding the handle, carefully pull out the controller board.
Slide the controller board completely out and place it on a flat surface such as a table.
45
2
BMV144S
Use both hands to slide the controller board completely out, and then place it on a flat surface such
as a table.
BMV145S
4. Install the SDRAM module in the indicated position.
BMV146S
There are two SDRAM slots. A 512 MB SDRAM module is installed in the outer slot. When installing
an expansion SDRAM module, install the module in the free, inner slot.
46
5. Align the notch on the SDRAM module with the slot, and then carefully push in the SDRAM
module perpendicularly.
BMV147S
6. Press the SDRAM module straight down until it clicks into place.
BMV148S
7. When also installing the hard disk, install it before returning the controller board to the
printer.
See "Installing the Hard Disk" for instructions about installing the hard disk.
8. Fit the controller board into the printer, and push it carefully in until it stops.
BMV149S
Push it firmly into the printer using the handle. The printer may malfunction if the controller board is
not properly installed.
47
9. Fasten the controller board to the printer using the five screws.
BMV151S
• Confirm that the SDRAM module was correctly installed by printing the configuration page. Check
that the total memory value is shown in "Device Connection" on the configuration page.
• The table below shows the total SDRAM module capacities.
Standard Extended Total
512 MB 256 MB 768 MB
512 MB 512 MB 1024 MB
• If the SDRAM module was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot
be installed correctly even after reattempting installation, contact your sales or service representative.
• For information on printing the configuration page, see "List/Test Print Menu", Software Guide.
• Install the controller board carefully. For details, see "Cautions When Re-installing the Controller
Board".
• To use the installed SDRAM module, configure the printer options in "Change Accessories" in the
printer driver. For details about opening "Change Accessories", see "Making printer default settings
- the printer properties", Software Guide.
• p.35 "Cautions When Re-installing the Controller Board"
Installing the Hard Disk
This section explains how to install the hard disk in the basic model.
A hard disk is pre-installed in the HDD standard model.
48
• Do not touch the inside of the controller board compartment. It may cause a machine malfunction or
a burn.
electricity. Static electricity can damage the hard disk. 2
• Do not subject the hard disk to physical shocks.
• When installing the hard disk and wireless LAN interface board together, install the hard disk first,
and then install the wireless LAN board. If the wireless LAN interface board is already installed, remove
it before installing the hard disk.
• Install the hard disk carefully if the SDRAM module is already installed. If the hard disk comes in
contact with the SDRAM module, the SDRAM module may become damaged.
• Before using the new hard disk, you must configure settings in the printer driver.
1 2 3 4 BMV152S
1. Hard Disk
2. Power Cable
3. Flat Cable
4. Three Screws
49
3. Remove the five screws securing the controller board.
BMV143S
BMV144S
Use both hands to slide the controller board completely out, and then place it on a flat surface such
as a table.
BMV145S
50
5. Install the hard disk in the indicated position.
BMV153S
Install the hard disk carefully if the SDRAM module is already installed. If the hard disk comes in
6. Hook the mounting indents on the hard drive onto the tabs on the controller board panel.
BMV154S
7. Use two coin screws to fasten the hard disk to the controller board panel.
BMV155S
51
8. Fasten the hard disk to the circuit board with the remaining coin screw.
BMV156S
9. Connect the power cable to the hard disk and the controller board.
BMV157S
10. Connect the flat cable to the hard disk and the controller board.
BMV158S
11. If you are installing other options onto the controller board, proceed to install the next option
without reinserting the controller board.
52
12. Fit the controller board into the printer, and push it carefully until it stops.
BMV149S
BMV151S
When you turn the power to the printer on, the hard disk will be formatted automatically.
• Confirm that the hard disk was correctly installed by printing the configuration page. If it is correctly
installed, "Hard Disk Drive" will appear for "Device Connection" on the configuration page.
• If the hard disk was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot be
installed correctly even after reattempting installation, contact your sales or service representative.
• Install the controller board carefully. For details, see "Cautions When Re-installing the Controller
Board".
• To use the installed hard disk, configure the printer options in "Change Accessories" in the printer
driver. For information about opening "Change Accessories", see "Making printer default settings -
the printer properties", Software Guide.
• p.35 "Cautions When Re-installing the Controller Board"
53
Installing the Interface Units

Installing the Gigabit Ethernet Board
2 • Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the board.
• Do not subject the board to physical shocks.
• The printer's Ethernet port is not available when the Gigabit Ethernet board is attached to the printer.
Use the Ethernet port on the Gigabit Ethernet board.
• When installing the Gigabit Ethernet board and wireless LAN interface board together, install the
Gigabit Ethernet board first, and then install the wireless LAN interface board. If the wireless LAN
interface board is already installed, remove it before installing the Gigabit Ethernet board.
1 2 3 4 BMV159S
1. Gigabit Ethernet Board

2. One Protective Cap
3. Two Ferrite Cores
Use the included ferrite cores when connecting an Ethernet cable to the board.
4. Two coin screws
54
3. Unplug the cable from the Ethernet port, and then cover it with the protective cap.
BMV160S
4. Loosen the screw and remove the slot cover.
BMV161S
The removed cover will not be reused.

5. Remove the 5 screws securing the controller board.
BMV268S
Slide the controller board completely out, and then place it on a flat surface such as a table.
55
2
BMV269S
Use both hands to slide the controller board completely out.
BMV270S
7. Install the Gigabit Ethernet board in the indicated position.
BMV162S
Install the hard disk carefully if the SDRAM module is already installed. If the hard disk comes in
56
8. Carefully insert the Gigabit Ethernet board vertically, all the way to the back.
BMV163S
Push the Gigabit Ethernet board all the way to the back, and confirm that it is securely connected to
the controller board.
9. Use 2 coin screws to fasten the Gigabit Ethernet board to the controller board panel.
BMV164S
10. Fit the controller board into the printer, and push it carefully until it stops.
BMV286S
57
BMV271S
• Confirm that the board was correctly installed by printing the configuration page. If it is correctly
installed, "Gigabit Ethernet Board" will appear for "Device Connection" on the configuration page.
• If the board was not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot be
• Before using the board, you must configure settings from the control panel. For details, see "Ethernet
Configuration".
• p.71 "Ethernet Cable Connection"

• p.79 "Ethernet Configuration"
Installing the Wireless LAN Interface Board
• When installing the SDRAM module, hard disk, and wireless LAN interface board together, install
them in the following order: SDRAM module, hard disk, wireless LAN interface board.
58
BEK175S
1. Wireless LAN Interface Board

2. Two Hook-and-loop Fasteners
3. Eight Hooks
3. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover.
BMV165S

4. Fully insert the interface board.
BMV168S
Confirm that the interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
59
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.
BMV169S
6. Remove protective paper from the hook-and-loop fasteners, and then place them as far
away from each other as possible on the upper side of the printer rear.
BMV170S
Make sure that the hook-and-loop fasteners are not placed over any screw holes or seams on the
printer body.
7. Remove protective paper from antennas, and then attach the antennas upright to the hook-
and-loop fasteners. Attach the antenna coming from a black ferrite core on the right side of
the printer rear.
BMV171S
: Attach the antennas so that they protrude above the top of the printer.
60
8. Remove protective paper from four hooks, and then attach the hooks evenly above the
ventilators on the printer rear.
BMV172S
Extra hooks are spare accessories.

9. Secure the cables using the four hooks. Loop the cable for the antenna on the right as shown.
BMV173S
: The loop must have a diameter of at least 1 cm (0.4 inches).
installed, "Wireless LAN" will appear for "Device Connection" on the configuration page.
• If you need to open the hook, hold the tab of the hook, raise it slightly upward, and then pull it open.
61
2
BEK173S
• Before using the board, you must configure settings from the printer control panel. For details, see
"Wireless LAN Configuration".
• p.88 "Wireless LAN Configuration"
Installing the Bluetooth Interface Unit
• When the Bluetooth interface unit is installed in the printer, Bluetooth-equipped devices such as
computers and digital cameras can print wirelessly.
electricity. Static electricity can damage the Bluetooth interface unit.
• Do not subject the unit to physical shocks.
BMV251S
1. Interface unit
2. Card adapter
3. Card
4. Cover
62

BMV165S

4. Fully insert the interface unit.
BMV174S
Confirm that the interface unit is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface unit.
BMV175S
63
6. Attach the card to the card adapter. Attach them so that the label on both the card and
adapter is facing up.
BFL316S
7. With the label side facing left, slowly push the card adapter into the interface unit until it
stops.
BMV176S
8. While holding the cover close to the tabs, align the three tabs on the cover with the three
indentations on the interface board, and then attach the cover.
BMV285S
• Confirm that the Bluetooth interface unit was correctly installed by printing the configuration page. If
it is correctly installed, "Bluetooth" will appear for "Device Connection" on the configuration page.
64
• For details, see the operating instructions included with the Bluetooth interface unit.
Installing the IEEE 1284 Interface Board 2
• For connection to the IEEE 1284 interface board, use a half pitch 36-pin interface cable.
BMW032S
1. IEEE 1284 Interface Board

BMV165S
65
4. Fully insert the IEEE 1284 interface board.
BMV177S
Confirm that the IEEE 1284 interface board is firmly connected to the controller board.
5. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.
BMV178S
6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the printer.

7. Print the configuration page to confirm that the board was attached correctly.
installed, "Parallel Interface" will appear for "Device Connection" on the configuration page.
• p.77 "Parallel Cable Connection"
66
Installing SD Card Options

This section provides the procedure for installing the following SD cards: the HDD encryption unit, Data
overwrite security unit, camera direct print card, NetWare card, and VM card.
• Keep SD cards out of reach of children. If a child swallows a SD card, consult a doctor immediately. 2
• Do not subject the card to physical shocks.
BFL308S
1. SD card
3. Loosen the screw and remove the SD card slot cover in angle.
BMV179S
67
4. Insert the SD card into the slot until it clicks.
BMV180S
Insert the SD card in the appropriate slot as follows:

• Upper slot: Data overwrite security unit, camera direct print card, or NetWare card
• Lower slot: HDD encryption unit or VM card
5. Hook the SD card slot cover onto the opening, attach it flat against the controller board, and
then fasten it using the screw.
BMV181S
6. Plug in the power cord, and then turn on the printer.

7. See the control panel menu to confirm that the SD card was installed correctly.
• Do not touch the card while the printer is in use. The card may come loose, even if it is pushed only
slightly. The SD card slot cover must be reattached.
• You can confirm that the SD card was installed correctly by checking the control panel menu.
Depending on the SD card, certain menu items appear on the display.
• Data overwrite security unit: [Memory Erase Status] appears on the top level menu.
• HDD encryption unit: [Machine Data Encryption] appears in [Security Options].
• NetWare card: [NetWare] appears when you select [Host Interface], then [Network], and then
[Effective Protocol].
68
• Confirm that the camera direct print card is correctly installed by printing the configuration page. If
the camera direct print card is installed properly, [PictBridge] will appear for [Printer Language] in
[System Reference].
• If the card is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it cannot be installed
correctly even after reattempting installation, contact your sales or service representative.
2
69
70
This chapter explains how to connect network and USB cables.
Ethernet Cable Connection

Prepare a hub and other network devices, and connect the Ethernet cable to the printer.
If you are connecting the printer using the printer's standard Ethernet port, use a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-
TX cable.
If you are connecting the printer using the optional Gigabit Ethernet board, you can use a 1000BASE-T
3
cable, instead of a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable.
• A network interface cable with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.
• For users outside the United States of America: properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors
must be used for connections to a host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet emission limits.
• For users in the United States of America: properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors
must be used for connections to a host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission
limits.
• An Ethernet cable is not supplied with this printer. Select your cable according to the network
environment.
• The printer's Ethernet port is not available when the Gigabit Ethernet board is attached to the printer.
• Use the following Ethernet cables:
• When using 100Base-TX/10Base-T
Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable or Shielded twisted pair (STP) cable, category 5 or greater.
• When using 1000Base-T:
Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable or Shielded twisted pair (STP) cable, category 5e or greater.
71
Connecting to the standard Ethernet port
1. Attach the ferrite core supplied with this printer at the printer end of the Ethernet cable about
5 cm (2.5 inches) ( ) from the connector, making a loop as shown.
3
BBM011S
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port that is located on the left side of the printer.
BMV182S
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the network, for example using a hub.
Connecting to the Ethernet port of the Gigabit Ethernet board
1. Attach the two ferrite cores to the Ethernet cable.

Attach the ferrite cores supplied with the Gigabit Ethernet board about 5 cm (2.5 inches) ( ) from
the connector at both ends of the Ethernet cable, making a loop as shown.
72
Ethernet Cable Connection
BAX007S
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port of the Gigabit Ethernet board.
BMV183S
3. Connect the other end of the cable to a network hub, for example, to connect the printer to
the network.
• For details about configuring the network environment, see "Ethernet Configuration".
• p.54 "Installing the Gigabit Ethernet Board"

73
Reading the LED Lamps
Standard Ethernet port
BMV184S
1. Yellow: turns on when 100BASE-TX is in use. It turns off when 10BASE-T is in use.
2. Green: turns on when the printer is properly connected to the network.
Ethernet port of the Gigabit Ethernet board
BMV185S
1. Green: turns on when 10BASE-T is in use.

2. Both the green and yellow lamps are lit when 1000BASE-T is in use.
3. Yellow: turns on when 100BASE-TX is in use.
74
USB Cable Connection
USB Cable Connection
must be used for connections to a host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission
limits.
3
• USB connection is possible under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008, Mac OS 9, and Mac OS 10.3.3 or later.
• USB connection with a Macintosh is only possible via the printer's USB port.
• A USB cable is not supplied with this printer. Select your cable according to the computer.
1. Connect the square-shaped connector of the USB cable to USB port B on the left side of the
printer.
BMV186S
2. Connect the opposite end's flat connector to the desired device such as your computer's USB
interface, or a USB hub.
Digital Camera Connection
This printer supports direct printing, which allows you to print images taken with a digital camera by
connecting the camera directly to the printer. The following describes how to connect the printer to a digital
camera.
75
3
BMV051S
• This function requires Camera direct print card.

• Make sure your digital camera supports PictBridge.
• A USB cable is not supplied. Use the USB cable that was included with your digital camera.
1. Confirm that the printer and digital camera are turned on.
2. Connect the USB cable to USB port A on the printer and to your digital camera.
BMV295S
3. When a digital camera is not connected to the printer, store the USB cable in a location
where it will not be damaged.
• For the printing method, see "PictBridge Printing", Software Guide.
• p.67 "Installing SD Card Options"
76
Parallel Cable Connection
Parallel Cable Connection

The type of cable required varies depending on the computer you are using. Make sure to use the interface
cable compliant with your computer.
must be used for connections to a host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission 3
limits.
• The printer's parallel connection is a standard bidirectional interface that requires an IEEE 1284-
compliant half pitch 36-pin parallel cable and host computer parallel port.
• Use shielded interface cable. Unshielded cables create electromagnetic interference.
1. Turn off the printer and computer.

2. Connect the interface cable to the IEEE 1284 interface board.
BMW033S
3. Connect the other end of the interface cable to your computer, and then secure the cable.
• "Preparing for Printing", Software Guide
• p.65 "Installing the IEEE 1284 Interface Board"
77
78
4. Configuration
This chapter explains supported network connections, and settings for the IP addresses and the Wireless
LAN security.
Ethernet Configuration
Configure the following network settings according to the network environment using the control panel.
• The following table shows the control panel settings and their default values. These items appear in
the [Host Interface] menu.
4
Setting Name Default
• DHCP: On
• IPv4 Address: 11.22.33.44
Machine IPv4 Address
• Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
• Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0
IPv6 Stateless Setting Active
IPsec Inactive
NW Frame Type Auto Select
• IPv4: Active
• IPv6: Inactive
Effective Protocol • NetWare: Inactive
• SMB: Active
• AppleTalk: Inactive
Ethernet Speed Auto Select
IEEE802.1X Auth.(Ethernet) Inactive
Restr.IEEE802.1X Auth.Def. -
LAN Type Ethernet
• If DHCP is in use on your network, the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are all set
automatically.
79
4. Configuration
• If the printer is already placed on a TCP/IP-capable environment, you can also use
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or a Web browser to configure IP address-related settings.
Specifying an IP Address (No DHCP)
Follow this procedure to assign a specific IP address to the printer. This is only necessary when you will use
the printer on a network without DHCP, or want to prevent the printer's IP address from changing.
Before beginning, make sure that you know the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address that the
printer will use.
BMW028S
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Host Interface], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] to select [Network], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Effective Protocol], and then press the [OK] key.
80
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the appropriate network protocol, and then press the [OK]
key.
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Active] or [Inactive], and then press the [OK] key.
4
Set other protocols you need to set in the same way.
• Select [Inactive] for unused protocols.
• Enable IPv4 to use the pure IPv4 environment of NetWare5/5.1, Netware 6/6.5.
7. Press the [Escape] key until the screen returns to the [Network] menu.
8. If you use IPv4, assign the IPv4 address to the printer. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select
[Machine IPv4 Address], and then press the [OK] key.
To get the IP address for the printer, contact your network administrator.
9. To specify the IP address, press [IP Add.].
If you use IPv4, also assign the subnet mask and gateway address. To assign these, press [Subnet M]
or [Gateway].
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] to enter the address, and then press the [OK] key.
Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter the left-most entry field of the address. After entering the left field,
press the [ ] key, and then you can enter the next field. After completing entry of the all fields, press
the [OK] key. Use the same method to assign the subnet mask and gateway address.
81
4. Configuration
• Change the IP address from “11.22.33.44” to an IP address supported by your network.

11. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Specify], and then press the [OK] key.
If you do not select [Specify] in this step, the address you set will not be saved.
12. Press the [Menu] key to return to the initial screen.
13. Print a configuration page to confirm the settings.
4
• For details about printing the configuration page, see "List/Test Print Menu", Software Guide.
Receiving an IP Address Automatically (DHCP)
Follow this procedure to set the printer to receive an IP address automatically using DHCP. The DHCP
feature is active by default, so this procedure is only required if you have changed the default settings.
• When [DHCP] is selected, you cannot configure the IP address, subnet mask, or gateway address.
• Consult your network administrator for information about configuring network settings.
BMW028S
82
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Network], and then press the [OK] key.
4
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Machine IPv4 Address], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)], and then press the [OK] key.
The printer will automatically receive an IP address.

To check the detected addresses, press the following:
• [IP Add.] : IP address
• [Subnet M] : Subnet mask
• [Gateway] : Gateway address
83
4. Configuration
Configuring Network Settings When Using NetWare
If you use NetWare, select the appropriate NetWare frame type.

Select one of the items below as necessary.
• Auto Select
• Ethernet II
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet SNAP
4 • Usually, you can use the default (Auto Select). When you first select [Auto Select], the frame type
detected by the printer is adopted. However, if your network can use more than two frame types, the
printer may fail to select the correct frame type with [Auto Select] selected. In this case, select the
preferred frame type.
BMW028S
84
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [NW Frame Type], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the frame type to use, and then press the [OK] key.
4
Setting the Ethernet Speed
You can set the speed that the printer will use for Ethernet communications. In most cases, this should be
left on the default setting, [Auto Select]. This setting allows two interfaces to automatically determine the
optimum speed when they are connected.
Printer
Router/HUB [10Mbps Half [10Mbps Full [100Mbps [100Mbps Full
[Auto Select]
Duplex] Duplex] Half Duplex] Duplex]
10 Mbps half
- - -
duplex
10 Mbps full
- - - -
duplex
100 Mbps half

- - -
duplex
100 Mbps full

- - - -
duplex
85
4. Configuration
Printer
Router/HUB [10Mbps Half [10Mbps Full [100Mbps [100Mbps Full
[Auto Select]
Duplex] Duplex] Half Duplex] Duplex]
auto-
negotiation
- -
(auto
selection)
• Connection cannot be established if the selected Ethernet speed does not match your network's
4 transmission speed.
• The auto-negotiation mechanism allows two interfaces to automatically determine an optimum
Ethernet speed as soon as they are connected. We recommend you select [Auto Select].
BMW028S
86
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Ethernet Speed], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the Ethernet speed, and then press the [OK] key.
4
87
4. Configuration
Wireless LAN Configuration

Configure the following wireless LAN settings according to the network environment using the control panel.
• Ethernet and Wireless LAN cannot be used at the same time.

• To use wireless LAN, set as follows using the control panel: press the [Menu] key, select [Host
Interface], [Network], [LAN Type], and then select [Wireless LAN]. In addition, you must set the IP
address, subnet mask, gateway address, DHCP, Frame Type (NW), and active protocol as explained
in "Ethernet Configuration".
• The following table shows the control panel settings and their defaults. These items appear in the [Host
4 Interface] menu.
Setting Name Default
Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode
SSID Setting blank
Ad-hoc Channel 11
Security Method Off
Wireless LAN Signal -
Restore Defaults -
BMW028S
88
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wireless LAN], and then press the [OK] key.
4
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Communication Mode], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the transmission mode of the wireless LAN, and then press
the [OK] key.
• To communicate wirelessly with a device that does not require an SSID to be set, select [802.11
Ad-hoc Mode].
• The transmission mode of the wireless LAN can also be set using Web Image Monitor.
6. If [802.11 Ad-hoc Mode] is selected for [Communication Mode], press the [ ] or [ ] key to
select [Ad-hoc Channel], and then press the [OK] key.
89
4. Configuration
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the Ad-hoc channel, and then press the [OK] key.
Select an Ad-hoc channel according to the IEEE 802.11 standard you are using.
When using IEEE 802.11 b/g:
Channels 1 to 13
Channels 1 to 11
4 When using IEEE 802.11 a:
Channels 36,40,44,48
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the appropriate channel, and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Communication Speed], and then press the [OK] key.
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the appropriate speed, and then press the [OK] key.
The default is [Auto]. If you need to change the transmission speed depending on the environment
you are using, select the appropriate speed.
• For details, see Web Image Monitor Help, and “Using Web Image Monitor”, Software Guide.
Setting the SSID
When [Communication Mode] is set to [Infrastructure Mode] or [802.11 Ad-hoc Mode], you must specify
the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the wireless access point that the printer will connect to for network
access.
Ask the network administrator for the SSID to use.
90
1. In the [Wireless LAN] menu, press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [SSID Setting], and then press
the [OK] key.
If an SSID has been set, you can check the current SSID setting.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter characters, and then press [Accept].
You can switch among upper/lower cases, numeric codes, and symbols by pressing [ABC/123].
The characters that can be used are ASCII 0 × 20-0 × 7e (32 bytes).
• The SSID can also be set using a Web browser. For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help, and
"Configuring the Network Interface Board", Software Guide. For details about printing the
configuration page, see "List/Test Print Menu", Software Guide.
Cautions When Using a Wireless LAN
A wireless LAN uses radio waves instead of cables to send and receive data. Because radio waves usually
pass through walls and other obstructions, the following problems may arise if you do not configure wireless
security settings.
Information leakage
Information such as IDs, passwords, credit card numbers, and e-mail content may be seen by an
unauthorized 3rd party.
Unauthorized network access
• Damage to or alteration of data and/or system configurations by viruses or other malware.
• Impersonation of legitimate network users, resulting in data theft.
• Theft of sensitive or confidential data.
91
4. Configuration
To minimize the possibility of these threats, it is recommended that you check the available features of this
printer, wireless access points, and other equipment that uses the wireless LAN, and configure security
settings for the wireless LAN.
92
Setting Security Method of Wireless LAN

Setting a WEP Key
If the wireless network uses WEP to encrypt transmitted data, the corresponding WEP key must be set to
the printer to allow communications with other network devices.
Ask the network administrator for the WEP key to use.
1. In the [Wireless LAN] menu, press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Security Method], and then
press the [OK] key.
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [WEP], and then press [Details].
When activating the WEP setting, you will need to enter the WEP key. If you have not entered the key,
be sure to enter it.
3. A confirmation message appears. Press [Enter].
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter characters, and then press [Accept].
• When entering a character, pressing [Accept] will mask it with an asterisk for security reasons.
93
4. Configuration
• When using 64-bit WEP, up to 10 hexadecimal characters or five ASCII characters can be
entered. When using 128-bit WEP, up to 26 hexadecimal characters or 13 ASCII characters
can be used.
• Up to 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters and 5 or 13 ASCII characters can be entered.
• For ASCII character strings, uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated, so be sure to
enter characters in the required case.
• The WEP key can also be set using a Web browser. For details, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
4 • For details about printing the configuration page, see "List/Test Print Menu", Software Guide.
Setting WPA
In the case of using WPA on a network, activate the WPA setting to be used for communication along with
WPA. Consult your network administrator for information about making authentication settings.
BMW028S
94
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Wireless LAN], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Security Method], and then press the [OK] key.
4
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [WPA], and then press [Details].
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Encryption Method], and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select encryption method, and then press the [OK] key.
Consult your network administrator for information about making encryption settings.
Encryption settings are as follows:
• [TKIP]
Uses the same algorithm as RC4, but further reduces vulnerability using methods such as key
mixing.
• [CCMP(AES)]
Increases security using AES (Advanced Encryption Standard).
95
4. Configuration
Wait for two seconds. The display returns to the [WPA] menu.
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Authentication Method], and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select authentication method, and then press the [OK] key.
Authentication settings are as follows:

• [WPA-PSK]
Performs authentication using an encryption key (a Pre-Shared Key) that is shared by the access
point and client.
• [WPA]
WPA uses CA certificates and a RADIUS server to provide secure wireless communication.
• [WPA2-PSK]
As with WPA-PSK, authenticate using the encryption key (a Pre-Shared Key) shared by the access
point and client.
• [WPA2]
WPA2 is an expanded version of WPA that fully supports IEEE802.11i.
10. If [WPA] or [WPA2] is selected in step 9, a confirmation message appears. Press the [OK]
key.
Wait for two seconds. The display returns to the [WPA] menu.
11. If [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK] is selected in step 9, a confirmation message appears. Press
[Enter].
96
12. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter the Pre-Shared Key, and then press the [OK] key.
• When entering a character, pressing [OK] will mask it with an asterisk for security reasons.
• Enter the Pre-Shared Key using between 8 and 63 ASCII characters.
• Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated, so be sure to enter characters in the required
case.
13. When all characters have been entered, press [Accept]. 4
Wait for two seconds. The display returns to the [Authentication Method] menu.
The initial screen appears.
• For details about printing a configuration page, see "List/Test Print Menu", Software Guide.
97
4. Configuration
Configuring 802.1X (WPA/WPA2)

WPA/WPA2 uses an authentication server to provide greatly enhanced security compared to WPA-PSK/
WPA2-PSK
IEEE 802.1X (WPA/WPA2) can be configured using Web Image Monitor's administrator mode.
To configure the settings when using Ethernet; select [Host Interface] and [IEEE802.1X Auth.(Ethernet)] in
[Network] on the display, and then select [Active].
To configure the settings when using a wireless LAN; configure WPA using the control panel or Web Image
Monitor.
4 • To set WPA/WPA2 for the wireless LAN, you must enable SSL.
• To set WPA/WPA2 for the wireless LAN, you must use Web Image Monitor.
Installing a Site Certificate
1. Access the authentication server and obtain the CA certificate.

Methods of obtaining certificates differ according to the operating system you are using.
2. Start your Web browser.
3. Enter "http://(printer's address)/" in the address bar of a Web browser.
4. Enter your user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login user name and password, contact your administrator.
5. Click [Configuration].
6. [Site Certificate] in the “Security” area.
7. Click [Browse] on the “Site Certificate to Import” window, and then select the CA certificate
you obtained.
8. Click [Import].
9. Click [OK].
10. Click [Logout].
11. Quit the Web browser.
Installing Device Certificate
Depending on the settings of your choice, certain steps in the following procedure may not be required.
98
Configuring 802.1X (WPA/WPA2)

For details about the login user name and password, consult your administrator.
5. Click [Device Certificate] in “Security” area.
6. Check [Certificate 2] on the “Device Certificate” window, and then click [Request].
7. Enter appropriate “Common Name” and “Country Code” on “Certificate Information”
page, and then click [OK].
8. “Updating...” appears. Wait for about 2 minutes, and then click [OK].
9. Click [Details], shown in the “Device Certificate” window as the memo pad icon for
“Requesting”. 4
10. Select all, and then copy the entire “Text for Requested Certificate” text that is displayed in
the “Certificate Status” window.
11. Access the certificate authority server, and then obtain the CA signified certificate using the
text copied into “Text for Requested Certificate” windows.
Obtaining the certificate differs depending on the environment you want to use.
12. Click [Certificate 2] on “Device Certificate” window, and then click [Install].
13. Using a text editor, open the CA signified certificate downloaded in step 11, and then copy
over all the text.
14. In the [Install Certificate] window, paste all the text copied into the CA signified certificate.
15. Click [OK].
16. “Updating...” appears. Wait for about one or two minutes, and then click [OK].
Check that the “Device Certificate” shows “Installed”.
17. Click [Certificate 2] on “Certification”, and then click [OK].
18. Click [Logout].
• You can select any Certificate between 1 and 4 in the "Device Certificate" window. Be sure to select
the same Certificate number in both the " Device Certificate " window and the "Certification".
• If you request two certificates simultaneously, the certificate authority might not display either
certificate. Click [Cancel Request] to cancel the request.
• Click [Cancel Request] to cancel the request for the server certificate.
• If “Not found” appears after clicking [OK] in steps 8 and 16, wait one or two minutes, and then click
[Refresh].
99
4. Configuration
Setting Items of WPA/WPA2

4. Click [Configuration], and then click [Wireless LAN Settings] in the “Interface” area.
5. Select [Infrastructure Mode] in “Communication Mode”.
6. Enter the alphanumeric characters (a-z, A-Z, or 0-9) in [SSID] according to the access point
you want to use.
4 7. Select [WPA] in “Security Method”.
8. Select [TKIP] or [CCMP (AES)] in “WPA Encryption Method” according to the access point
you want to use.
9. Select [WPA] or [WPA2] in “WPA Authentication Method”.
10. Click [OK].
11. Click [Logout].
• You can select [Certificate 1] or [Certificate 2] in the “Device Certificate” window. Note that if you
select [Certificate 1] in the “Device Certificate” window, you must select [Certificate 1] in the “IEEE
802.11a” drop down menu in the “Certification” window.
• If there is a problem with settings, you might not be able to communicate with the printer. To identify
the problem, print a network summary.
• If you cannot identify the problem, reset the printer interface to normal, and then repeat the procedure
from the beginning.
100
This chapter explains the paper sizes and type supported by this printer, and how to load paper in the
paper trays.
Supported Paper for Each Tray

This section describes the paper size, feed direction, and the maximum amount of paper that can be loaded
into each paper tray in this printer.
Symbols
In this manual On the display Paper feed direction
(Feed direction) A4 (210×297) Short-edge feed direction 5

81/2×11
(Feed direction) A5 (210×148) Long-edge feed direction

81/2×51/2
• Be careful of the paper feed direction when loading paper. The direction is determined for each paper
size.
• If you want to change the default setting, contact your sales or service representative.
Tray 1
220-240 V 120 V
Paper sizes A4 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
101
220-240 V 120 V
Plain Paper
Recycled Paper
Special Paper 1 to 3
Color Paper
Letterhead
Coated Paper:Gloss Print
Types of Paper Coated Paper
Preprinted
Bond Paper
Cardstock
5 Middle Thick
Thick Paper 1 to 3
+Custom 1 to 8
• +Custom X (X: 1 to 8) is the paper type that is named under a unique name, according to usage. For
details about registering, see "Registering Names to Paper Types".
• The paper tray guides are fixed. However, you can switch the setting between A4 , B5 , A5 and
81/2" × 11" (Letter) . If you wish to use a paper size other than the default, contact your sales or
• p.136 "Registering Names to Paper Types"
Tray 2, 500/1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit (Tray 3 to 5)
220-240 V 120 V
Paper sizes selected A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×

automatically JIS 1
, 8 /2" × 11" (Letter) 14" (Legal) , 81/2" ×
11" (Letter) ,
71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) ,
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS
102
220-240 V 120 V
Paper sizes requiring manual 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) 81/2" × 13" (Foolscap) ,
setting , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 81/2" × 81/4" × 13" (Folio) , 8" ×
13" (Foolscap) , 81/2" × 13" (F/GL) , 71/4" ×
11" (Letter) , 81/4" × 13" (Folio) 101/2" (Executive) , A3 ,
, 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 8K
, 8K , 16K , 16K
Custom size: 182 to 297 mm in Custom size: 7.17" to 11.69" in
width, 148 to 432 mm in length width, 5.83" to 17.00" in length
*1 *1
Types of Paper Plain Paper

Recycled Paper
Color Paper
5
Letterhead
Coated Paper
Preprinted
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Middle Thick
Thick Paper 1 to 3
+Custom 1 to 8
*1 If the length of custom size paper is 420 mm (16.54 inches) or more, the maximum width is 279 mm (10.98
inches)
• When using paper whose sizes are not automatically selected, select the paper size manually using
the control panel. See "Loading Paper".

• p.118 "Loading Paper"
103
2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit (Tray 3)
220-240 V 120V
Paper sizes A4 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
Plain Paper
Recycled Paper
Color Paper
Letterhead
Types of Paper Coated Paper
5 Preprinted
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Middle Thick
Thick Paper 1 to 3
+Custom 1 to 8
• The paper tray guides are fixed. However, you can switch the setting between A4 and 81/2" ×
11" (Letter) . If you wish to use a paper size other than the default, contact your sales or service
representative.
Bypass Tray
220-240 V 120 V
Paper sizes selected A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)

automatically , 51/2" × 81/2" (Half Letter)
104
220-240 V 120 V
Paper sizes requiring manual B4 JIS , B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" ×
setting 11" × 17" , 8 /2" × 14" (Legal) 13" (Foolscap) , 81/4" ×
1
, 81/2" × 13" (Foolscap) , 13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL)

1
8 /2" × 11" (Letter) , , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive)
81/4" × 13" (Folio) , 8" × , 41/8" × 91/2" , 37/8" ×
13" (F/GL) , 71/4" × 71/2" , C5 Env. , C6 Env. ,
101/ " (Executive)
2 , 51/ " × DL Env. , A3 ,
2
81/2" (Half Letter) , 41/8" × A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS
91/2" , 37/8" × 71/2" , C5 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 8K ,
Env. , C6 Env. , DL Env. , 8K 16K , 12" × 18"
, 16K , 12" × 18" Custom size: 3.55" to 12.00" in
Custom size: 90 to 305 mm in width, 5.83" to 49.60" in length
width, 148 to 1260 mm in length
5
Types of Paper Plain Paper
Recycled Paper
Color Paper
Letterhead
Labels
Transparency
Envelope
Coated Paper
Preprinted
Bond Paper
Cardstock
Thin Paper
Middle Thick
Thick Paper 1 to 3
+Custom 1 to 8
105
• Tracing paper can curl easily due to humidity. If the paper has curled considerably, flatten it first, and
then load it.
• Some types of paper have a clear vertical or horizontal orientation depending on the direction of the
fibers. If you feed this type of paper in the opposite orientation, paper jams can occur. When loading
tracing paper, load the paper so that it is fed in the direction of the fibers.
• Print quality may not be guaranteed for custom size paper that is wider than 297 mm (11.69 inches)
in width or longer than 433 mm (17.05 inches) in length.
• When using paper whose sizes are not automatically selected, select the paper size manually using
the control panel. See "Loading Paper".

5 Paper Weight and Capacity
Supported capacity (Plain

Tray Supported paper weight
paper)
Tray 1 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.) 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Tray 2 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.) 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
500-sheet paper feed unit 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.) 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
1000-sheet paper feed unit 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.) 550 sheets × 2 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
1000 sheets × 2 (80 g/m2, 20

2000-sheet paper feed unit 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.)
lb.)
Bypass tray 52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb.) 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
• Do not load the paper so that the top of the stack exceeds the under limit mark inside the tray.
106
Paper Recommendations
This section describes loading and storing paper, details of each type of paper, and the printable area.
Configure the settings depending on the type of paper you are using.
• Print quality cannot always be guaranteed for all types of paper that are sold at stores.
Storing Paper
Take care when storing paper. Improperly stored paper might result in poor print quality, paper misfeeds,
or printer damage. Recommendations are as follows:
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas.
• Avoid exposing paper to direct sunlight.
5
• Store on a flat surface.
• Keep paper in its original package until time to use it.
Types of Paper and Other Media
This section describes the types of paper and required settings.
Plain paper
Paper thickness 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb.)
Select [Paper Input] [Paper Type: (tray name)]

Printer setup
[Plain Paper].
Printer driver setup Select [Plain] in [Paper type].
Supported paper feeding tray Any input tray can be used.
107
• Tray 1, 2: 550
• Tray 3: 550 (500/1000-sheet paper feed
unit) or 2000 (2000-sheet paper feed unit)
• Tray 4: 550
Paper capacity • Tray 5: 550

• Bypass tray: 100
Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the
upper limit mark ( ) inside the tray. When using the
bypass tray, make sure paper is not stacked higher
than the paper guides inside it.
Duplex printing Supported
• Default: [Plain Paper 2]

5 • When loading paper with a weight of 60 to
74 g/m2 (16to 20 lb.), change the plain
Additional Cautions paper setting to [Plain Paper 1]. To do this,
press the [Menu] key, and select
[Maintenance] on the display. Select
[General Settings], then [Plain Paper Setting],
and then select [Plain Paper 1].
Middle Thick

Printer setup
[Middle Thick].
Printer driver setup Select [Middle Thick] in [Paper type].
108
• Tray 1, 2: 550
• Tray 3: 550 (500/1000-sheet paper feed
unit) or 2000 (2000-sheet paper feed unit)
• Tray 4: 550
Paper capacity • Tray 5: 550

• Bypass tray: 100
Thick paper 5
106 to 256 g/m2 (28 to 68 lb.)
• [Thick Paper 1]: 106 to 169 g/m2 (28 to 45
lb.)
Paper thickness • [Thick Paper 2]: 170 to 220 g/m2 (45 to 59
lb.)
• [Thick Paper 3]: 221 to 256 g/m2 (59 to 68
lb.)

Printer setup
[Thick Paper 1] to [Thick Paper 3].
Select [Thick 1 (106 - 170g/m2)] to [Thick 3 (221

Printer driver setup
- 256g/m2)] in [Paper type].
• Bypass tray: 40 for [Thick Paper 1], 20 for

[Thick Paper 2] and [Thick Paper 3]
Paper capacity Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the
109
• [Thick Paper 1]: Supported

Duplex printing • [Thick Paper 2], [Thick Paper 3]: Not
supported
• Print speed is slightly slower than when using

plain paper.
• When loading paper in the printer paper trays
or the paper feed units, load at least 20
sheets. Also, adjust the side guide so that it
lightly touches the paper.
Additional cautions • Curled paper: If the paper is curled, flatten the

paper before loading it.
• If you are using thick paper with a smooth
surface, paper jams or multiple feeding can
5 occur. Fan the paper before loading it. If a
paper jam or multiple feeding occurs even
after you have fanned the paper, set the
paper one sheet at a time.
Thin paper
Select [Paper Input] [Paper Type: Bypass Tray]

Printer setup
[Thin Paper].
Printer driver setup Select [Thin (52 - 60 g/m2)] in [Paper type].
Supported paper feeding tray Bypass tray

Paper capacity
Duplex printing Not supported
When printing on thin paper, make a test print and

Additional cautions check the print quality. Depending on the type of
paper you are using, print quality may degrade.
110
OHP transparencies

Printer setup
[OHP (Transparency)].
Printer driver setup Select [OHP Transparency] in [Paper type].

Paper capacity
paper guides inside the bypass tray.
• When loading OHP transparencies, take care

not to load them upside down. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
• It is recommended to place one sheet at a
5
time.
• Make sure to fan OHP transparencies every
time before printing. Leaving OHP
Additional cautions transparencies loaded in the paper tray may
cause them to stick together and result in a
misfeed.
• If multiple OHP transparencies are fed at the
same time, load them one by one.
• When printing on OHP transparencies,
remove the transparencies one by one as they
are output.
Letterhead

Printer setup
[Letterhead].
Printer driver setup Select [Letterhead] in [Paper type].

Paper capacity
111
Default: [Letterhead 1]
If the print quality needs to be improved, select
[Maintenance] [General Settings]
Letterhead setup [Letterhead] [Letterhead 1] to [Letterhead 3] to
change the setting value to a different number
depending on the paper thickness that you are
using. High numbered settings allow thicker paper
to be used, but are printed more slowly.
When loading paper whose orientations are

specified such as letterhead or letter paper,
Additional cautions misprints may occur. Refer to "Printing on paper
whose orientations are specified" for loading
5 paper.
Label paper

Printer setup
[Label Paper].
Printer driver setup Select [Labels] in [Paper type].
Paper capacity 1

plain paper.
Additional cautions • Shuffle paper before loading the stack onto
the tray, so multiple sheets are not fed in
together.
Coated paper: gloss print

Printer setup
[Coated Paper: Gloss Print].
Printer driver setup Select [Coated paper: gloss print] in [Paper type].
112
Any input tray can be used.

Supported paper feeding tray upper limit mark ( ) inside the tray. When using the

plain paper.
• If the paper is curled, flatten it before loading.
Additional cautions • Fan the paper before loading it. When using
the bypass tray, set the paper one page at a
time if multiple sheets are fed, paper jams
occur, or you hear a strange noise.
5
Coated paper

Printer setup
[Coated Paper].
Printer driver setup Select [Coated paper] in [Paper type].
Any input tray can be used.

Supported paper feeding tray upper limit mark ( ) inside the tray. When using the
113
Default: [Coated Paper 1]

If the print quality needs to be improved, select
[Maintenance] [General Settings] [Coated
Paper Setting] [Coated Paper 1] to [Coated
Paper 7].
When selecting the paper setting depending on the
Coated paper setup thickness, select [Coated Paper 1] to [Coated
Paper 5]. High numbered settings allow thicker
paper to be used, but are printed more slowly.
When selecting the paper setting depending on the
type, select [Coated Paper 6], [Coated Paper 7].
High numbered settings allow thicker paper to be
used, but are printed more slowly.
5 • Print speed is slightly slower than when using

plain paper.
Additional cautions • Fan the paper before loading it. When using
the bypass tray, set the paper one page at a
time if multiple sheets are fed, paper jams
occur, or you hear a strange noise.
Special paper
When you cannot print successfully with other

Special paper standard
paper type settings, set special paper.

Printer setup
[Special Paper 1] to [Special Paper 3].
Printer driver setup Select [Special 1] to [Special 3] in [Paper type].

Paper capacity
114
Envelopes
Select [Paper Input] [Paper Type: Bypass Tray ]

Printer setup
[Envelope].
Printer driver setup Select [Envelope] in [Paper type].

Paper capacity
paper guides inside the bypass tray.
• Load envelopes with the print side down, and

the open end of the envelope facing out from
the printer.
• When printing on envelopes, set the envelope
5
size using the printer driver or control panel.
See "Loading Paper" for details.
• Before loading envelopes, remove any air
inside and make sure all edges are sharply
creased. If envelopes are curled, straighten
them before loading.
Additional cautions • If envelopes are curled when they are output,

straighten them by rubbing.
• Depending on the printing environment,
envelopes may be output with the edges
wrinkled, with toner marks on the back, or
blurred. In addition, when printing solid black
areas, streaks may appear where two
envelopes touch.
• Depending on the type of envelope or printing
environment, envelopes might be output
creased or printed improperly. In such cases,
try changing the loading orientation.
115
Paper Not Supported by This Printer
• Do not use the following types of paper:

• Ink-jet printer paper
• GelJet special paper
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Curled or twisted paper
• Wet paper
• Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity
• Paper that has already been printed on
Misprints are especially likely when using paper printed on by printers other than a laser printer
5 (e.g. monochrome and color copiers, ink-jet printers, etc.) Refrain from printing on the side on
which nothing is printed.
• Surface-processed paper (excluding specified paper)
• Special paper, such as thermal paper and carbon paper
• Paper whose weight is heavier or lighter than the limitation
• Perforated paper
• Adhesive label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed
• Paper with clips or staples
• Even if paper is adequate for the printer, poorly stored paper can cause paper misfeeds, print quality
degradation, or malfunctions.
• Using pre-punched paper may cause paper misfeed or undetected paper size.
Print Area
This section describes the area of a page that is available for printing.
The following diagram shows the print area for this printer.
116
Paper
BMW001S
• While printing may be possible on the entire page depending on the settings of the printer driver or
print conditions, the quality cannot be guaranteed for the 5.2 mm (0.21 inches) margin of the upper
side, the 4.2 mm (0.17 inches) margins of the right and left sides, and the 3.2 mm (0.13 inches)
margin of the lower side.
• The print area of long paper is restricted to 1260 mm (49.60 inches) long in the feed direction.
117
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper into the paper tray or onto the bypass tray.
Do not add paper to a tray before it runs out of paper. If you do so, multiple sheets of paper may be fed
at one time, which results in a paper jam.
Paper Tray, 500/1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit
The following example explains how to load paper into paper trays, and how to change paper size.
The same procedure can be used for all trays. Tray 2 is used as an example.
• Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit mark inside the paper tray. Paper misfeeds
5 might occur.
• Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray.
• During printing, do not open or close the printer covers or bypass tray, or pull out or push in the paper
tray.
1. Carefully pull out the paper tray until it stops.
BMV054S
When printing using the bypass tray, do not pull out the paper tray.
118
Loading Paper
2. Unlock the side guides.
BMV055S
3. Pinch the clip on the side guide ( ), and match the guides to the paper size ( ).
BEK001S
4. Align and load paper in the tray with the print side up.
You can load up to 550 sheets in each tray.
BMV056S
119
5. Pinch the clips on the end guide ( ), and match the guide to the paper size ( ).
BEK191S
Confirm that there are no gaps between the paper and paper guides. If there are gaps, adjust the
guides.
6. Lock the side guides.
5
BMV057S
7. Push the paper tray carefully into the printer until it stops.
If you push the tray forcefully, the paper guides might move.
• For details about types of paper supported by this printer, see p.101 "Supported Paper for Each
Tray".
Setting paper size not selected automatically

Set the paper size using the control panel when loading paper whose size cannot be selected automatically.
120
Loading Paper
BMW028S
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Input], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Size: (tray name)], and then press the [OK] key. For
example, [Paper Size: Tray 2] is selected for Tray 2 as shown.
4. Select the paper size you want to set using the scroll keys, and then press the [OK ] key.
About two seconds later, the display returns to the [Paper Input] screen.
The display returns to the initial screen. This completes the paper size setting.
If you want to return the settings to [Auto Detect], load paper into the paper tray and follow the
procedure below.
121
BMW028S
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Size: Tray 2], and then press the [OK] key.
9. Select [Auto Detect] using the scroll keys, and then press the [OK] key.
5
The display returns to the initial screen.
Setting custom size paper

Set the custom paper size using the control panel when loading custom size paper.
• When printing on custom size paper, specify the paper size using the control panel or printer driver.
• The custom size paper selected using the printer driver overrides that selected using the control panel.
Do not configure settings using the control panel if you have already configured settings using the
printer driver. However, when printing with a printer driver other than the RPCS printer driver, you
must configure the settings using the control panel.
• The following is the range of paper size that can be set as custom size: 182 to 297 mm (7.17 to
11.69 inches) in width and 148 to 432 mm (5.83 to 17.00 inches) in length.
• The printer cannot print to custom size paper from applications that do not support custom size paper.
122
Loading Paper
BMW028S
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Size: (tray name)], and then press the [OK] key. For
example, [Paper Size: Tray 2] is selected for Tray 2 as shown.
4. Select [Custom Size] using the scroll keys, and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter the horizontal value, and then press the [OK] key.
If you press and hold the key, the value increases/decreases by 1 or 10 mm.
123
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter the vertical value, and then press the [OK] key.
The settings appear and about two seconds later, the display returns to the [Paper Input] screen.
If you want to return the settings to [Auto Detect], load paper into the paper tray, and follow the
procedure below.
5 8. Press the [Menu] key.
BMW028S
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Size: Tray 2], and then press the [OK] key.
11. Select [Auto Detect] using the scroll keys, and then press the [OK] key.
124
Loading Paper
Specifying a paper type

This section describes how to specify a paper type. You can improve printer performance by selecting the
optimum paper type for the tray.
BMW028S
5
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Type: (tray name)], and then press the [OK] key.
For example, [Paper Type: Tray 2] is selected for Tray 2 as shown.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the paper type that is loaded, and then press the [OK] key.
125
• The tray does not support envelopes and OHP transparencies.

• Duplex printing is not supported for the following paper types: labels, Thin paper, cardstock, OHP
transparency, envelopes, thick paper ([Thick Paper 2], [Thick Paper 3]), coated paper, coated paper:
gloss print.
2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit
This section describes how to load paper into the 2000-sheet paper feed unit (tray 3).
• Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit mark inside the paper tray. Paper misfeeds
might occur.
5 • Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray.

• During printing, do not open or close the printer covers, bypass tray, or paper tray.
• Make sure to align paper and push it neatly to both sides of the tray. If you do not, it can cause a
paper misfeed.
• The paper tray guides are fixed at A4 ( ) or 81/2 × 11 (Letter) ( ) size positions.
However, you can switch the setting between A4 and 8 1/2 × 11 (Letter) . If you wish to use a
paper size other than the default, contact your sales or service representative.
BMV058S
When printing using the bypass tray, do not pull out the paper tray.
2. Align and load paper into the right and left sides with the print side up.
You can load up to 1000 sheets in each side.
126
Loading Paper
BMV059S
3. Push the paper tray carefully into the printer until it stops.
• For details about types of paper supported by this printer, see p.101 "Supported Paper for Each
Tray".
5
BMW028S
127
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Type: Tray 3], and then press the [OK] key.
• The tray does not support envelopes and OHP transparencies.

• Duplex printing is not supported for the following paper types: Thin paper, cardstock, OHP
gloss print.
Bypass Tray
This section explains how to load paper into the bypass tray and change paper size.
Loading standard size paper
• Shuffle paper before loading the stack onto the tray, so multiple sheets are not fed in together.
• Set the size and direction of the loaded paper on the control panel or with the printer driver. Make
sure the settings do not conflict. Otherwise, the paper may jam or the print quality may be affected.
• Load paper with the print side down and in the short-edge feed direction.
• The bypass tray does not support duplex printing.
• When setting long paper to the bypass tray, support it with your hand to ensure it is fed properly.
• Paper feeding process or image quality varies depending on the paper thickness or width.
• Check the print in advance using the same type of paper.
128
Loading Paper
1. Open the bypass tray.
BMW072S
2. If you load paper longer than A4 , pull out the bypass tray extension.
BEK014S
3. Slide the side guides outward ( ), and then load paper with the print side down ( ), flush
against the printer.
BEK015S
4. Adjust the side guides to fit the paper width.

Paper capacity of the bypass tray differs between plain and thick paper. Check the limit marks on the
paper guide of the bypass tray.
129
BEK016S
BMW028S
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Size: Bypass Tray], and then press the [OK] key.
8. Select the paper size you want to set using the scroll keys, and then press the [OK] key.
130
Loading Paper
• Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the paper guides inside the bypass tray.
• Be sure to select the appropriate paper type when you load labels, thick paper, envelopes, or OHP
transparencies in the bypass tray.
Setting custom size paper
• When printing on custom size paper, specify the paper size using the control panel or printer driver.
• The custom size paper selected using the printer driver overrides that selected using the control panel.
Do not configure settings using the control panel if you have already configured settings using the
5
printer driver. However, when printing with a printer driver other than the RPCS printer driver, you
must configure the settings using the control panel.
• The following is the range of paper size that can be set as custom size: 90 to 305 mm (3.55 to 12
inches) in width and 148 to 1260 mm (5.83 to 49.60 inches) in length.
• The printer cannot print to custom size paper from applications that do not support custom size paper.
BMW028S
131
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Size: Bypass Tray], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Select [Custom Size] using the scroll keys, and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter the horizontal value, and then press the [OK] key.
5
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter the vertical value, and then press the [OK] key.
The settings appear and about two seconds later, the display returns to the [Paper Input] screen.
• Print quality may not be guaranteed for custom size paper that is wider than 297 mm (11.69 inches)
in width or longer than 433 mm (17.05 inches) in length.

132
Loading Paper
• Be sure to select the appropriate paper type when you load labels, thick paper, envelopes, or OHP
transparencies in the bypass tray.
• The paper type selected using the printer driver overrides that selected using the control panel.
BMW028S
5
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Paper Type: Bypass Tray], and then press the [OK] key.
133
Printing on Orientation-Fixed or Two-Sided Paper

This section explains how to print on paper whose orientation and printing side are unchangeable
(letterhead paper, for example).
When loading paper with a fixed orientation, such as letterhead or letter paper, misprints may occur.
To make sure documents are printed correctly, press the [Menu] key using control panel, and in the
[Maintenance] menu, select [General Settings], [Letterhead Setting] and [On (Always)] . Select [Letterhead]
as the paper type in the RPCS printer driver's settings when you have selected [Auto Detect] or [Off] in the
[Maintenance] menu
For the letterhead print settings, see "Types of Paper and Other Media".
Paper Trays 1-5 Bypass tray
Paper Orientation Letterhead Setting Letterhead Setting Letterhead Setting Letterhead Setting
[On] [Off] [On] [Off]
5
1-sided print
2-sided print
1-sided print
2-sided print
• If a print job is changed partway through printing from 1-sided to 2-sided printing, 1-sided output
after the first copy may print facing a different direction.
• To ensure all 1-sided copies are output on the same print side, use separate paper trays for 1-sided
and 2-sided printing, and disable 2-sided printing for the tray used for 1-sided printing.
• p.107 "Paper Recommendations"
134
Using Paper Types that Have Unique Names

From Registration of User Paper Types to Use
This section explains the procedures for selecting the paper type according to usage, registering the paper
type under a unique name, and printing a file using the registered paper type.
• This function can be used

• when the printer is operating in a network,
• in conjunction with the RPCS printer driver, and
• under Windows 2000 or higher (under earlier systems, registered paper types appear as [Plain]
in the printer driver).
• This function cannot be used 5
• with the printer driver's [Save/Restore Settings] function (registered paper types appear as
[Plain] in the printer driver) and
• if the printer and computer are not using bi-directional communication.
• Also, be aware that
• the printer driver might not display the paper type name correctly if it is registered using an
unsupported language,
• the control panel might not display the paper type name correctly if it is registered using
nonalphanumeric characters (i.e., other than a-z, A-Z, or 0-9), and
• the printer's logs do not record names of user paper types.
The example below explains setting a custom size paper under the name "Invoice A" and feeding it from
a bypass tray.
1. Using Web Image Monitor, register the name under [User Paper Type].
• Enter "Invoice A" for [Paper Name] and select [Plain Paper] for [Paper Type].
• When printing a file, the paper type is automatically set by selecting [User Paper Type] on the
printer driver setting screen.
• For details about this procedure, see “Registering Names to Paper Types”.
2. In Web Image Monitor, set [User Paper Type] for the bypass tray.
• Set [Paper Type] for the tray to "Invoice A".
• For details about this procedure, see “Setting User Paper Types to Trays”.
3. Load the paper you want to use on the bypass tray.
• Set an unprinted paper on the bypass tray.
135
• For details about this procedure, see "Loading Paper", Hardware Guide.
4. Using RPCS Printer Driver, print a document on the registered custom size paper.
• Select [Invoice A] for [Paper Type:], then proceed with the printing. When [Paper Type:] is set
to [Invoice A], Plain paper that is suitable for "Invoice A" is selected automatically. Registering
a descriptive name makes selecting a paper type from the [Paper Type:] list easier.
• For details about this procedure, see “Printing Using Registered Paper Types”.
• You can register up to eight user paper types.

• p.137 "Setting User Paper Types to Trays"
• p.138 "Printing Using Registered Paper Types"
5
Registering Names to Paper Types
Log on to Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.
• The control panel might not display the paper type name correctly if it is registered using
nonalphanumeric characters (i.e., other than a-z, A-Z, or 0-9).

2. Enter "http://(printer's address)/" in the address bar of the Web browser.
The Top of Web Image Monitor appears.
If the printer's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it in the
address bar.
If SSL (encrypted HTTP) is running in a server authentication environment, enter "https://(printer's
address)".
3. On the Top Page, click [Login].
A dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.
4. Enter your login user name and password, and then click [Login].
5. In the menu area, click [Configuration].
6. On the [Device Settings], click [User Paper Type], and then change the settings as necessary.
The screen for selecting [User Paper Type] appears.
136
7. Make changes to the following settings:

Paper Name: Enter a descriptive name for easier recognition.
Paper Type: Select a suitable paper type from the list.
The example below is for printing invoices.
• Enter "Invoice A" for [Paper Name].
• Select [Plain Paper] for [Paper Type]. If the setting is incorrect, the paper might become jammed
or print quality could be affected.
• For details about combinations of paper sizes types, paper type, see "Paper and Other Media",
Hardware Guide.
8. Click [OK].
• You can register up to eight user paper types.

5
Setting User Paper Types to Trays
Before printing, set the paper registered on the user paper type to the paper tray, and then set the paper
type already registered. Paper types can be set either from Web Image Monitor or from the printer's control
panel.
1. Log on to Web Image Monitor in administrator mode.

3. On the [Device Settings], click [Paper].
4. Set the paper tray you want to use as a user paper type, and then select the registered paper
type.
The example below is for printing invoices.
The registered paper type "Invoice A" is displayed as [+ Invoice A (Custom x)] on this screen. Select
[+ Invoice A (Custom x)] for [User Paper Type]. Make the appropriate changes to other settings as
required.
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [Logout].
7. Quit Web Image Monitor.
• For details about loading paper, see "Loading Paper", Hardware Guide.
• For details about setting the paper type from control panel, see "Loading Paper", Hardware Guide.
137
Printing Using Registered Paper Types
Select a registered paper type to print onto.
• This function can be used when the printer is operating in a network, in conjunction with the RPCS
printer driver, and under Windows 2000 or higher (under earlier systems, registered paper types
appear as [Plain] in the printer driver).
• This function cannot be used with the printer driver's [Save/Restore Settings] function (registered paper
types appear as [Plain] in the printer driver) and if the printer and computer are not using bidirectional
communication.
• The printer driver might not display the paper type name correctly if it is registered using an
unsupported language.
• The control panel might not display the paper type name correctly if it is registered using
5 nonalphanumeric characters (i.e., other than a-z, A-Z, or 0-9).
• The printer's logs do not record names of user paper types.
1. Select your application's print command.

2. On the tab in the properties dialog box that appears, select a registered paper type under
[Paper type:].
If you select Custom Setting, click the [Print Settings] tab.
3. Execute the print command.
The preregistered settings are applied and print is performed.
• For details about printer driver settings, see the printer driver Help.
138
This chapter explains how to replace consumables.
Adding Toner
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable and might ignite when exposed
to an open flame.
• Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site.
• Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children. If a child swallows toner,
consult a doctor immediately.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air environment.
Consult a doctor if necessary. 6
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult a
doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or replacing toner. If your
skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
may make removing the stain impossible.
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality. When purchasing
expendable supplies, we recommend using only those specified by an authorized dealer.
• Do not open toner containers forcefully. Toner can spill, dirtying your clothes or hands, and possibly
resulting in accidental ingestion.
• When removing toner, be careful not to drop it.

• Do not forcefully push toner in.
• When handling toner, never stand them up on either end or position them upside down.
• Store toner in a cool dark place.
• Toner is a consumable and not covered by warranty. If there is a problem, contact the store where it
was purchased.
Replace the toner when the following message appears on the display:
139
When the following message appears on the display, the toner should be replaced soon. Prepare a new
toner.
6
1. Holding the left and right side grips, carefully open the front cover.
BMV060S
From the left, the toner is installed in the order of black (K), yellow (Y), cyan (C), and magenta (M).
BMV061S
140
Adding Toner
2. Holding the toner of the color to replace, pull it out carefully.
BMV062S
Do not shake the removed toner. Any remaining toner may leak.
Pull the toner out slowly and carefully to prevent leakage.
Place the old toner on paper or some other material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
3. Take the new toner out of the box.
4. Shake the toner up and down five or six times.
6
BMV063S
Even distribution of toner within the container improves print quality.

5. With the label facing up, fully insert toner into place, keeping the container horizontal.
BMV064S
Do not install and remove toner repeatedly. Doing so results in toner leak.
141
6. Carefully close the front cover.

Wait until " Loading toner" disappears from the display.
• Cooperate with the Toner Recycling Program, whereby are collected used toner. For details, consult
with the dealer where you purchased the printer, or with a sales or service representative.
142
Replacing the Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Units
Replacing the Black Drum Unit/Color Drum

Units
Replace the black drum unit/color drum units if any of the following messages appear on the display:
When the following messages appear on the display, the black drum unit/color drum units should be
replaced soon. Prepare a new Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Unit. 6
• Exposure to light reduces black drum unit/color drum units performance. Replace the unit as quickly
as possible.
• Do not pull out the black drum unit/color drum units quickly or with force as it may fall.
• Take care that nothing comes into contact with the top surface of the black drum unit/color drum units.
• When holding the black drum unit/color drum units, grab the green grip on the left and the handle
on the front together. Do not move the black drum unit/color drum units by only grabbing the grip.
Doing so may damage the grip.
• Place no objects on the front or inner cover.
143
The following is the replacement procedure for the yellow drum unit located at the left end. This procedure
applies to the replacement of other drum units.
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable.

BMV060S
3. Turn the two green levers counterclockwise.
BMV065S
4. Pulling the handle, slowly open the inner cover.
BMV066S
The drum units are installed as shown. From the left, the units are attached in the order of yellow (Y),
cyan (C), magenta (M), and black (K).
144
BMV067S
5. Pull out the ring pull handle of the yellow drum unit.
6
BMV068S
6. Holding the handle, pull the drum unit out until the green grip area is completely visible on
the left side.
BMV069S
145
7. Holding the green grip on the left and the handle on the front, pull out the drum unit.
BMV070S
8. Take the new yellow drum unit out of the box.
BMV225S
For black, install one black drum unit; for color, install all three together.
Exposure to light reduces black drum unit/color drum units performance. Replace the unit as quickly
as possible.
9. Remove the protecting cover. Do not remove the tape hanging from the front yet.
Take care that nothing comes into contact with the top surface of the drum unit.
BMV227S
When holding the drum unit, hold the green grip on the left and the handle on the front together. Do
not move the drum unit by only holding the grip. Doing so may damage the grip.
146
10. Remove all the orange tape from the drum unit. Do not remove the tape coming out of the
unit.
11. Remove the cap.
BMV192S
12. Holding the green grip on the left and the handle on the front, carefully insert the front end
into the space horizontally.
BMV071S
Insert it horizontally as shown below.
BMV073S
147
13. Pushing the front of the drum unit, fully insert it into the printer.
BMV073S
14. Lower the handle located on the front of the drum unit, and push it until it clicks into place.
BMV074S
15. Holding the drum unit firmly in place, pull out the tape.
BMV075S
• Remember to pull out the tape. Malfunctions occur if you attempt to print while the tape is still
attached.
• The removed tape is dirty. Be careful not to let it touch your hands or clothes.
16. When replacing a color drum unit, replace the other two color units together using the same
procedure, before closing the inner cover.
148
17. Pressing both sides, firmly close the inner cover.
BMV076S
18. Turn the two green levers clockwise to lock the cover.
BMV077S

20. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the printer.
[Calibrating...] appears on the display, and the printer starts calibration. Wait until it stops. Calibration
takes four to five minutes. Do not turn off the power during calibration. Doing so results in a malfunction.
149
Replacing the Transfer Unit

Replace the transfer unit if any of the following messages appear on the display:

6
• The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch parts labeled " " (indicating a hot surface).
Touching these parts will result in burns.
• If the transfer unit is not installed correctly, a message appears on the control panel. Re-install the
transfer unit. If installation fails three times in a row, "SC443" appears on the control panel. If this
message appears, contact your sales or service representative.

BMV060S
150
3. Turn the two green levers counterclockwise.
BMV065S
4. Pulling the handle, slowly open the inner cover.
BMV066S
The transfer unit is installed as shown below.
BMW003S
5. Push up the lever on the right side, and open the printer's right cover carefully.
Opening the right cover is necessary for transfer unit replacement.
151
BMV103S
6. Turn the green lever located on the left side of the transfer unit counterclockwise.
6
BMW005S
7. Holding the green grip in the center of the transfer unit, pull the unit out until the handles on
the top surface become completely visible.
BMW006S
152
8. Lift the handles on the top surface.
BMV007S
9. Holding the handles, slowly pull out the transfer unit.

10. Take the new transfer unit out of the bag and remove the cover from the transfer unit.
BMW008S
11. Lift the handles on the top surface.
BMV009S
153
12. Slide the transfer unit along the guide rails into the printer until the upper handles touch the
printer body.
BMV010S
13. Lower the handles, and then push the front of the transfer unit to fully insert it into the printer.
BMW011S
14. Turn the green lever on the left side of the transfer unit clockwise.
BMW012S
154
15. Pressing both sides, firmly close the inner cover.
BMW013S
16. Turn the green levers clockwise.
BMW014S
17. Carefully close the right cover.

19. Plug in the power cable and turn on the printer.
155
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
• Do not incinerate spilled or used toner. Toner dust is flammable and might ignite when exposed to an
open flame.
• Dispose of used toner containers in accordance with local regulations.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and the toner containers out of reach of children. If a child swallows
toner, consult a doctor immediately.
• Waste toner bottles cannot be reused.

• Purchasing and storing extra waste toner bottles is recommended.
• Before removing the waste toner bottle from the printer, spread paper or some other material around
the area to keep toner from dirtying your workspace.
6 Replace the waste toner bottle if the following message appears on the display:
When the following message appears on the display, the waste toner bottle should be replaced soon.
Prepare a new waste toner bottle.
156
2. Pull out Tray 1 carefully until it stops.
BMV078S
3. Open the left front cover slowly.
BMV079S
4. Holding the green grip located under the front of the waste toner bottle, and pull it out until
the handle on the top is completely visible.
BMV080S
157
5. Holding the handle, carefully pull out the waste toner bottle horizontally.
BMV081S
6. Put the waste toner bottle into the supplied plastic bag to prevent toner from leaking out of
the bottle. Then, seal the bag.
7. Take the new waste toner bottle out of the box.
BMV082S
8. Remove the tape slowly.
BMV083S
158
9. Slowly pull the thick paper out of the waste toner bottle vertically.
BMV084S
10. Holding the handle on the top, insert the waste toner bottle into the printer carefully.
BMV085S
11. When the waste toner bottle is inserted to the handle area, push the front side of the waste
bottle to fully insert it into the printer.
BMV086S
159
12. Carefully close the left front cover.
BMV087S
13. Carefully push Tray 1 into the printer until it stops.

160
Replacing the Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, and Dustproof Filter
Replacing the Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, and

Dustproof Filter
Replace the fusing unit if any of the following messages appear on the display:
Replace the transfer roller and the dustproof filter at the same time.
6
Replacing the Fusing Unit
When replacing the fusing unit, clean it simultaneously.
• The fusing unit becomes very hot. When installing a new fusing unit, turn off the printer and wait at
least an hour after power off before replacing parts. Not allowing the printer to cool may result in
burns.

BMV103S
161
3. Loosen the screws to remove the brackets from both sides of the fusing unit.
BMV257S
4. Raise the C1 levers on both sides.
BMV236S
5. Holding the C2 levers, pull out the fusing unit.
BMV117S
162
6. While holding the handles, slowly pull up the fusing unit.
BMW035S
7. Clean the lens inside of the printer after pulling up the fusing unit.
For details about the cleaning procedure, see the replacement guide provided with the fusing unit.
8. Take the new fusing unit out of the bag.
BMV259S
9. Set the fusing unit on the guide plate, making sure to align the green marks on the fusing
unit and the printer.
BMV256S
163
10. Push the fusing unit back into the printer carefully until it completely stops.
BMV119S
11. Push down the C1 levers on both sides.
BMV244S
12. Reattach the brackets to both sides of the fusing unit and tighten the screws.
BMV258S
• This completes fusing unit replacement. Leave the right cover open, replace the transfer roller and the
dustproof filter as shown below.
164
Replacing the Transfer Roller
1. The transfer roller is installed as shown below.
BMW019S
2. Holding the green grips on both sides, pull up the transfer roller.
BMW020S
3. Holding the green grips, pull out the transfer roller from the printer.
BMW021S
165
4. Take the new transfer roller out of the bag.
BMW022S
Hold the grips on both sides of the transfer roller.

5. Place the transfer roller into the grooves of the printer.
BMW023S
6. Secure the transfer roller by pushing the green grips on both sides until it locks into place.
BMW024S
• This completes the transfer roller replacement. Follow the next procedure to replace the dustproof
filter as shown below.
166
Replacing the Dustproof Filter
1. Remove the dustproof filter cover by sliding it to the right.
BMW015S
2. Take out the new dustproof filters and glove from the box.
3. Put the glove on either hand.
4. Remove the filters with the gloved hand. Put the filters into the fusing unit's box.
6
BMW016S
Handle the removed filters with care. Waving the filters will release toner.
5. Remove the glove.
Put the glove into the fusing unit's box.
6. Attach the new filters.
BMW017S
167
7. Slide the dustproof filter cover back to its original position.
BMW018S
168
Adding Staples
Adding Staples
• Be sure to use the approved staple cartridges. Stapling failures or jams may occur if you use a staple
cartridge other than that recommended.
• After the cartridge is replaced, the next five to seven sheets will not be stapled until the finisher has
adjusted the position of the staple sheet.
Add staples to the finisher if the following messages appear on the display:
When the Booklet Finisher is Installed

6
1. Open the front cover of the finisher.
BMV088S
2. Holding the R7 lever, pull out the staple unit.
BMV089S
169
3. Raise the lever.
BMV090S
4. Holding the lever on the cartridge, pull the cartridge gently out of the staple unit.
BMV091S
5. Pushing both sides of the cartridge, pull out the upper unit.
BMV228S
170
Adding Staples
6. Take out the empty staple case.
BMV229S
7. Push the new case into the cartridge until it clicks.
BMV230S
8. Lower the upper unit carefully.
BMV231S
9. Pull the ribbon out of the staple case that you attached.
The ribbon rolls around the staple case. Make sure to pull it out completely.
171
BMV232S
10. Holding the lever on the cartridge, push the cartridge gently into the staple unit until it clicks.
6
BMV092S
11. Push the lever down until it clicks.
BMV093S
12. Return the staple unit to its original position.

13. Close the front cover of the finisher.
• If you cannot pull out the upper unit there are staples remaining inside the cartridge. Use all the staple
before replacing the cartridge.
172
Adding Staples
When the 2 Tray Finisher is Installed
BMV094S
2. Holding the lever, pull out the staple unit.
BEK084S
3. Hold and lift the lever on the cartridge and pull the cartridge gently out of the staple unit.
BEK085S
173
4. Pushing both sides of the cartridge, pull out the upper unit.
BEK089S
5. Take out the empty staple case.
BEK090S
6. Push the new case into the cartridge until it clicks.
BEK091S
174
Adding Staples
7. Lower the upper unit carefully.
BEK092S
8. Pull the ribbon out of the staple case that you attached.
The ribbon rolls around the staple case. Make sure to pull it out completely.
BEK093S
9. Holding the lever on the cartridge, push the cartridge down gently into the staple unit until
it clicks.
BEK200S

• If you cannot pull out the upper unit, there are staples remaining inside the cartridge. Use all the staples
before replacing the cartridge.
175
176
This chapter explains how to clean this printer.
Cautions When Cleaning
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not remove any covers or screws
other than those specified in this manual. When the machine needs to be checked, adjusted, or
repaired, contact your service representative.
• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There is a risk of fire, electric shock,
explosion or loss of sight. If the machine has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye damage.
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing unit because it could be very hot.
Clean the printer periodically to maintain fine printing.

Dry wipe the exterior with a soft cloth. If dry wiping is not enough, wipe with a soft, wet cloth that is wrung
out well. If you still cannot remove the stain or dirt, apply a neutral detergent, and then wipe over with a
well-wrung wet cloth, dry wipe, and then let it dry.
7
• To avoid deformation, discoloration, or cracking, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzine and
thinner, or spray insecticide on the printer.
• If there is dust or grime inside the printer, wipe with a clean, dry cloth.
• You must disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year. Clean away any dust and
grime from the plug and outlet before reconnecting. Accumulated dust and grime pose a fire hazard.
177
Cleaning the Friction Pads

If the friction pad is dirty, multi-feeds or misfeeds might occur. In this case, clean the pad as shown below.
• Do not use chemical cleaner or organic solvent such as thinner or benzine.
• If misfeeds or multi-feeds of paper occur after cleaning the friction pad, contact your sales or service
representative.
Paper Trays, 500/1000-sheet Paper Feed Unit
The same procedure is applied to clean the friction pads of the standard paper trays and the 500/1000-
sheet paper feed units. Tray 2 is used as an example.
BMV096S
2. Remove the loaded paper.

3. Wipe the friction pad with a soft damp cloth.
BMV097S
178
Cleaning the Friction Pads
4. Reload the paper into the paper tray and push it gently into the printer until it stops.
BMV098S
Do not slide the paper tray in with force. If you do, the paper guides might move.
2000-sheet Paper Feed Unit
BMV099S
2. Holding the lever on the right side of the tray, pull the tray completely out.
BMV100S
3. Remove the loaded paper.
179
4. Wipe the friction pad with a soft damp cloth.
BMV101S
5. Reload the paper into the paper tray and push it gently into the printer until it stops.
7
BMV102S
180
Cleaning the Registration Roller
Cleaning the Registration Roller

If types of paper other than the standard types are used, specks of paper may stick around the registration
roller, causing problems. Clean the registration roller if white dots appear on prints.
• The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch parts labeled " " (indicating a hot surface).
• Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents such as thinners or benzine.

• Do not touch the belt of the roller when cleaning.
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

BMV103S
3. Clean the registration roller by applying a soft damp cloth while turning it.
BMV104S
4. Close the right cover.

5. Plug in the power cord and turn on the printer.
181
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass

Clean the dustproof glass if white lines appear on prints.
• Do not forcefully insert the cleaning stick. It may scratch the inside of the printer.

2. Holding the left and right handles, open the front cover.
BMV060S
The cleaning stick is installed inside the front cover.

7 3. Push and hold the grip in the center ( ), and lift the handle of the cleaning stick ( ).
BMV105S
There are four holes to insert the cleaning stick.
182
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass
BMV106S
4. Place the cleaning stick back inside the front cover.
BMV107S
7
Clean all holes.
5. Return the cleaning stick inside the front cover.
BMV108S
Be sure the cloth tape faces down when you replace the stick.
6. Close the front cover carefully.
183
184
This chapter explains how to adjust the color gradations, color alignment, and print position.
Adjusting the Color Registration

This section describes automatic color adjustment.
After moving the printer, printing on thick paper, or printing repeatedly for some time, color degradation
may occur. By performing automatic color adjustment, you can restore optimum print quality.
BMW028S
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Maintenance], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Quality Maintenance], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Color Registration], and then press the [OK] key.
185
5. Press the [OK] key.
6. The confirmation message appears. Press [OK].
Automatic adjustment begins.

Automatic adjustment takes about 30 seconds.
A confirm message appears when complete.
7. Press [Exit].
The display returns to the Color Registration screen.
186
Correcting the Color Gradation

This section describes correcting the color gradation.
Color gradation during color printing can change slightly, depending on a number of factors. If you print
the same file repeatedly or toner was recently replaced, changes may occur in color tones. In such cases,
you can obtain optimal print results by correcting the color gradation.
• Color gradation correction is not required under normal circumstances.

• If a printer is not used for some time, changes could occur in color tones.
• If suitable results cannot be obtained after a single correction, repeat the correction several times as
needed.
• Corrections to color gradation will be applied to all user jobs.
• Use the same type of paper when printing a run of gradation corrections. If a different type of paper
is used, corrections may not be apparent.
• This feature requires the use of the supplied Color Calibration Sample Sheet.
• Corrections to color gradation are performed in the following order:
1. Print gradation correction sheet 1.
2. Adjust the parts of highlight colors.
Set the correction value.
Print the gradation correction sheet, and then check the result of the correction. 8
3. Print gradation correction sheet 2.
Adjust the parts of middle colors.
Set the correction value.
Print the gradation correction sheet, and then check the result of the correction.
4. Save the correction value.
Setting the Gradation Correction Value
The following procedure describes adjusting the gradation correction value.

Correct the gradation in two areas: bright areas (highlights), and medium areas (midtones). [Print Test
Pattern 1] is used to set the correction value for highlights, and [Print Test Pattern 2] is used for mid tones.
187
BMW028S
8
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Color Calibration], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Adjust Auto Density].
The confirmation message appears. Press [OK] to adjust Auto Density.

The confirmation message appears when complete. Press [Exit].
The display returns to the Color Calibration screen.
188
6. In the Color Calibration menu, press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print Test Pattern 1] or [Print
Test Pattern 2], and then press the [OK] key.
7. When the selected sheet is printed, the confirmation message appears. Press [Continue].
8. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the color you want to adjust, and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to adjust the correction value for the selected color, and then press
the [OK] key.
10. Press [Result] to check the result by printing the calibration sheet.
8
11. After printing, press [Yes] to save the settings.
12. After completing all settings, press the [Online] key to return to the initial screen.
189
Viewing the Color Calibration Sample Sheet and Gradation Correction Sheet
The Color Calibration Sample Sheet contains two color sample columns “sample 1” column for adjusting
highlights and “sample 2” column for adjusting midtones.
The gradation correction sheet contains: “gradation correction sheet 1” for adjusting highlights and
“gradation correction sheet 2” for adjusting midtones. Gradation correction sheet 1 is used for correction
1, while gradation correction sheet 2 is used for correction 2.
Color sample and correction values
The following explains how to view the color sample of the Color Calibration Sample Sheet and the
correction values of the gradation correction sheet.
This explanation uses setting K (black) as an example. The setting method for M (magenta) is similar.
For C/Y (cyan/yellow), the correction value is determined based on combinations of these two colors,
although panel settings are configured for each color separately.
• Hold the correction value (0 to 6) for “K” of the correction value setting sheet over the color
sample of gradation correction 1 of the Color Calibration Sample Sheet and find the corrected
color closest to that of the color sample. Then, enter the corresponding number using the
operation panel. The currently set correction value is printed in red.
BMW034S
BMV254S
Reading the gradation correction sheet

The printed gradation correction sheet is read as shown below.
190
Comparing the gradation correction sheet and correction value of each color, K (black), M
(magenta), and C (cyan)/Y (yellow) determine the required gradation correction and configure
settings using the control panel.
BFL359S
1. K (black) correction values

Used to adjust the color printed when only black toner is used. The currently set correction value is printed
in red.
2. M (magenta) correction values
Used to adjust the color printed when only magenta toner is used. The currently set correction value is
printed in red.
3. C (cyan)/Y (yellow) correction values 8
Used to correct the colors printed when cyan and yellow are used. For C/Y (cyan/yellow), the correction
value is determined based on combinations of these two colors, although panel settings are configured for
each color.
4. Setting value
The value displayed is the one currently set when the gradation correction sheet is printed. This value
corresponds to the value set on the control panel.
191
Resetting the Gradation Correction Value to the Initial Value
BMW028S
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Color Calibration], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Reset Setting], and then press the [OK] key.
A confirmation message appears. Press [Yes] to reset Calibration setting.
192
The confirmation message appears when complete. Press [Exit].

193
Adjusting Printing Position

You can adjust the printing position for the 500-sheet paper feed unit (tray 3) and the 1000-sheet paper
feed unit (tray 3 to tray 5). Only the horizontal printing position can be adjusted. "Horizontal" means
perpendicular to the feed direction. Normally you do not need to update the printing position. However,
updating is useful in some cases when the optional paper feed unit is installed.
BMW028S
8
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press the [OK] key to select [Quality Maintenance].
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Registration], and then press the [OK] key.
194
Adjusting Printing Position
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Print Test Sheet], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the tray you want to adjust, and then press the [OK] key.
7. Print the test sheet to preview the settings.
8
Use this sheet to confirm the current print position.
8. Press the [Escape] key to return to the registration menu.
9. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Adjustment], and then press the [OK] key.
10. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the tray you want to adjust, and then press the [OK] key.
195
11. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to change the registered value (mm).
Increase the value to shift the print area in the direction indicated by the "+" symbol in the diagram
below. Decrease to shift the print area in the direction indicated by the "-" symbol.
8
BEK101S
): Print Area
): Paper Feed Direction
12. Press the [OK] key to return to the [Registration] menu.
13. Print the test sheet to confirm the adjustment result.
196
9. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions to common problems and it also explains how to correct unwanted print
results.
Error and Status Messages that Appear on the

Control Panel
This section explains the meanings of messages that appear on the control panel and what to do when a
particular message appears.
Status Messages (in alphabetical order)
@Remote Certif. updating...

The printer is updating the @Remote certificate.
Calibrating...
The printer is calibrating the color. Wait a while.
Energy Saver
The printer is in Energy Saver mode. Press any keys to recover to the normal mode.
Hex Dump Mode

In Hex Dump mode, the printer receives data in hexadecimal format. Turn off the printer after printing, and
then turn back on.
Loading toner
The printer is loading the toner. Wait a while.
9
Offline
The printer is offline and cannot print.
Please wait...
This message may appear for a few seconds. It means the printer is preparing, cooling down the fusing
unit, initializing the development unit, loading toner, or executing maintenance operations. Wait a while.
Preparing to start firmware update.

The printer is checking for firmware updates.
Printing...
The printer is printing. Wait a while.
197
9. Troubleshooting
Printing Suspended
Printing is suspended. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to recover.
Ready
This is the default ready message. The printer is ready for use. No action is required.
Remote Diagnostics
The printer is performing diagnostic tests remotely.
Resetting Job...
The printer is resetting jobs. Wait a while.
Setting change...
The printer is changing settings. Wait a while.
Set the Fusing Unit correctly.

The fusing unit may not be installed correctly. Turn the printer off and re-install the fusing unit.
If the message is still displayed after re-installation, contact your sales or service representative.
See p.161 "Replacing the Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, and Dustproof Filter" for fusing unit installation.
SmartServ.Call
The printer is contacting the Smart Service center. Some or all of the printer's functions may not be available.
Updating Certificate...
The printer is updating @Remote certificate.
Waiting for print data...

9 The printer is waiting for the next data to print. Wait a while.
Alert Messages (in alphabetical order)
@Remote Cert. update failed

Updating the @Remote certificate failed. Contact your sales or service representative.
@Remote error. Call service

There was an error with the @Remote line.
Add staples.
The finisher unit is out of staples. Add more staples, or print again without using the staple function.
Add staples and empty the punch receptacle

The finisher is out of staples, and the punch receptacle is full. Add more staples and empty the punch
receptacle.
198
Error and Status Messages that Appear on the Control Panel
Add toner<K,C,M,Y>
The printer has run out of the indicated toner. Replace the indicated toner cartridge. See p.139 "Adding
Toner".
Cannot connect=>Comm.Serv.
There was a communication error in the remote service modem.
Cannot connect=>Comm.Serv./ Check proxy user/password.

The proxy user name or password is incorrect. Check the proxy server settings, and change the user name
and/or password if they are incorrect.
Netwrk connection failed./ Check IP Address.

The connection with the network has failed. Check that the IP address is correct.
Netwrk connection failed./ Contact the administrator.

The connection with the network failed. Contact the network administrator.
Netwrk connection failed./ Please call service.

The connection to the network failed.
Cannot connect with DHCP (101/201)

Cannot obtain IP address from DHCP server. Contact the network administrator.
Cannot connect with/ NetWare print server. (107/207)

Connection with NetWare print server is unavailable. Contact the network administrator.
Cannot connect with/ NetWare server.(106/206)

Connection with NetWare server is unavailable. Contact your network administrator. 9
Cannot print.
Check the file you want to print is a supported file type. Check for misfeeds and ask your network
administrator for help.
Cannot recognize SDRAM mod./ Please call service.

The printer could not recognize the installed optional memory.
Cannot set IPv4 within/ the same subnet range. (###)

The IPv4 address cannot be set within the same subnet ranges.
Change (tray name) to the following settings: A4 (Recycled)
The specified paper type is different from the paper type in the indicated tray. This message does not apply
to the bypass tray. Press [Change] to change the tray's settings, press [Job Reset] to reset the job, or press
[FormFeed] to force printing.
199
9. Troubleshooting
Check @Remote Line

Check the connection status of @Remote Line.
Check network/ settings.(103/203)

The IP address setting is incorrect. Check the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address. For details,
see p.79 "Ethernet Configuration".
Connect failed:WirelessCard Turn power off, check card.

Check there is a wireless LAN board installed.
Check that it is a supported board. If it is, check it is installed correctly.
Install the correct board properly.
For details, see p.54 "Installing the Interface Units".
Cover Open
Close the cover indicated on the control panel.
Current wireless card is not WPA compatible. (###)

The wireless LAN you are using is not compatible with WPA.
Device access violation may have occurred. Contact the administrator.

An attempt was made to access the printer from outside of the network.
Duplex mode is in off position for (tray name)

The duplex mode for the indicated tray is off; you can only use one-sided printing. Press [Change] to change
the tray's settings, press [Job Reset] to reset the job, or press [FormFeed] to force printing.
9 Empty the punch receptacle.

The punch unit's punch receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle.
Ethernet Board Error

An error on the Ethernet board is detected. Pull out and then re-install the controller board. If the problem
persists, contact your sales or service representative.
Failed to connect to server for Remote Diagnostics.

The printer cannot communicate with Remote Communication Gate. Check the connection to the Remote
Server Gate.
Finisher Booklet Tray is full. Remove the paper.

The finisher booklet tray is full. Remove the paper from the tray.
Finisher Error.Power OFF/ON/ Error recurs, call service.

An error has occurred in the finisher unit. Turn the power off, and then on again. If the error recurs, contact
your sales or service representative.
200
Finisher Shift Tray Error.

An error has occurred in the shift tray motor. Contact your sales or service representative.
Finisher Shift Tray is full. Remove the paper.

The finisher shift tray is full. Remove the paper from the tray.
Finisher Upper Tray is full. Remove the paper.

The finisher upper tray is full. Remove the paper from the tray.
Hole punch receptacle is full. Empty it.

The hole punch receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle.
Independent-supply toner
Independent-supply toner is set. Use toner recommended for this printer.
IPv6 Address already exists Link-local Address (109/209)

The same IPv6 address already exists. Contact your network administrator.
IPv6 Address already exists Stateless Address (109/209)

IPv6 Address already exists Manual Config. Address (109/209)

LCT Error. Power Off/On. Error recurs, call service.

An error has occurred in the LCT unit. Turn the power off, and then back on again. If the error recurs, contact
Load paper in (tray name) or [Cancel] to FormFeed. A4 (Recycled)

9
There is no paper in the specified tray. Load the specified paper in the tray, press [Job Reset] to reset the
job, or press [FormFeed] to force printing.
Load paper in (tray name) A4 (Recycled)

There is no paper in the specified tray. Load the specified paper in the tray, press [Job Reset] to reset the
job, or press [FormFeed] to force printing.
Login failed due to user lockout. Please contact the administrator.

Login failed because the wrong password was repeatedly used for login.
Option RAM Error

The printer cannot detect an optional SDRAM module. It may be incorrectly installed.
Check if it is installed properly.
For details about installing the unit, see p.45 "Installing the Memory Expansion Units".
201
9. Troubleshooting
No paper in tray.
The indicated tray is out of paper. Add more paper.
Paper in Finisher
There is paper left in the finisher. Open the finisher cover and remove the paper.
Paper in Finisher. Open cover and remove the paper.

There is paper left in the finisher. Open the finisher cover and remove the paper.
Paper size/type mismatch. Change settings to: A4 (Recycled)

The paper type and size in all trays are not the same as the paper tray type and size setting, when Auto
Paper Select mode is selected. Press [Change] to change the settings, press [Job Reset] to reset the job, or
press [FormFeed] to force printing.
Malfunction: (tray name)

There is a problem with the paper tray motor. Select a different tray and force printing, or press [Reset Job]
to reset the job.
Parallel I/F Error

The printer's self diagnostic test failed due to a loopback error. Replace the IEEE 1284 board that caused
the error.
For details, see p.54 "Installing the Interface Units".
Printer Font Error.

There are problems with the printer's font file.
Contact your sales or service representative.
9 [Print] without below mode? [Staple] [Punch] [Staple/Punch]
Continue printing without using the function listed on the third line of the display. Press [OK] to cancel the
displayed modes and resume printing.
Printing suspended. Resume printing from PC side.

Printing has been suspended. Resume the print job from your computer.
Problem with Hard Disk Please call service.

The printer cannot detect a hard disk. It may be incorrectly installed.
Check if it is installed properly or contact your sales or service representative.
For details about installing the unit, see p.54 "Installing the Interface Units".
Problem:Wireless card Please call service.

The printer has detected a wireless LAN board or Bluetooth failure, or it could not detect a wireless card.
It may be incorrectly installed.
202
Check that the wireless LAN or Bluetooth board is installed properly, or contact your sales or service
representative.
For details about installing the unit, see p.54 "Installing the Interface Units".
Proxy error. If it recurs: Please call service.

There is a problem connecting with the proxy server. Possible causes include: an incorrect proxy server
address or port number, the proxy server is not activated, the center URL is incorrect, or the proxy server
is not set.
Contact your sales or service representative if the problem persists.
Ready Server communicat. failed

There was no reply from the server.
Ready Problem:Printer Module

There was an error with a DIMM module (slot 1).
Ready Problem:PS3 module Please call service.

There was an error with a DIMM module (slot 1).
Full: Output Tray(s)

The output trays are full. Remove the paper.
Full: Mailbox (tray name)

The indicated mailbox tray is full. Remove the paper.
Replace Fusing Unit.

You need to replace the fusing unit. See p.161 "Replacing the Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, and Dustproof
Filter". 9
Replace Fusing Unit soon. A new kit is required. Contact your local vendor.
You will need to replace the fusing unit soon. Contact your sales or service representative to obtain a new
unit.
Replace IntTrans Unit.

You need to replace the transfer unit.
Replace IntTrans Unit soon. A new unit is required. Contact your local vendor.
You will need to replace the transfer unit soon. Contact your sales or service representative to obtain a new
unit.
Replace PCU:Black
You need to replace the black drum unit. See p.143 "Replacing the Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Units".
203
9. Troubleshooting
Replace PCU:Black soon. A new PCU is required. Contact your local vendor.
You will need to replace the black drum unit soon. Contact your sales or service representative to obtain
a new unit.
Replace PCU:Colour.
You need to replace the color drum units. See p.143 "Replacing the Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Units".
Replace PCU:Colour soon. A new PCU is required. Contact your local vendor
You will need to replace the color drum units soon. Contact your sales or service representative to obtain
a new unit.
Reset Paper Tray correctly. A4 (Recycled)

The paper tray is not set correctly. Set the indicated tray again, or select a different tray to print from.
SD Card authenticatn.failed Error recurs, call service

Authentication from the SD card failed. Turn the power off, and then back on. If the error recurs, contact
Set the Fusing Unit correctly.

The fusing unit is not set correctly. Set the fusing unit again.
Set the Intermediate Transfer Unit correctly.

The transfer unit is not set correctly. Set the transfer unit again.
Set the Toner Cartridge correctly.

The indicated toner cartridge is not set correctly. Set the indicated toner cartridge again.
9 Set Tray to below setting or [Cancel] to FormFeed. A4 (Recycled)

A size and paper type mismatch has occurred with Auto tray select mode set. Set the tray to the indicated
size and paper type, press [Job Reset] to reset the job, or press [FormFeed] to force printing.
Set Waste Toner Bottle correctly.

The waste toner bottle is not set correctly. Set the waste toner bottle again.
SRAM problem occurred. SRAM was formatted.

There was an error in the SRAM.
Standard Tray is full. Remove the paper.

The standard output tray is full, or there is a problem with the paper tray motor. Remove the paper from
the tray.
Staple Error. Please call service.

There was an error in the staple unit. Contact your sales or service representative.
204
The same IP Address exists on several interfaces (###)

The same IP address has already been set on several interfaces. Contact the network administrator.
The same IPv4 Address already exists.(102/202)

The IPv4 address specified for the machine is already in use by another device on the network. Contact
the network administrator.
The selected job(s) has already been printed or deleted.

This message might appear if you print or delete a job from Web Image Monitor. Press Exit on the message
screen.
This NetBIOS name is already in use.(108/208)

The NetBIOS name specified for the machine is already in use by another device on the network. Contact
your network administrator.
Toner is almost empty.

The printer is almost out of the toner indicated in the message. Contact your sales or service representative
to obtain a new unit.
(tray name) Error. Power Off/On. Error recurs, call service.

There was an error with an input tray motor. Turn the power off, and then on again.
Turn power off, then set the PCU correctly.

The black drum unit/color drum units are not set correctly. Turn the power off, and then set the black drum
unit/color drum units again.
USB has a problem. Please call service.

The printer has detected a USB board failure. Turn the power off, and then on again. If the problem persists, 9
contact your sales or service representative.
Values set for IPv6/Gateway addresses are invalid.(110/210)

The IPv6 address or gateway address is invalid. Check the network settings.
Waste Toner almost full Contact your local vendor. Please call service.
The waste toner bottle is almost full. Contact your sales or service representative.
Waste Toner Bottle full

Replace the waste toner bottle. See p.156 "Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle".
WPA Auth. incomplete.(211)

WPA authentication could not complete. Contact your network administrator.
205
9. Troubleshooting
Supply Alert Messages (in alphabetical order)
Out of toner. Replace Toner Cartridge.

The printer is out of the toner color indicated in the message. Replace the indicated toner cartridge. See
p.139 "Adding Toner" for installation instructions.
Replacement Alert Replace Fusing Unit.

You need to replace the fusing unit. Contact your sales or service representative to obtain a new unit. See
p.161 "Replacing the Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, and Dustproof Filter" for installation instructions.
Replacement Alert Replace IntTrans Unit.

You need to replace the transfer unit. Contact your sales or service representative to obtain a new unit. See
p.150 "Replacing the Transfer Unit" for installation instructions.
Replacement Alert Replace PCU:Black.

You need to replace the black drum unit. Contact your sales or service representative to obtain a new unit.
See p.143 "Replacing the Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Units" for installation instructions.
Replacement Alert Replace PCU:Colour.

You need to replace the color drum units. Contact your sales or service representative to obtain a new unit.
See p.143 "Replacing the Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Units" for installation instructions.
Supply order has failed.

The automatic supply order failed. The message indicates the supplies that the printer tried to order.
Print/Data Errors (in alphabetical order)
Command Error.
9 An RPCS command error occurred. Check the connection between the printer and the computer, make
sure you are using the correct driver for the printer, and make sure that the memory settings for the driver
match the memory installed in the printer.
Compressed Data Error

The printer detected corrupt compressed data. Check the connection between the computer and the printer.
Check that the program you used to compress the data is functioning correctly.
Insufficient Memory.
A memory retrieval error occurred.
(a) Failure in memory retrieval while drawing.
(b) Failure in processing frame.
Add additional memory to the printer. See p.45 "Installing the Memory Expansion Units" for instructions
on installing memory.
206
Memory Retrieval Error.

A memory retrieval error occurred. This alert is displayed when failures cannot be avoided even though
additional memory is installed in the printer. For example, this error can occurs if there is a failure in
initializing RPCS. Turn the printer off, and then on again. If the error persists, replace the memory module.
See p.45 "Installing the Memory Expansion Units" for instructions on installing memory.
Paper Type Error

The paper type specified by the driver was not recognized by the printer. Retrieve the latest paper type
information from the printer.
Receiving data failed.

This error occurs when the printer receives an unexpected end-of-file signal. Try printing again.
Sending data failed.

The printer received a command from the driver to suspend data transmission. Check that the host is
operating normally.
• Confirm error details by printing the Error Log. For details, see "List/Test Print Menu", Software Guide.
207
9. Troubleshooting
Panel Tones
The following table explains the meaning of the various tone patterns that the printer used to alerts to users
about its condition.
Tone pattern Meaning Cause
After cooling or being switched

Two long beeps. Printer ready. on, the printer has fully warmed
up and is ready for use.
A valid control panel or screen

key was pressed. Single short
Single short beep. Panel/screen input accepted.
beeps are produced only when
valid keys are pressed.
Single long beep. Job completed. A printer job has finished.
The screen is changing back to

the initial screen after the printer
Four long beeps. Printer initialized.
came out of the energy-saving
mode or was reset.
Printer requires user attention.

Five short beeps repeated five
Printer alert. Paper may have jammed or toner
times.
may need replenishing.
9
• Users cannot mute the printer's tone alerts. When the printer beeps to alert users of a paper jam or
toner request, if the printer's covers are opened and closed repeatedly within a short space of time,
the tone alert might continue, even after normal status has resumed.
208
Printer Does Not Print

Is the power on?
Confirm that the cord is securely plugged into both the power outlet and the printer.
Turn on the power.
Does the Alert indicator stay red?

If so, check the error message on the display and take the required action.
See p.197 "Error and Status Messages that Appear on the Control Panel".
Is paper loaded?
Load paper into the paper tray or onto the bypass tray.
See p.118 "Loading Paper".
Can you print a configuration page?

If you cannot print a configuration page, it probably indicates a printer malfunction. Contact your sales or
See “List/Test Print Menu”, Software Guide.
Is the interface cable connected securely to the printer and the computer?
Connect the interface cable securely. If it has a fastener, fasten it securely as well.
Are you using the correct interface cable?

The type of interface cable you should use depends on the computer you use. Be sure to use the correct
one.
If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it with a new one. 9
See p.265 "Specifications".
Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the print job?
If not blinking or lit, the data is not being sent to the printer.
If the printer is connected to the computer using the interface cable
Check the port connection setting is correct. For details about checking the port connection, see
p.211 "Checking the Port Connection".
Network Connection
Contact your network administrator.
How is the signal strength when using the wireless LAN?

Ad-hoc Channel
Either move to a location where the signal is good, or remove obstructions.
209
9. Troubleshooting
Infrastructure Mode
Check the signal status in the [Wireless LAN] menu on the control panel. If the signal is poor, either
move to a location where it is good, or remove obstructions.
If printing still does not start, contact your sales or service representative. Consult with the store where the
printer was purchased for information about the location of sales or service representatives.
How is the signal strength when using Bluetooth?

Try the following:
• Check that the Bluetooth interface unit is installed properly.
• Check that there are no obstructions between the computer, printer, and other devices.
• Change the location of the computer.
• Change the location of the printer.
When you use the optional Bluetooth interface unit.

SPP
1. Make sure the printer you want to use appears in the 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
2. Make sure "Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx)" appears under Client Ports in the 3Com Bluetooth
Connection Manager.
3. Restart the computer, this printer, and other devices.
4. Make sure no wireless LAN or other Bluetooth devices are in use.
• Interference may occur with the wireless LAN interface board. Such interference may affect
the transmission speed and other function.
9 5. Transmissions between computers, other devices, and this printer can be blocked by obstructions.
Move this printer, computers, and other devices, if necessary.
HCRP, BIP
1. Restart the computer, this printer, and other devices.
2. Make sure no wireless LAN or other Bluetooth devices are in use.
• Interference may occur with the wireless LAN interface board. Such interference may affect
the transmission speed and other functions.
3. Transmissions between computers, other devices, and this printer can be blocked by obstructions.
Move this printer, computers, and other devices, if necessary.
If printing still does not start, contact your sales or service representative. Consult with the store where the
printer was purchased for information about the location of sales or service representatives.
210
Checking the Port Connection
*(n) varies depending on the number of printers connected. This section describes how to check the print
port when the Data In indicator does not light up or blink.
Check if the print port setting is correct. When it is connected using a parallel interface, connect it to LPT1
or LPT2.
Windows 2000
1. Click the [Start] button, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
2. Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab.
4. In the [Print to the following port(s)] list, confirm the correct port is selected.
Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
1. Click the [Start] button, and then click [Printers and Faxes].
Windows XP Home Edition
1. Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel].

2. Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
3. Click [Printers and Faxes].
9
Windows Vista/ Windows Server 2008
1. Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel].

2. Click [Printers].
3. Click the icon of the machine. On the [Organize] menu, click [Properties].
211
9. Troubleshooting
Printing Problems
Toner smears appear on the print side of the page.
• The paper setting may not be correct. For example, although you are using thick paper, the setting
for thick paper may not be set. Check the paper setting of the control panel and printer driver.
See p.101 "Paper and Other Media" and the printer driver Help.
• When "Replace PCU:Black." or "Replace PCU:Colour." appears on the display, replace the black
drum unit/color drum units.
See p.143 "Replacing the Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Units".
• Confirm that the paper is not curled or bent. Envelopes can be curled easily. Flatten paper before
loading.
See p.107 "Paper Recommendations".
Paper jams occur frequently.

• Check the following:
• Paper guides are set correctly, leaving no gaps between paper guides and paper.
• The side guides of the paper tray are locked.
• Paper guides are not set too tight. If too tight, re-position the guides so that they gently touch the
loaded paper.
• The top of the paper stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray, or side guides of the
bypass tray.
9 • If paper misfeeds every time duplex print is performed, check the following items.
• The end guides of the paper tray are set correctly.
• The loaded paper and the paper type set at the control panel match.
For more solutions to this problem, see p.257 "Duplex Print Always Misfeeds".
• Make sure that nothing is placed on the finisher tray.
• The stapler cartridge may not be installed correctly.
• When printing on thick paper, it is recommended to load more than 20 sheets.
• If paper misfeeds occur regularly when printing from the bypass tray, the settings of the control panel
and those of the printer driver may not match.
• Paper not suitable for printing is used. For example, paper may be too thick, too thin, bent or wrinkled,
damp, or already been printed on.
• Pages may be sticking together. Fan the paper before loading it, or feed the pages one at a time.
212
Printing Problems
Multiple pages are fed at once.

loaded paper.
bypass tray.
• Pages may be sticking together. Fan the paper before loading it, or feed the pages one at a time.
Paper gets wrinkles or the paper edges become bent.

loaded paper.
bypass tray.
9
• The paper has a high moisture content. Store paper at an appropriate temperature and humidity level.
• The fusing unit is deteriorated or damaged. Replace the unit.
See p.161 "Replacing the Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, and Dustproof Filter".
The back of the paper is printed on.

• The paper has been loaded upside down.
Load paper in the 500-sheet paper trays or 2000-sheet paper feed unit with the print side up. Load
paper in the bypass tray with the print side down.
213
9. Troubleshooting
Duplex printing cannot be performed.

• Duplex printing is not supported for the following paper types: labels, Thin paper, cardstock, OHP
gloss print.
• Paper heavier than 161 g/m2 (40 lb.) is loaded. Change the paper for printing.
With Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, when doing

aggregate prints or bound prints.
• Check that the paper size and direction set in the [Menu] tab of the printer driver are the same as
those set in the application.
If the settings are not the same, change the settings of the printer driver.
Paper is not fed from the selected tray.

• When you are using a Windows operating system, the printer driver settings override those set using
the control panel. Set the desired input tray using the printer driver.
See the printer driver Help.
A printed image is different from the image on the computer's display.

• When you use some functions, such as enlargement and reduction, the layout of the image might be
different from that displayed in the computer display.
• You might have selected to replace True Type fonts with printer fonts in the printing process. To print
an image similar to the image on the computer, make the settings to print out True Type fonts as an
image.
9 It takes too much time to turn on the printer.

• If the printer is turned off while it is still accessing the hard disk (for example: during file deletion), the
printer will require more time to power-up the next time it is turned on. To avoid this time delay, do
not turn the power off while it is in operation.
It takes too much time to resume printing.

• The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the
data is being processed. Just wait until it resumes.
• If an OHP transparency or glossy paper is being used, printing takes more time to start.
• The printer was in the Energy Saver mode. To resume from the Energy Saver mode, the printer has to
warm up, and this takes time until printing starts. To disable the Energy Saver mode, select [Off] for
[Energy Saver] in the [System] menu.
It takes too much time to complete the print job.

• Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long time for the printer to process, so simply wait
when printing such data.
214
Printing Problems
Changing the settings with printer driver may help to speed up printing.
• The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it. If the Data In indicator is blinking, the
data is being processed. Just wait until it resumes.
• If "Please wait." appears on the display, the printer is now warming up. Wait for a while.
Images are cut off, or excess pages are printed.

• If you are using paper smaller than the paper size selected in the application, use the same size paper
as that selected in the application. If you cannot load paper of the correct size, use the reduction
function to reduce the image, and then print.
The color of the printout is different from the color on the computer's display.
• The colors made using color toner are different from colors displayed on the display in its production
system.
• When [Toner saving] is checked under the “Print Quality” tab in the printer driver's dialog box, the
color gradation may appear differently.
Color changes extremely when adjusted with the printer driver.

• Do not extreme settings for the color balance under the “Print Quality” tab in the printer driver's dialog
box.
Please note that the sample image displayed in the printer driver is used only to show what processing
will be performed, so may not match the print results.
9
Photo images are coarse.
• Some applications lower the resolution for making prints.
Raise the resolution in the settings for that application.
Color documents are printed in black and white.

• The printer driver is not set up for color printing.
• Some applications print color files in black and white.
Fine dot pattern does not print.

• Change the [Dithering:] setting in the printer driver's dialog box.
215
9. Troubleshooting
Solid areas, lines or text are shiny or glossy when created as a mixture of cyan, magenta,
yellow.
• Select [K: Black] for [Gray reproduction (Text/Line Art):] in the printer driver's dialog box.
Black gradation is not natural.

• Select [Gray reproduction (Text/Line Art):] in the printer driver's dialog box.
Solid lines are printed as broken lines.

• Change the [Dithering:] setting in the printer driver's dialog box.
Images are printed at an angle

• Confirm that the side guides of the paper tray are locked.
If paper is not loaded correctly, it may be processed at an angle.
Images appear only partially.

• The Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
• Toner is almost depleted. When the "Add toner" or "Toner is almost empty." message appears on the
display panel, or the toner indicator on the initial screen seems empty, replace the toner.
See p.139 "Adding Toner".
9 drum unit/color drum units.
• Condensation may have collected. If rapid change in temperature or humidity occurs, use this printer
only after it has acclimatized.
A color is missing or partially blurred.

• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
• Toner is almost depleted. When the "Out of toner" / "Replace Toner cartridge." / “(color)”, "Toner
is almost empty" /“(color)”, or "Add Toner:" message appears on the display panel, or the toner
indicator on the initial screen seems empty, replace the toner cartridge of the displayed color.
216
Printing Problems
The whole printout is blurred.

• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
• If you select [Toner saving] on the [Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box, printing is
generally less dense.
• Toner is almost depleted. When the "Out of toner" / "Replace Toner Cartridge." / “(color)”, or "Toner
is almost empty" /“(color)” message appears on the display panel, or the toner indicator on the initial
screen seems empty, replace the toner cartridge of the displayed color.
White streaks appear or color streaks appear.

• Toner is almost depleted. When the "Out of toner" / "Replace Toner cartridge." / “(color)”, or "Toner
is almost empty" /“(color)” message appears on the display panel, or the toner indicator on the initial
screen seems empty, replace the toner cartridge of the displayed color.
• When "Replace PCU:Black." or "Replace PCU:Colour." appears on the display, replace the black 9
• The paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored at a suitable temperature and humidity.
• Specks of paper may be attached to the registration roller. Clean the registration roller.
For details, see p.181 "Cleaning the Registration Roller".
White or color rivers appear.

The backs of printed sheets are blemished.

• When removing a jammed sheet, the inside of the printer may have become dirtied. Print several
sheets until they come out clean.
217
9. Troubleshooting
• If document size is larger than paper size, e.g. A4 document on B5 paper, the back of the next printed
sheet may be dirtied.
Printed pages are faint, or have white streaks.

• If is flashing, toner is almost depleted. Add toner.
Printed pages are faint.

• The appropriate paper is not loaded. (Printed pages may be faint when printing to coarse or coated
paper.)
For details, see p.107 "Paper Recommendations".
If rubbed with your finger, it smears out.

• The setting of the paper may not be correct. For example, although thick paper is used, the setting for
thick paper may not be set.
On the [Menu] tab of the printer driver, set [Paper Input] to [Thick Paper].
• Check the paper settings of this printer.
• Check the paper settings of the printer driver.
• The fusing unit is deteriorated or damaged. Replace the unit.
See p.161 "Replacing the Fusing Unit, Transfer Roller, and Dustproof Filter".
When printing on OHP transparencies, a color is missing or black or white dots are obvious.
9 • The registration roller is dirty. Clean the registration roller.

See p.181 "Cleaning the Registration Roller".
When printing on plain paper, white dots are obvious.

• The registration roller is dirty. Clean the registration roller.
See p.181 "Cleaning the Registration Roller".
PDF Direct Print is not executed (PDF file is not printed).

• When printing a PDF with a password set, set the password of the PDF file using the [Change PDF
Password] menu in [PDF Menu] or Web Image Monitor. For [Change PDF Password], see the “Print
Settings Menu”, Software Guide.
For Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• PDF files not allowed to be printed by the PDF file security setting cannot be printed.
• Highly compressed PDFs cannot be printed using PDF Direct Print.
Open the relevant application and print the PDF file using the printer driver.
218
Printing Problems
Set the file format to standard PDF.
As a result of printing using PDF Direct Printing, characters are missing or misshapen.
• Before printing, embed the font in the PDF file to be printed.
The paper size appears on the control panel and printing is not performed with PDF Direct
Print.
• When using PDF Direct Print, printout requires paper set within the PDF file. When a message indicating
a paper size appears, either place the indicated size in the paper tray, or perform Form Feed.
Also, if [Sub Paper Size] in the [System] Menu is set to [Auto], printing is performed assuming letter
size and A4 size to be the same size. For example, When a PDF file set to A4 size paper is printed
using PDF Direct Print and letter size paper is installed in the paper tray, the file will print out. This
applies similarly to the opposite case.
With Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, attached options are
not detected.
• The computer and printer are not in two-way communication. You must configure attached options in
the printer properties.
For details, see the printer driver Help.
If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.
219
9. Troubleshooting
Additional Troubleshooting
• If the printer is still not operating satisfactorily after attempting the flowing solutions, contact your sales
or service representative. Consult with the store where the printer was purchased for information about
the location of sales or service representatives.
Strange noise is heard.

• If a supply was recently replaced or an option attached in the area the strange noise is coming from,
check the supply or option is properly attached. If the strange noise persists, contact your sales or
No e-mail is received when an Alert occurs, and after resolving an Alert.

• Confirm [Auto Email Notify] is active in the [System] Menu on the Control Panel. See “System Menu”,
Software Guide.
• Access the printer through the Web browser, log on as an Administrator on the Web Image
Monitor, and then confirm the following settings in [Auto E-mail Notification]:
• Device E-mail Address
• Groups to Notify
• Select Groups/Items to Notify
For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• Access the printer through the Web browser, log on as an Administrator on the Web Image
Monitor, and then confirm the settings of the SMTP server in [E-mail]. For details about the settings,
see Web Image Monitor Help.
9 • When the power is turned off before the e-mail is transmitted, the e-mail will not be received.
• Check the e-mail address set for the destination. Confirm the printer's operation history using the Web
Image Monitor's System Log menu in [Network]. If the e-mail was sent but not received, it is possible
the destination was incorrect. Also check the information concerning error mail from the e-mail server.
The setting for [Auto Email Notify] on the System Menu was changed from [Off] to [On], but e-mail
is not arriving.
• After changing the setting, turn the main unit's power off and then back on again.
Error notification e-mail was received, but no error-solved e-mail is received.

• Check e-mail is set for sending using the Web Image Monitor's [Auto E-mail Notification] at the time
the error was fixed. You must click the [Edit] button of [Detailed Settings of Each Item] in [Auto E-mail
Notification], and set [Notify when error:] to [Occurs & Fixed] on the displayed screen.
For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor Help.
220
Additional Troubleshooting
Alert Resolving is set for sending e-mail, but no Alert-resolved e-mail is sent.
• If the power of the main unit is turned off after an Alert occurs, the Alert is resolved during the time the
power is off: no Alert-resolved e-mail is sent.
Alert Occurrence and Alert Resolving are set for sending e-mail, but while no Alert Occurrence
mail is received, Alert-resolved e-mail is received.
• Alert-notification e-mail is not sent if the problem is resolved before sending. However, an Alert-
resolved e-mail is sent.
Alert-notification level was changed, and e-mail stopped arriving.

• If an Alert-notification e-mail, set with the earlier notification level, arrives, later e-mail will not be sent,
even if the notification level is changed after.
When no date information is included in sent e-mail, the mail server has a malfunction.
• Configure the setting for obtaining time information from the SNTP server. Refer to the Web Image
Monitor's Help to the settings.
Printing using Bluetooth is slow.

• When using the optional Bluetooth interface unit, do the following:
• Transmit fewer print jobs.
• Make sure no wireless LAN or other Bluetooth devices are in use.
Interference may occur with the wireless LAN interface board. Such interference may affect the
transmission speed and other functions.
• Transmissions between the client computer and the printer can be blocked by obstructions. Move
the printer or client computer if necessary.
When you use a Bluetooth connection, print jobs are transmitted relatively slowly. 9
221
9. Troubleshooting
Removing Jammed Staples
• Staples might be frequently jammed because of curled paper. In this case, try turning over the paper
in the tray.
• After the cartridge is replaced, the next five to seven sheets of paper will not be stapled until the finisher
has adjusted the position of the staple sheet.
BMV088S
BMV089S
222
3. Raise the lever.
BMV090S
4. Holding the lever on the cartridge, pull the cartridge gently out of the staple unit.
BMV091S
5. Raise the face plate of the cartridge.
BMV248S
223
9. Troubleshooting
6. Remove the jammed staples.
BVM249S
7. Push the face plate down until it clicks.
BMV250S
8. Holding the lever on the cartridge, push the cartridge gently into the staple unit until it clicks.
BMV092S
224
9. Push the lever down until it clicks.
BMV093S

9
BEK110S
2. Holding the lever, pull out the staple unit.
BEK084S
225
9. Troubleshooting
3. Hold and lift the lever on the cartridge and pull the cartridge gently out of the staple unit.
BEK085S
4. Raise the face plate of the cartridge.
BEK086S
5. Holding the cartridge's face plate up, remove the jammed staples.
BEK087S
6. Return the face plate to its original position.

Make sure it clicks into place.
226
BEK088S
7. Holding the lever on the cartridge, push the cartridge down gently into the staple unit until
it clicks.
BEK200S

227
9. Troubleshooting
Removing Punch Waste

"Hole punch receptacle is full. Empty it." or "Empty the punch receptacle." message appears, remove punch
waste from the finisher. When these messages appear on the display, you cannot use the punch function.
BMV088S
2. Pull out the punch waste box carefully, and then remove punch waste.
BMV109s
3. Re-install the punch waste box.
BMV110S
228
Removing Punch Waste
• If you do not re-install the punch waste box in step 3, the message remains displayed.
• If the message remains displayed, re-install the punch waste box.
• The message might appear even when the punch waste box is not full. In this case, there may be some
punch waste on the surface shown by the arrow. Remove the punch waste.
BMV233S
BMV094S
229
9. Troubleshooting
2. Pull out the punch waste box carefully, and then remove punch waste.
BEK120S
3. Re-install the punch waste box.
BEK126S
9 • If you do not re-install the punch waste box in step 3, the message remains displayed.
• If the message remains displayed, re-install the punch waste box.
• The message might appear even when the punch waste box is not full. In this case, there may be some
punch waste on the surface shown by the arrow. Remove the punch waste.
BEK131S
230
This chapter explains how to remove misfed paper.
Removing Misfed Paper

An error message appears if a paper misfeed occurs. The error message gives the location of the misfeed.
Check the location and remove the paper.
• The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch parts labeled “ ” (indicating a hot surface).
• Do not forcefully remove misfed paper, it may tear and torn pieces may remain inside the printer.
• When paper is misfed a number of times, the following are possible causes.
• The control panel settings do not match the size or orientation of the loaded paper.
• The friction pad is dirty.
• Misfed paper may be covered with toner. Be careful not to get toner on your hands or clothes.
• If paper is still misfed after you have checked the above-mentioned causes, contact your sales or
• When printing restarts after removing jammed paper, the printing position may be different,
depending on the location of the jam.
• If the paper jam occurred in the optional finisher, printing will restart from the top page of the
data currently being printed, or from the page where the paper jam occurred.
• If the paper jam occurred in the printer, printing will restart from the page where the paper jam
occurred.
• Even if the paper jam occurred in the printer, the error will not be cleared unless the cover of the
10
finisher is opened and closed.
• p.178 "Cleaning the Friction Pads"
231
Paper Misfeed Message (A)

The " A Open the part as shown and remove paper." error message appears when a paper misfeed
occurs in the paper feed section.
• The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Before removing paper around the fusing unit, wait until
the temperature of the covers inside the fusing unit and duplex unit cool down.
• When a paper misfed (A) occurs, the paper tray is locked and cannot be pulled out. Do not forcefully
pull out the tray.
BMV103S
2. When using tray 1 or tray 2, remove the misfed paper slowly from inside of the printer's
right cover.
10
BMV111S
232
Paper Misfeed Message (A)
3. When using bypass tray, remove the misfed paper slowly from inside of the bypass tray.
BMV112S
4. If you cannot remove the misfed paper from inside of the bypass tray, remove the misfed
paper slowly from outside of the bypass tray.
BMV113S

6. Carefully close the bypass tray.
10
233
Paper Misfeed Message (B)

The " B Read instructions in Front Cover to remove." error message appears when a paper misfeed occurs
in the paper feed section.
• When removing misfed paper from the fusing unit, do not touch any parts other than those specified
in this manual.
• When a paper misfeed (B) occurs, the paper tray is locked and cannot be pulled out. Do not forcefully
pull out the tray.
BMV103S
2. Turn lever B1 five to eight times.
10
BMV114S
234
Paper Misfeed Message (B)
3. Remove misfed paper slowly.
BMV115S
10
235
Paper Misfeed Message (C)

The " C Read instructions in Front Cover to remove." error message appears when a paper misfeed occurs
in the paper feed section.
• When removing misfed paper from the fusing unit, do not touch any parts other than those specified
in this manual.
• When a paper misfeed (C) occurs, the paper tray is locked and cannot be pulled out. Do not forcefully
pull out the tray.
BMV103S
2. Loosen the screws to remove the brackets from both sides of the fusing unit.
10
BMV257S
236
3. Raise the C1 levers on both sides.
BMV236S
4. Holding the C2 levers, pull out the fusing unit.
BMV117S
5. Remove the paper carefully.
10
BMV288S
237
6. If you can not remove the misfeed paper, raise the C3 lever and remove the paper carefully.
BMV118S
7. Push the fusing unit back into the printer carefully until it completely stops.
BMV119S
8. Push down the C1 levers on both sides.
10
BMV244S
238
9. Reattach the brackets to both sides of the fusing unit and tighten the screws.
BMV258S
10. Remove the paper slowly from the output area of the printer.
BMV120S
• If the message indicating paper misfeed does not disappear, pull the fusing unit out and push it back
in several times.
10
239
Paper Misfeed Message (D)

The " D Read instructions in Front Cover to remove." error message appears when a paper misfeed occurs
while paper is being fed.
BMV103S
2. Open the left cover of the bridge unit.
BEK045S
3. Remove the paper.

10
BEK046S
240
Paper Misfeed Message (D)
4. Close the left cover of the bridge unit.
BEK047S
5. If the paper could not be removed, open the right cover of the bridge unit.
BEK048S
6. Remove the paper.
10
BEK042S
7. Close the right cover of the bridge unit.

241
Paper Misfeed Message (R)

The " R Open Finisher and remove the paper." error message appears when a paper misfeed occurs
inside the finisher.
When R1, R2, or R3 is displayed.
1. Open the top cover of the finisher.
BMV121S
2. Raise the R1 lever and remove the paper.
10
BMV122S
3. Return the R1 lever to its original position and close the top cover.
242
4. If the paper could not be removed, open the front cover of the finisher.
BMV088S
5. Raise the R2 lever.
BMV123S
6. Turn the R3 knob counterclockwise to remove the paper.
10
BMV124S
7. Return the R2 lever to its original position.
243
8. If the paper could not be removed, open the left cover of the bridge unit, and then turn the
R3 knob clockwise to remove the paper.
BMV125S
9. Close the left cover of the bridge unit and top cover of the finisher.
When R4, R5, or R6 is displayed.
BMV088S
10 2. Open the R4 lever outward and remove the paper.
BMV126S
244
4. If the paper could not be removed, raise the R5 lever and remove the paper.
BMV127S

6. If the paper could not be removed, move the R6 lever and remove the paper.
BMV128S

When R7, R8, R9, R10, or R11 is displayed.

10
• Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple
unit. You can trap your fingers if you do not.
245
BMV088S
BMV089S
3. Pull the R8 lever and remove the paper.
10
BMV126S
246
5. Turn the R9 lever clockwise.
BMV129S
6. Turn the R10 lever clockwise.
BMV130S
7. Push the R11 lever outward to remove the paper.
10
BMV131S
8. Return the R11 lever and reinstall the staple unit in.
247
When R1, R2, R3, or R4 is displayed.
BEK110S
2. Turn lever R1 counterclockwise.
BEK066S
3. Open lever R3.

10
BEK067S
248
4. Turn lever R2 counterclockwise.
BEK068S
5. Open the left cover of the bridge unit and remove the paper.
BEK069S
6. If the paper cannot be removed, open lever R3 and remove the paper.
10
BEK070S
249
7. Raise lever R4 up and remove the paper.
BEK071S
8. Return levers R3 and R4 to their original positions.

When R5, R6, R7, or R8 is displayed.
BMV094S
10 2. Push lever R5 outward and remove the paper.
BEK072S
3. Return lever R5 to its original position.
250
4. If the paper could not be removed, raise lever R6 and remove the paper.
BEK073S
5. Return lever R6 to its original position.

6. Open lever R3.
7. Lower lever R7 and remove the paper.
BEK074S
8. Return levers R3 and R7 to their original positions.

10
251
Paper Misfeed Message (W)

The " W Open mailbox and remove the paper." error message appears when a paper misfeed occurs
in the paper feed section of the mailbox.
1. Open the cover on the right side of the mailbox carefully.
BMV132S
BMV133S
3. Close the cover on the right side of the mailbox carefully.

10
BMV134S
252
Paper Misfeed Message (Y)
Paper Misfeed Message (Y)

The " Y Open the part as shown and remove paper." error message appears when a paper misfeed
occurs in the paper feed section of an optional paper feed unit.
• When a paper misfeed (Y) occurs, the paper tray is locked and cannot be pulled out. Do not forcefully
pull out the tray.
1. Open the cover on the right side of the 1000-sheet paper feed unit or 2000-sheet paper
feed unit carefully.
BMW070S
10
BMW071S
3. Close the cover on the right side of the 1000-sheet paper feed unit or 2000-sheet paper feed
unit carefully.
253
Paper Misfeed Message (Z)

The " Press Z to open cover and remove paper." error message appears when a paper misfeed occurs
inside the duplex unit.
• When a paper misfeed (Z) occurs, the paper tray is locked and cannot be pulled out. Do not forcefully
pull out the tray.
BMV103S
10
BMV135S
254
Paper Misfeed Message (Z)
3. Holding knob Z, open the cover, and then remove the paper carefully.
BMV242S
BMV136S
4. Close the cover.

6. Open the upper right cover.
10
BEK044S
255
BEK095S
8. Close the upper right cover.
10
256
Duplex Print Always Misfeeds
Duplex Print Always Misfeeds
• The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Before removing paper around the duplex units, wait until
the covers inside the fusing unit and duplex unit cool down.
BMV103S
2. Check if there is paper in the location shown below.
BMV137S
3. If there is paper, open the upper right cover.

10
BMV138S
257
4. Using your finger, push the paper up in the direction of the arrow.
BMV139S
5. Remove the paper from the upper right cover area carefully.
BMV140S
6. Close the upper right cover.

10
258
11. Appendix
This chapter explains safety precautions and procedures for moving the printer, consumables, and printer
specifications and option specifications.
Moving and Transporting the Printer
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power cable or plug becomes
frayed or otherwise damaged.
• It is dangerous to handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this may result in receiving an electric shock.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If the cord is unplugged
abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard.
• When moving the printer after use, do not take out any of the toners, black drum unit/color drum
units, nor waste toner bottle to prevent toner spill inside the machine.
• When moving the machine, hold the handles at both sides, and then lift the printer slowly. Lifting it
carelessly or dropping it may cause an injury.
• Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before transporting it.
• The printer is a piece of precision machinery. Take care to avoid damage during transportation.
• If optional paper feed units are attached, remove them from the printer and move them separately.
Repack the printer using its original packaging for transporting.
• The printer weighs approximately 97 kg (214 lb.).
Moving the Printer 11
• When moving the machine, hold the handles at both sides, and then lift the printer slowly. Lifting it
carelessly or dropping it may cause an injury.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. If the cable is unplugged
abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cables can cause an electrical or fire hazard.
259
11. Appendix
Moving the printer a short distance
• Be sure to place the printer on a smooth and stable place.
1. Be sure to check the following points:

• The power switch is turned off.
• The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
• The interface cable is unplugged from the printer.
2. If any external options are attached, remove them.
See the relevant sections in this manual and reverse the steps to remove options.
3. Pull out the handle from the right side of the printer.
BMV016S
4. Lift the printer with four people by using the handles on both sides of the printer, and then
move it to the place where you want to install it, keeping it horizontal.
11
BMV017S
5. Return the handle you pulled out from the printer to its original position.
6. If you removed options, reattach them.
For details, see the relevant sections in this manual.
• For turning on and off the power, see "Power on and off".
260
Moving and Transporting the Printer
• At least four people are required to lift the printer.

• Be sure to keep the printer horizontal while moving it. To prevent toner from being released,
move the printer slowly.
• If optional paper feed units are attached, remove them from the printer and move them
separately.
• When finished, return the handles to their original position.
• p.25 "Power on and off"
11
261
11. Appendix
Consumables
Print Cartridge
Toner Average printable number of pages per toner*1
Black 20,000 pages
Cyan 15,000 pages
Magenta 15,000 pages
Yellow 15,000 pages
*1 A4/Letter 5% test chart; 3 pages/job; Cyan, Magenta and Yellow: color printing only.
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and functionality. When
purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using only those specified by an authorized dealer.
• If the toner is not changed when necessary, printing will become impossible. We recommend keeping
a stock of toner or purchasing one soon.
• The number of printable pages is an estimate, based on continuous print jobs of 3 pages. The actual
number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume and density, number of pages to
be printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, contents of print images, and environmental
conditions such as temperature and humidity.
• Toner (consumable) is not covered by warranty. However, if there is a problem, contact the store
where it was purchased.
• Toner may need to be changed sooner than indicated above due to deterioration over the period of
use.
11 Black Drum Unit/Color Drum Unit
Name Average printable number of pages *1
Black Drum Unit SP C820DN 40,000 pages
Color Drum Unit SP C820DN 40,000 pages
*1 A4/Letter 5% test chart; 3 pages/job; Color Drum Unit: color printing only.
262
Consumables
be printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, contents of print images, and environmental
conditions such as temperature and humidity.
• If the black drum unit/color drum units are not changed when necessary, print quality is not
guaranteed. We recommend keeping extra sets of black drum unit/color drum units.
• Black drum unit/color drum units (consumables) are not covered by warranty. However, if there is a
problem, contact the store where they were purchased.
• Black drum unit/color drum units may need to be changed sooner than indicated above due to
deterioration over the period of use.
Waste Toner Bottle
Name Average printable number of pages*1
Waste Toner Bottle SP C811DN 40,000 pages
*1 A4/Letter 5% test chart; 3 pages/job; 30% B&W/70% color printing.
number of printable pages varies depending on the used paper type and size, and environmental
conditions.
• Waste toner bottles are consumables and not covered by warranty. However, if there is a problem,
contact the store where they were purchased.
Staple Cartridge
Name Number of shots

11
Staple cartridge 5,000 shots × 1 with cartridge
Staple Refill cartridge Refill 5,000 shots × 3
263
11. Appendix
Transfer Unit
Transfer Unit SP C820DN 200,000 pages
*1 A4/Letter 5% test chart, 3 pages/job.
be printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, and environmental conditions such as
temperature and humidity.
• If the transfer unit is not changed when necessary, the quality of printing is not guaranteed. We
recommend keeping a stock of transfer unit or purchasing one soon. Transfer unit package contains
dustproof filters.
Fusing Unit
Fusing Unit SP C820DNA/C820DNE 160,000 pages
*1 A4/Letter 5% test chart, 3 pages/job.
be printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, and environmental conditions such as
temperature and humidity.
11 • If the fusing unit is not changed when necessary, print quality is not guaranteed. We recommend
keeping a stock of fusing unit. A fusing unit package contains a transfer roller.
264
Specifications
Specifications
Mainframe
Configuration:
Desktop
Memory:
Standard 512 MB, up to 1024 MB (with the optional memory unit)
Print Process:
Laser beam scanning and Electrophotographic printing
Dualcomponent development
First Print Speed:
Basic model
Color printing: 9 seconds or less, Monochrome printing: 8 seconds or less (A4 , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
)
HDD standard model
Color printing: 8 seconds or less, Monochrome printing: 7 seconds or less (A4 , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
)
Note that if the printer has not been used for some time, there may be a short delay before the first
page starts printing.
Printing Speed:
Basic model
Maximum 40 pages per minute (A4 , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) )
HDD standard model
Maximum 50 pages per minute (A4 , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) )
Fonts: 11
Monotype Imaging 35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, 13 International fonts
Paper Size:
See p.101 "Paper and Other Media".
Paper Weight:
Media Type:
265
11. Appendix
Resolution:
1200 × 1200 dpi (true, 1 bit)
9000 × 600 dpi
1800 × 600 dpi
600 × 600 dpi
Printer Language:
RPCS, PCL5c/6, PostScript 3, PDF, PJL, PictBridge (optional)
Network protocol:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, NetBEUI, IPP, SMB
Interfaces:
Standard:
• Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
• USB 2.0, USB Host
To use USB 2.0, a USB computer port and cable that support USB 2.0 are required.
Optional:
• Parallel (Bidirectional IEEE1284)
• Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11 a/b/g)
• Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T)
• Bluetooth
Noise Emission (Sound Power Level)*1
Standby: 40 dB (A) or less
During Printing (color print):
• 67 dB (A) or less (Basic model)
• 68 dB (A) or less (HDD standard model)
During Printing (black and white print):
11 • 65 dB (A) or less (Basic model)
Noise Emission (Sound Pressure level)*2
Standby: 26 dB (A) or less
During Printing (color print):
• 53 dB (A) or less (Basic model)
During Printing (black and white print):
266
Specifications
• 51 dB (A) or less (Basic model/HDD standard model)

*1 The preceding measurements made in accordance with ISO7779 are actual values.
*2 Measured at the position of a bystander.
Warm-up Time:
Basic model: 34 seconds (23 °C, 73 °F)

HDD standard model: 48 seconds (23 °C, 73 °F)
Basic model: 35 seconds (23 °C, 73 °F)

HDD standard model: 50 seconds (23 °C, 73 °F)
Paper Capacity:
Standard Paper Tray 550 sheets × 2 trays
Bypass Tray 100 sheets
Power Source:
220-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 7 A or more
120 V, 60 Hz, 12 A or more

Power Consumption:
Maximum 1400 W (Unplug the power cord to turn off the power completely.)
Energy saver mode: 2.7 W
11
Maximum 1400 W (Unplug the power cord to turn off the power completely.)
Energy saver mode: 2.2 W
Dimensions (W × D × H):
670 × 670 × 640 mm (26.4 × 26.4 × 25.2 inches)
267
11. Appendix
Weight:
Approximately 97 kg (214 lb.)
Options
Paper Feed Unit PB3080

Paper Size:
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2 "×
1
13" (Foolscap) , 8 /2" × 11" (Letter) , 81/4" × 13" (Folio) ,
8" × 13" (F/GL) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 8K , 16K
Custom Size: 182 to 297 mm (7.17 to 11.69 inches) in width, 148 to 432 mm (5.83 to 17.00 inches)
in length
580 × 620 × 120 mm (22.9 × 24.4 × 4.8 inches)
Paper Capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb.):
550 sheets × 1 trays
Weight:
Approximately 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
Power Consumption:
Maximum 55 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Paper Feed Unit PB3040

Paper Size:
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2 "×
13" (Foolscap) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) , 81/4" × 13" (Folio) ,
11 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 8K , 16K
in length
580 × 620 × 260 mm (22.9 × 24.5 × 10.3 inches)
550 sheets × 2 trays
268
Specifications
Weight:
Power Consumption:
LCIT PB3050
Paper Size:
: A4
: 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
580 × 650 × 260 mm (22.9 × 24.5 × 10.3 inches)
1000 sheets × 2trays
Weight:
Power Consumption:
Booklet Finisher SR3000

[Finisher Upper Tray]
Paper Size:
A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 12" × 18" , 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×
1 1
14" (Legal) , 8 /2" × 13" (Foolscap) , 8 /2"× 11" (Letter) ,
81/4" × 13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 51/2" × 81/2" (Half
letter) , 8K , 16K
11
in length
Paper Weight:
52 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)
Paper Capacity:
• 100 sheets for the following paper sizes (80 g/m2, 20 lb.):
A4 , B5 JIS , A5 , B6 JIS , A6 , 81/2 × 13 (Foolscap) , 81/2 × 11 (Letter) ,
1 1 1
8 /4 × 13 (Folio) , 8 × 13 (F/GL) , 7 /4 × 10 /2 (Executive) 1 1
, 5 /2 × 8 /2 (Half letter)
, 16K
269
11. Appendix

A3 , B4 JIS , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 (Legal) , 8K
[Finisher Shift Tray]
Paper Size:
A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 12" × 18" , 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×
1 1
14" (Legal) , 8 /2" × 13" (Foolscap) , 8 /2" × 11" (Letter) ,
letter) , 8K , 16K
in length
Paper Weight:
52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb.)
Paper Capacity:
No staple:
A4 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS , A6 , 81/2 × 13 (Foolscap) , 81/2 × 11 (Letter) , 81/4 ×
1 1
13 (Folio) , 8 × 13 (F/GL) , 7 /4 × 10 /2 (Executive) 1 1
, 5 /2 × 8 /2 (Half letter) , 16K
• 500 sheet for the following paper sizes (80 g/m2, 20 lb.):
A3 , B4 JIS , A5 , 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 (Legal) , 8K
A5 , B6 , A6
Staple:
• 2 to 9 sheets, 100 sets for the following paper sizes (80 g/m2, 20 lb.):
A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 (Letter) , 71/4 × 101/2 (Executive) , 16K
• 10 to 50 sheets, 100 to 20 sets for the following paper sizes (80 g/m2, 20 lb.):
11 A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 (Letter) , 71/4 × 101/2 (Executive) , 16K
• 2 to 9 sheets, 50 sets for the following paper sizes (80 g/m2, 20 lb.):
A3 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 (Legal) , 81/2 × 13 (Foolscap) , 81/4 × 13 (Folio)
, 8 × 13 (F/GL) , 8K
• 10 to 30 sheets, 50 to 10 sets for the following paper sizes (80g/m2, 20lb.):
, 8 × 13 (F/GL) , 8K
Staple Capacity:
• 2 to 50 sheets for the following paper sizes (80g/m2, 20lb.):
270
Specifications
A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 (Letter) , 71/4 × 101/2 (Executive) , 16K

• 2 to 30 sheets for the following paper sizes (80g/m2, 20lb.):
, 8 × 13 (F/GL) , 8K
Staple Paper Size:
A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 (Legal) , 81/2 × 13 (Foolscap) ,
1
8 /2 × 11 (Letter) , 8 /4 × 13 (Folio) , 8 × 13 (F/GL) , 71/4 × 101/2 (Executive)
1 , 8K
, 16K
Staple Paper Weight:
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb.)
Staple Position:
• 1 staple - 2 positions
• 2 staples - 2 positions
[Finisher Booklet Tray]
Paper Size:
A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 (Legal) , 81/2 × 11 (Letter)
Paper Capacity:
• 2 to 5 sheets: 30 sets
Power Consumption:
Approximately 60 W (power supplied from the main unit)
Dimensions:
535 × 600 × 930 mm (21.1 × 23.7 × 36.7 inches)
Weight:
Finisher SR3030
11
[Finisher Upper Tray]
Paper Size:
A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) ,
81/2" × 13 " (Foolscap) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) ,
Letter), 8K , 16K , 12" × 18"
271
11. Appendix
in length
Paper Weight:
52 to 163 g/m2 (14 to 43 lb.)
Paper Capacity (80 g/m2, 20lb.):
• 250 sheets:
A4 , B5 JIS , A5 , B6 JIS , A6 , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) , 71/4" ×
101/2" (Executive) , 51/2" × 81/2" (Half Letter) , 16K
• 50 sheets:
A3 , B4 JIS , 12" × 18" , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" × 13" (Foolscap)
, 81/4"× 13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 8K
[Finisher Shift Tray]
Paper Size (no staple):
81/2" × 13" (Foolscap) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) ,
Letter) , Com10 , Monarch , C5 ,C6 , DL Env , 8K , 16K , 12" × 18"
in length
Paper Weight:
52 to 256 g/m2 (14 to 68 lb.)
Paper Capacity (no staple, 80g/m2, 20lb.):
• 3,000 sheets:
A4 , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
• 1500 sheets:
A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
11 , 12" × 18"
• 500 sheets for A5
• 100 sheets:
A5 , B6 JIS , A6 , 51/2" × 81/2" (Half letter)
Staple Paper Size:
A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" × 13" (Foolscap)
1
, 8 /2" × 11" (Letter) 1
, 8 /4" × 13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) ,
71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 8K , 16K , 12" × 18"
272
Specifications
Staple Paper Weight:

64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb.)
Staple Capacity (80g/m2, 20lb.):
Without Mixed Size:
• 30 sheets:
A3 , B4 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" × 13" (Foolscap) , 81/4" ×
13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 8K , 12" × 18"
• 50 sheets:
A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 16K
With Mixed Size:
• 30 sheets:
A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11" × 17" /81/2" × 11" (Letter)
Paper Capacity after staple (80g/m2, 20lb.):
Without Mixed Size:
A4 , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
• 20 to 50 sheets: 150 to 60 sets
A4 , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2" × 11" (Letter)
A3 , B4 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 81/2" ×
13" (Foolscap) , 81/4" × 13" (Folio) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive)
11
A3 , B4 JIS , 11" × 17" , 8 1/2" × 14" (Legal) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 81/2" ×
13" (Foolscap) , 81/4" × 13" (Folio) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive)
With Mixed Size:
A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11" × 17" /8 1/2" × 11" (Letter)
Staple Positions:
• 1 staple - 3 positions
• 2 staples - 2 positions
273
11. Appendix
Power Consumption:
Approximately 96 W
Dimensions:
657 × 613 × 960 mm (25.9 × 24.2× 37.8 inches)
Weight:
Output Jogger Unit Type 3260

Paper size
A3 , B4 , A4 , B5 , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 11"
Power consumption (Max):
16 W (power supplied from main unit)
108 x 452 x 130 mm (4.3 x 17.8 x 5.2 inches)
Weight:
Approximately 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.)
Mail Bin Type C820

Paper size:
1
8 /2" × 11" (Letter) , 8 /4" × 13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive)
1
Paper Weight:
60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lb.)
11 500 sheets (125 sheets per output tray)
Power Consumption:
Approximately 17 W (power supplied from the main unit)
440 × 475 × 370 mm (17.3 × 18.7 × 14.6 inches)
Weight:
Approximately 10 kg (22 lb.)
274
Specifications
Memory Unit Type J 256 MB/Memory Unit Type J 512 MB

Module Type:
SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module)
Memory Type:
SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM)
Number of Pins:
200 pins
Printer Hard Disk Drive Type 820

Storage Capacity (Formatted):
80 GB
Specifications:
• Spooling print data to collate
• Storing/Spooling Sample Print/Locked Print/Hold Print/Stored Print data
• Storing PostScript fonts
• Storing log data
• You can install PostScript fonts with this optional hard disk drive. With Mac OS, types of fonts
supported are PostScript Type 1 and PostScript Type 2. To download them, use Printer Utility for
Mac.
Gigabit Ethernet Type B

Interface Connector:
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T)
Data Transmission Speed: Ethernet: 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1000 Mbps 11
Protocol:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Apple Talk
Maximum Length of Cable Between Devices:
Ethernet: 100 m
275
11. Appendix
IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J

Transmission Specification:
Based on IEEE 802.11 a/b/g (Wireless LAN)
Data Transfer Speed:
Auto select from the following speed:
• IEEE 802.11 b:
1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 11 Mbps
• IEEE 802.11 g:
1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 11 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36
Mbps, 48 Mbps, 54 Mbps
• IEEE 802.11 a:
6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 54 Mbps
Frequency Range:
• IEEE 802.11 b/g:
• : 2412 to 2472 MHz (Channels 1 to 13)
• : 2412 to 2462 MHz (Channels 1 to 11)
• IEEE 802.11 a:
• 5180 to 5320 MHz (Channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, and 64)
Transmission Mode:
• Ad-hoc mode
• Infrastructure mode
IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type K
11 Transmission Specification:
Based on IEEE 802.11b/g (Wireless LAN)
Data Transfer Speed:
Auto select from the following speed:
1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 11 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36 Mbps,
48 Mbps, 54 Mbps
Frequency Range:
2412 to 2462 MHz (Channels 1 to 11)
276
Specifications
Transmission Mode:
• Ad-hoc mode
• Infrastructure mode
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245

Supported Profiles:
SPP (Serial Port Profile), HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile), BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
Frequency Range:
2.45 GHz ISM band
Data Transmission Speed:
723 kbps
• The transmission speed is adjusted according to factors such as the distance and obstacles
between the devices, radio signal condition and Bluetooth adaptor.
Maximum Range:
10 m
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A

Transmission Specification:
IEEE 1284
Required Cable:
Standard IEEE 1284-compliant Micro Getronics 36-pin cable
Punch Kit PU3000 (Booklet Finisher SR3000 Only)

Paper size: 11
2 and 3 holes type
A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , A5 , 11" × 17" ,
81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) , 71/4" ×
2 holes 1 1
10 /2" (Executive) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 8 /2" ×
1
13" (Foolscap) , 8 /4" × 13" (Folio) , 8K , 16K
A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×

3 holes
11" (Letter) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 8K , 16K
277
11. Appendix
2 and 4 holes type

A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , A5 , 11" × 17" ,
81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) , 71/4" ×
2 holes 1 1
10 /2" (Executive) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 8 /2" ×
1
A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×

4 holes
11" (Letter) , 71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 8K , 16K
4 holes type
A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS , A5 , 11" × 17" ,
81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) , 71/4" ×
4 holes
101/2" (Executive) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) , 81/2" ×
1
Paper weight:
52 to 163 g/m2 (14 to 43 lb.)
Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2 (Finisher SR3030 Only)

Paper size:
2 and 3 holes type

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" ×
13" (Foolscap) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) ,
2 holes 81/4" × 13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) ,
71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 51/2" ×
1
8 /2" (Half Letter) , 8K , 16K , 12" ×
18"
11 A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" ,

81/2" × 11" (Letter) , 71/4" ×
3 holes
101/2" (Executive) , 8K , 16K , 12" ×
18"
Paper weight:
52 to 163 g/m2 (14 to 43 lb.)
278
Specifications
Punch Unit Type 3260 EU 2/4 (Finisher SR3030 Only)

Paper size:
2 and 4 holes type

A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" ×
13" (Foolscap) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) ,
2 holes 1
8 /4" × 13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) ,
71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 51/2" ×
81/2" (Half Letter) , 8K , 16K , 12" ×
18"
A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" ,

81/2" × 11" (Letter) , 71/4" ×
4 holes
101/2" (Executive) , 8K , 16K , 12" ×
18"
Paper weight:
52 to 163 g/m2 (14 to 43 lb.)
Punch Unit Type 3260 SC (Finisher SR3030 Only)

Paper size:
4 holes type
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS ,
11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" (Legal) , 81/2" ×
13" (Foolscap) , 81/2" × 11" (Letter) ,
4 holes 1
8 /4" × 13" (Folio) , 8" × 13" (F/GL) ,
71/4" × 101/2" (Executive) , 51/2" ×
81/2" (Half Letter) , 8K , 16K , 12" ×
18" 11
Paper weight:
52 to 163 g/m2 (14 to 43 lb.)
279
11. Appendix
11
280
INDEX
DHCP......................................................................82
Digital camera connection....................................75
1000-sheet paper feed unit..........36, 37, 39, 102,
118, 178 Display...................................................................23
120 V model..........................................................11 Dustproof filter.....................................................167
2 Tray finisher......................................................173 Dustproof glass....................................................182
2000-sheet paper feed unit.........36, 39, 104, 126 E
220-240 V model.................................................11 Envelope.....................................................107, 115
500-sheet paper feed unit...........37, 39, 102, 118, Error message......................................................197
178, 268
Escape key......................................................23, 28
A Ethernet...................................................................71
Ad-hoc channel.....................................................88 Ethernet configuration...........................................79
Adjusting the printer............................................185 Ethernet port...........................................................19
Alert indicator........................................................23 Ethernet speed.......................................................85
Expansion card slots.............................................19
B
F
Black Drum Unit...................................21, 143, 262
Bluetooth interface unit..........................................62 Finisher SR3030..................................................271
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245..................277 Friction pad..........................................................178
Booklet finisher...................................169, 228, 269 Front cover.............................................................17
Booklet Finisher SR3000....................................269 Fusing unit.............................................21, 161, 264
Browser..................................................................14 G
Bypass tray...........................................17, 104, 128
Gigabit Ethernet.....................................................54
Bypass tray extension...........................................17
Gigabit Ethernet board..................................54, 71
C Gigabit Ethernet Board Type B..........................275
Camera direct print card......................................75 Glossy paper.......................................................112
Caution label...........................................................6 Gradation correction..........................................192
CD-ROM................................................................14 Gradation correction sheet................................190
Certificate...............................................................98 H
Cleaning.............................................177, 178, 181
Handle.............................................................17, 19
Coated paper......................................................113
Hard disk................................................................48
Color calibration sample sheet..........................190
HDD encryption unit..............................................67
Color Drum Units.................................. 21, 143, 262
HTML......................................................................14
Color gradation...................................................187
Connection................................................71, 75, 77 I
Consumable.........................................................262 IEEE 1284.......................................................54, 66
Control panel.........................................................17 IEEE 1284 interface board............................65, 77
Controller board.............................................19, 35 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A...................277
D IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J..............276
IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type K.................276
Data In indicator....................................................23
Inner cover.............................................................21
Data overwrite security unit..................................67
Interface unit..........................................................54
Device certificate...................................................98
IP address...............................................................80
281
IPDS unit.................................................................67 Paper feed unit.......................................................36
J Paper Feed Unit PB3040...................................268
Paper Feed Unit PB3080...................................268
Job reset key..........................................................23 Paper misfeed.........232, 234, 236, 240, 242, 252,
L 253, 254, 257
Paper size....................................................101, 118
Label paper.................................................107, 112 Paper support........................................................17
LCIT PB3050.......................................................269 Paper tray............................................................118
LED lamp................................................................74 Paper type................107, 118, 135, 136, 137, 138
Left front cover.......................................................17 Paper weight........................................................106
Letterhead...........................................107, 111, 134 Parallel...................................................................77
Loading paper.....................................................118 Plain paper..........................................................107
M Power connector....................................................19
Power indicator.....................................................23
Mail Bin Type C820...........................................274
Power on and off...................................................25
Mailbox.......................................................252, 274
Power switch..........................................................17
Manuals.............................................................9, 14
Print area..............................................................116
Memory..................................................................45
Printer error.........................................209, 212, 220
Memory expansion unit........................................45
Printer Hard Disk Drive Type 820......................275
Memory Unit Type J 256 MB............................275
Printing position...................................................194
Memory Unit Type J 512 MB............................275
Punch Kit PU3000...............................................277
Menu key...............................................................23
Punch Unit Type 3260 EU 2/4.........................279
Middle thick.........................................................107
Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2........................278
Middle thick paper..............................................108
Punch Unit Type 3260 SC.................................. 279
Moving the printer............................................... 259
Punch waste.........................................................228
N
R
NetWare................................................................84
Registration roller................................................181
Network setting.....................................................84
Right cover.............................................................17
Not supported paper..........................................116
S
O
Scroll keys..............................................................23
OHP transparency......................................107, 111
SD card..................................................................67
OK key...................................................................23
SDRAM module.....................................................45
Operational messages..........................................28
Security...................................................................93
Operational status.................................................28
Selection keys........................................................23
Optional Gigabit Ethernet board slot..................19
Shutdown...............................................................25
Optional interface board slots.............................19
Site certificate........................................................98
Options...................................................12, 31, 268
Special paper.............................................107, 114
Output Jogger Unit Type 3260.........................274
Specifications......................................................265
P SSID........................................................................90
Panel tone............................................................208 Standard output tray.............................................17
Paper....................................................................107 Staple...................................................................169
Paper capacity....................................................106 Staple cartridge...................................................263
282
Staple jam............................................................222
Status message....................................................197
Storing paper......................................................107
Suspend/Resume key...........................................23
Symbols..................................................................10
T
Test sheet..............................................................194
Thick paper.................................................107, 109
Thin paper...................................................107, 110
Toner.....................................................21, 139, 262
Transfer roller................................................21, 165
Transfer unit..........................................21, 150, 264
Tray 1...........................................17, 101, 118, 178
Tray 2...........................................17, 102, 118, 178
Tray 3....................................................36, 104, 126
Tray 4.....................................................................36
Tray 5.....................................................................36
Turning on and off the Power...............................25
U
Unique name..............................................135, 136
Upper right cover..................................................17
USB.........................................................................75
USB port A.............................................................19
USB port B..............................................................19
V
Ventilator................................................................19
VM card.................................................................67
W
Warning label..........................................................6
Waste toner bottle......................................156, 263
WEP key.................................................................93
Wireless LAN............................................54, 88, 93
Wireless LAN interface board..............................58
WPA........................................................94, 98, 100
WPA2......................................................94, 98, 100
283
MEMO
284 GB GB EN USA G189-6633

Copyright © 2008
Hardware Guide
Model No.
GB GB
MLP150DN/SP8200DN/LP150dn/Aficio SP 8200DN
EN USA G189-6633
Operating Instructions
Software Guide
1 Preparing for Printing

2 Printing Documents
3 Printing Stored Documents
4 Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)
5 Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
6 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
7 Using a Printer Server
8 Mac OS Configuration
9 Appendix
10
11
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety Information
before using the machine.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this printer. For your safety and
benefit, read this manual carefully before using the printer. Keep this manual in a handy place for quick
reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the "Safety Information" before using the machine.
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, Acrobat Reader, Adobe Type Manager, Flash, Macromedia, PageMaker and PostScript
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, Mac OS, Mac OS X and True Type are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the
U.S. and other countries.
Citrix® and MetaFrame® are registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
Monotype® is a registered trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Netware®, IPXTM, IPX/SPXTM, Novell ClientTM are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Novell, Inc.
Netscape® and Netscape Navigator® are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc.
SolarisTM is trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnPTM is a trademark of the UPnPTM Implementers Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, MS-DOS®, and Windows Vista® are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
* The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
* The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
* The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Web Edition
* The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Web Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Datacenter
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Manuals for This Printer
Refer to the manuals that are relevant to what you want to do with the printer.
• Media differ according to manual.

• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the html manuals.
Safety Information
Contains information about safe usage of this printer.
To avoid injury and prevent damage to the printer, be sure to read this.
Quick Installation Guide
Contains procedures for removing the printer from its box, connecting it to a computer, and installing
its driver.
Hardware Guide
Contains information about paper and procedures such as installing options, replacing consumables,
responding to error messages, and resolving jams.
Software Guide (This manual)
Contains information about using this printer, its software, and its security functions.
Security Guide
Contains information for administrators of the printer. It explains security functions that the
administrators can use to prevent data tampering or unauthorized use of the printer. Also refer to this
manual for the procedure for registering an administrator, as well as setting user and administrator
authentication.
Unix Supplement
For “UNIX Supplement”, please visit our Web site or consult an authorized dealer. This manual
includes descriptions of functions and settings that might not be available on this printer.
• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.

• The following software products are referred to as using general names:
Product name General name
DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder

DeskTopBinder
Professional*1
1
Product name General name
Web SmartDeviceMonitor professional IS*1 and

Web SmartDeviceMonitor
Web SmartDeviceMonitor Standard*1
*1 Optional
2
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:

Ignoring these notes could result in serious injury or death. Be sure to read these notes. They can be found
in the “Safety Information” section of Safety Information.

Ignoring these notes could result in moderate or minor injury, or damage to the printer or to property. Be
sure to read these notes. They can be found in the “Safety Information” section of Safety Information.
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the printer, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the printer's functions, and instructions on resolving user errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys that appear on the printer's display panel.
[]
Indicates the names of keys on the printer's control panel.
About IP Address
In this manual, “IP address” covers both IPv4 and IPv6 environments. Read the instructions that are relevant
to the environment you are using.
3
Model-Specific Information
In this manual, the following symbols indicate information that relates to a specific printer model.
This indicates information about the 220 to 240 V model printer.

This indicates information about the 120 V model printer.

• Check the label on the rear of the printer to identify the printer's model.
BMW031S
4
List of Options
This section provides a list of options for this printer, and how they are referred to as in this manual.
Some printer models have a hard drive installed by default. In this manual, the models with the hard disk
drive are referred to as the HDD standard model. The models for which the hard disk drive is optional are
referred to as the Basic model.
IEEE802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J

Wireless LAN interface board
IEEE802.11g Interface Unit Type K
Memory Unit Type J 256 MB,

SDRAM module
Printer Hard Disk Drive Type 820 Hard disk
Gigabit Ethernet Type B Gigabit Ethernet board
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A IEEE 1284 interface board
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245 Bluetooth interface unit
HDD ENCRYPTION UNIT Type D HDD encryption unit
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M Data overwrite security unit
Camera Direct Print Card Type F Camera direct print card
SD Card for NetWare Printing Type A NetWare card
VM Card Type K VM card
Data Storage Card Type A Data storage card
Finisher SR3030 2 tray finisher
Booklet Finisher SR3000 Booklet finisher
Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2,

Punch Unit Type 3260 EU 2/4, Punch unit
Punch Unit Type 3260 SC
Output Jogger Unit Type 3260 Output jogger unit
5
LCIT PB3050 2000-sheet paper feed unit
Bridge Unit BU3030 Bridge unit
Punch Kit PU3000 NA

Punch Kit PU3000 EU Punch kit
Punch Kit PU3000 SC
Mail Bin Type C820 Mailbox
6
Using Keys
This section explains names and usage of the parts of the control panel.
BMV029S
1. Display
Displays current printer status and error messages.
When the printer enters energy saver mode, the display back light turns off. For details about energy saver mode,
see "System Menu".
2. Selection Keys
3. [Escape] Key
Press this key to return to the previous display.
4. Scroll Keys
Press to move the cursor in each direction.
5. [OK] Key
Use this key to confirm settings or setting values, or move to the next menu level.
6. Data In indicator
Blinks when the printer is receiving data from a computer. Lights up if there is data to be printed.
7. Alert Indicator
Lights up in red or yellow when a printer error occurs.
Red: printing is not possible/possible but print quality cannot be ensured.
Yellow: printer requires maintenance, such as replacing consumables, shortly.
Follow the instructions that appear on the display.
8. Power Indicator
Remains lit while the power is on. It is unlit when the power is off or while the printer is in energy saver mode.
7
9. [Suspend/Resume] Key
Press this key to suspend a print job. The key lights up while the job is suspended. To resume the job, press this
key again.
10. [Job Reset] Key
Press this key to cancel an ongoing print job.
11. [Menu] Key
Press this key to configure and check the current printer settings.
While configuring settings, press this key to return to the initial screen.
• p.166 "System Menu"
8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Printer......................................................................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual.................................................................................................................................3
Symbols...........................................................................................................................................................3
About IP Address............................................................................................................................................3
Model-Specific Information...............................................................................................................................4
List of Options......................................................................................................................................................5
Using Keys...........................................................................................................................................................7
1. Preparing for Printing
Confirming the Connection Method...............................................................................................................21
Network Connection...................................................................................................................................21
Local Connection.........................................................................................................................................23
Installing the Printer Driver...............................................................................................................................24
Quick Install..................................................................................................................................................24
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port........................................................................................25
Using as a Windows Network Printer............................................................................................................41
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer.......................................................................................44
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver................................................................................................45
Form Feed.....................................................................................................................................................46
Banner Page.................................................................................................................................................46
Printing after Resetting the Printer................................................................................................................46
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB............................................................................................................47
Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 - USB..............................................................47
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008 - USB.........................................................................................48
Troubleshooting USB...................................................................................................................................49
Printing with Parallel Connection....................................................................................................................50
Printing with Bluetooth Connection.................................................................................................................53
Supported Profiles........................................................................................................................................53
Printing with Bluetooth Connection.............................................................................................................53
Configuring Security Mode Settings..........................................................................................................54
Printing in the Security Mode......................................................................................................................55
Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver...............................................................................56
Windows 2000...........................................................................................................................................56
Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2.............................................................56
9
Windows XP Home Edition.........................................................................................................................57
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008....................................................................................................57
Making Option Settings for the Printer...........................................................................................................59
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication.............................................................................................59
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled...............................................................................................60
Installing Font Manager...................................................................................................................................61
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0......................................................................................62
2. Printing Documents
Two Dialog Box Types.....................................................................................................................................63
Displaying the Printer Driver Setting Screen...................................................................................................64
Making printer default settings - the printer properties.............................................................................64
Making printer default settings - printing preferences..............................................................................64
Making printer settings from an application..............................................................................................65
Frequently Used Print Methods.......................................................................................................................66
Standard Printing.........................................................................................................................................66
Printing on both sides of sheets...................................................................................................................68
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page.............................................................................................71
Printing with Watermark/Overlay.............................................................................................................74
Using Custom Settings.................................................................................................................................76
Advanced Printing............................................................................................................................................78
Settings that Can Be Changed on Each Tab.............................................................................................78
Printing on Cover Sheet...............................................................................................................................78
Inserting Slip Sheets.....................................................................................................................................80
Staple............................................................................................................................................................81
Punch.............................................................................................................................................................84
Using Collate Function.................................................................................................................................86
Spool Printing...............................................................................................................................................87
Printing a PDF File Directly...............................................................................................................................89
Using DeskTopBinder Lite............................................................................................................................89
Using Commands.........................................................................................................................................93
Unauthorized Copy Control............................................................................................................................94
Opening the Unauthorized Copy Control Window.................................................................................94
Using [Data security for copying]...............................................................................................................94
10
Using [Mask type:].......................................................................................................................................96
Important Notice..........................................................................................................................................97
Specifying the Classification Code for a Print Job.........................................................................................98
Using the Virtual Printer.................................................................................................................................100
Adding a Virtual Printer.............................................................................................................................100
Changing a Virtual Printer Configuration................................................................................................101
Confirming a Virtual Printer Configuration..............................................................................................101
Deleting a Virtual Printer...........................................................................................................................102
Printing Using a Virtual Printer..................................................................................................................102
Memory Capacity and Paper Size..............................................................................................................104
One-sided printing (600 × 600 dpi).......................................................................................................104
Duplex printing (600 × 600 dpi).............................................................................................................104
Black and White [Printing] when [Photograph] or [DTP] is Selected for [Document type]......................105
If Error Occurs with the Specified Paper Size and Type............................................................................106
Printing from a Selected Tray...................................................................................................................106
Canceling a Print Job................................................................................................................................107
3. Printing Stored Documents
Using the Print Job Function..........................................................................................................................109
Print Job screen..........................................................................................................................................109
Printing from the Print Job Screen.................................................................................................................112
Sample Print...............................................................................................................................................112
Locked Print................................................................................................................................................115
Hold Print....................................................................................................................................................118
Stored Print.................................................................................................................................................121
Printing from the User ID Screen...................................................................................................................126
Printing the Selected Print Job...................................................................................................................126
Printing All Print Jobs.................................................................................................................................127
Canceling a Print Job.....................................................................................................................................129
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel.......................................................................................129
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer.............................................................................129
Mac OS - Canceling a Print Job from the computer..............................................................................130
4. Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)
What is PictBridge?........................................................................................................................................131
11
PictBridge Printing..........................................................................................................................................132
What Can Be Done on This Printer...............................................................................................................133
Index Printing.............................................................................................................................................133
Trimming.....................................................................................................................................................134
Date and File Name Printing....................................................................................................................135
Paper Size..................................................................................................................................................135
Image Print Size.........................................................................................................................................136
Multi-Image-Layout...................................................................................................................................137
Printing Quality..........................................................................................................................................138
Color Matching.........................................................................................................................................139
Paper Type Specification..........................................................................................................................139
Form Printing..............................................................................................................................................139
Camera Memo Printing.............................................................................................................................139
Exiting PictBridge...........................................................................................................................................140
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work...................................................................................................141
Other Reference Information........................................................................................................................142
5. Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Menu Chart....................................................................................................................................................143
Memory Erase Status Menu..........................................................................................................................148
Paper Input Menu..........................................................................................................................................149
Paper Input Menu Parameters..................................................................................................................149
Changing the Paper Input Menu..............................................................................................................151
Maintenance Menu.......................................................................................................................................154
Maintenance Menu Parameters...............................................................................................................154
Changing the Maintenance Menu...........................................................................................................160
List/Test Print Menu.......................................................................................................................................162
List/Test Print Menu Parameters...............................................................................................................162
Printing a Configuration Page..................................................................................................................163
Interpreting the Configuration Page.........................................................................................................163
System Menu..................................................................................................................................................166
System Menu Parameters.........................................................................................................................166
Changing the System Menu.....................................................................................................................170
Print Settings Menu........................................................................................................................................171
12
Print Settings Menu Parameters................................................................................................................171
Changing the Print Settings Menu............................................................................................................181
Security Options Menu.................................................................................................................................182
Security Options Menu Parameters.........................................................................................................182
Changing the Security Options Menu.....................................................................................................186
Host Interface Menu......................................................................................................................................187
Host Interface Menu Parameters..............................................................................................................187
Changing the Host Interface Menu..........................................................................................................193
Language Menu.............................................................................................................................................194
Language Menu Parameters....................................................................................................................194
Changing the Language Menu................................................................................................................194
Options Menu................................................................................................................................................195
Options Menu Parameters........................................................................................................................195
Checking the Error Log.............................................................................................................................195
6. Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Using Web Image Monitor...........................................................................................................................197
Introduction to Web Image Monitor........................................................................................................197
Displaying Top Page.................................................................................................................................198
When User Authentication is Set..............................................................................................................200
About Menu and Mode............................................................................................................................200
Access in the Administrator Mode...........................................................................................................202
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help.....................................................................................................202
Registering Classification Codes..................................................................................................................204
Configuring Classification Codes.............................................................................................................205
Specifying the Classification Code for a Print Job..................................................................................205
Address Book Backup and Restore - Web Image Monitor...................................................................206
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.........................................................................................................208
Introduction to SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin......................................................................................208
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin...............................................................................................209
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration..........................................................................210
Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel...................................................................................211
Changing the Paper Type.........................................................................................................................211
Managing User Information.....................................................................................................................212
13
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode.......................................................................................................218
Setting a Password....................................................................................................................................218
Checking the Printer Status.......................................................................................................................219
Changing Names and Comments...........................................................................................................220
Address Book Backup and Restore - SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.................................................221
Backing Up Address Book Data - SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin......................................................221
Restoring Address Book Data - SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin..........................................................221
Viewing and Deleting Spool Print Jobs....................................................................................................221
Managing Address Information...............................................................................................................222
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client..........................................................................................................224
Monitoring Printers....................................................................................................................................224
Checking the Printer Status.......................................................................................................................225
When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client............................................................................225
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail............................................................................................................227
Configuring E-mail Notification................................................................................................................227
Auto E-mail Notification............................................................................................................................228
On-demand E-mail Notification...............................................................................................................229
Mail authentication...................................................................................................................................229
Sending On-demand E-mail.....................................................................................................................230
Remote Maintenance by telnet.....................................................................................................................234
Using telnet................................................................................................................................................234
8021x........................................................................................................................................................234
access.........................................................................................................................................................236
appletalk....................................................................................................................................................237
authfree......................................................................................................................................................238
autonet........................................................................................................................................................238
bonjour.......................................................................................................................................................239
btconfig......................................................................................................................................................240
devicename...............................................................................................................................................241
dhcp............................................................................................................................................................241
dhcp6.........................................................................................................................................................242
dns..............................................................................................................................................................243
domainname..............................................................................................................................................244
14
etherauth....................................................................................................................................................245
help.............................................................................................................................................................245
hostname....................................................................................................................................................246
ifconfig........................................................................................................................................................246
info..............................................................................................................................................................247
ipsec...........................................................................................................................................................248
ipp...............................................................................................................................................................248
ipv6.............................................................................................................................................................249
lpr................................................................................................................................................................249
netware......................................................................................................................................................249
passwd.......................................................................................................................................................251
pathmtu.......................................................................................................................................................251
prnlog.........................................................................................................................................................252
rhpp............................................................................................................................................................252
route............................................................................................................................................................252
set................................................................................................................................................................254
show...........................................................................................................................................................256
slp...............................................................................................................................................................256
smb.............................................................................................................................................................257
snmp...........................................................................................................................................................257
sntp.............................................................................................................................................................261
spoolsw......................................................................................................................................................261
ssdp............................................................................................................................................................262
ssh...............................................................................................................................................................262
status...........................................................................................................................................................263
syslog..........................................................................................................................................................263
upnp...........................................................................................................................................................264
web.............................................................................................................................................................264
wiconfig......................................................................................................................................................265
wins.............................................................................................................................................................269
wsmfp.........................................................................................................................................................270
SNMP.............................................................................................................................................................272
Getting Printer Information over the Network.............................................................................................274
15
Current Printer Status.................................................................................................................................274
Printer Configuration.................................................................................................................................279
Understanding the Displayed Information...................................................................................................281
Print Job Information..................................................................................................................................281
Print Log Information.................................................................................................................................281
Configuring the Network Interface Board...............................................................................................282
Message List...................................................................................................................................................292
System Log Information.............................................................................................................................292
7. Using a Printer Server
Preparing Printer Server................................................................................................................................301
Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.........................................................................301
Using NetWare..............................................................................................................................................303
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)............................................................................................304
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5).............................................................305
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 / 5.1 or 6 / 6.5 Environment............................................................306
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x).......................................................................................308
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5)........................................................310
8. Mac OS Configuration
Mac OS 9......................................................................................................................................................313
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File.............................................................................313
Setting Up PPD Files..................................................................................................................................314
Creating a Desktop Printer Icon...............................................................................................................314
Setting Up Options....................................................................................................................................314
Installing the ColorSync Profiles...............................................................................................................315
Installing Adobe Type Manager..............................................................................................................316
Installing Screen Fonts...............................................................................................................................316
Changing to AppleTalk.............................................................................................................................317
Mac OS X.......................................................................................................................................................318
Installing the PPD Files...............................................................................................................................318
Setting Up the PPD File..............................................................................................................................318
Setting Up Options....................................................................................................................................319
Using USB Interface..................................................................................................................................319
Using Bonjour............................................................................................................................................320
16
Changing to AppleTalk.............................................................................................................................321
Configuring the Printer...................................................................................................................................322
Using PostScript 3..........................................................................................................................................323
Job Type.....................................................................................................................................................323
User Code..................................................................................................................................................332
Paper Size..................................................................................................................................................333
Fit to Paper.................................................................................................................................................333
Input Slot....................................................................................................................................................333
Resolution...................................................................................................................................................334
Orientation Override................................................................................................................................334
Duplex Printing...........................................................................................................................................335
Color Mode...............................................................................................................................................335
Gradation..................................................................................................................................................336
Color Profile...............................................................................................................................................336
Color Setting..............................................................................................................................................337
Toner Saving/Level Color........................................................................................................................338
Collate........................................................................................................................................................338
Paper Type.................................................................................................................................................339
Black Over Print.........................................................................................................................................339
Image Smoothing......................................................................................................................................339
Separate into CMYK.................................................................................................................................340
CMYK Simulation Profile..........................................................................................................................340
Dithering.....................................................................................................................................................341
Gray Reproduction....................................................................................................................................341
Color Matching.........................................................................................................................................342
Printer Utility for Mac.....................................................................................................................................343
Installing Printer Utility for Mac................................................................................................................343
Starting Printer Utility for Mac..................................................................................................................344
Printer Utility for Mac Functions................................................................................................................344
9. Appendix
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM........................................................................................351
Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM.....................................................................................................351
Printer Drivers for This Printer....................................................................................................................351
17
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin...............................................................................................................353
DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client....................................................................................354
Manuals.....................................................................................................................................................356
Printing Files Directly from Windows............................................................................................................357
Setup...........................................................................................................................................................357
Using a Host Name Instead of an IPv4 Address....................................................................................357
Printing Commands...................................................................................................................................358
When Using Windows Terminal Service/Citrix Presentation Server(MetaFrame)..................................362
Operating Environment.............................................................................................................................362
Supported Printer Drivers..........................................................................................................................362
Limitations...................................................................................................................................................362
Using DHCP...................................................................................................................................................364
Using AutoNet...........................................................................................................................................364
Configuring the WINS Server......................................................................................................................365
Using Web Image Monitor......................................................................................................................365
Using telnet................................................................................................................................................365
Using the Dynamic DNS Function................................................................................................................366
Updating....................................................................................................................................................366
DNS Servers Targeted for Operation......................................................................................................367
DHCP Servers Targeted for Operation....................................................................................................367
Setting the Dynamic DNS Function..........................................................................................................367
Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................369
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network............................................................................................369
When the Wireless LAN Interface Unit Is Installed.................................................................................369
Security Measures Provided by this Printer..................................................................................................371
Using Authentication and Managing Users............................................................................................371
Preventing Information Leaks....................................................................................................................371
Limiting and Controlling Access...............................................................................................................372
Enhanced Network Security.....................................................................................................................372
Configuring SSL Encryption......................................................................................................................373
Copyright Information about Installed Applications...................................................................................375
expat...........................................................................................................................................................375
NetBSD......................................................................................................................................................375
18
Netatalk(NetBSD)/NetaTalk 1.4b2+asun2.1.3....................................................................................384
FreeBSD 4.6.2/netipx..............................................................................................................................385
Sablotron....................................................................................................................................................385
JPEG LIBRARY............................................................................................................................................385
SASL...........................................................................................................................................................385
Samba(Ver 3.0.4).....................................................................................................................................386
RSA BSAFE®..............................................................................................................................................387
Open SSL...................................................................................................................................................387
Open SSH..................................................................................................................................................389
Open LDAP................................................................................................................................................393
Heimdal......................................................................................................................................................394
IPSTM print language emulations.............................................................................................................394
racoon........................................................................................................................................................394
TrouSerS.....................................................................................................................................................395
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................399
19
20
This chapter describes how to connect this printer to your computer, and install the printer driver.
1
Confirming the Connection Method
This printer supports network and local connections.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the printer is connected. Follow the driver installation
procedure that is appropriate for the connection method.
Network Connection
This printer can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.
Using this printer as a Windows printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet and Wireless LAN.
Available ports are determined based on the combination of the Windows operating system version and
connection method used.
BMU909S
21
Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
Connection Method Available Ports
1 • Ethernet • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

• Wireless LAN • Standard TCP/IP port
• LPR port
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008
Connection Method Available Ports
• Ethernet • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

• Wireless LAN • Standard TCP/IP port
• LPR port
• WSD port
• See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of ports.
• For details about the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, see "Installing the Printer Driver".
• For details about the Standard TCP/IP port, see "Installing the Printer Driver".
• For details about the LPR port, see "Installing the Printer Driver".
• For details about the WSD port, see "Installing the Printer Driver".
• p.24 "Installing the Printer Driver"
Using as a network printer

This printer can be used as a Windows network printer, a NetWare print server, or a NetWare remote
printer.
22
Confirming the Connection Method
BMU910S
• In an IPv6 environment, NetWare servers cannot be used.

• See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each type of network printers.
• For details about Windows network printer, see "Using as a Windows Network Printer".
• For details about a NetWare print server and remote printer, see "Using as a NetWare Print Server/
Remote Printer".
• p.41 "Using as a Windows Network Printer"

• p.44 "Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer"
Local Connection
Local connections can be established via parallel, USB, and Bluetooth connections.
• See the explanation about how to install the printer driver for each connection method.
• For details about USB connections, see "Installing the Printer Driver Using USB".
• For details about parallel connections, see "Printing with Parallel Connection".
• p.47 "Installing the Printer Driver Using USB"

• p.50 "Printing with Parallel Connection"
23
Installing the Printer Driver

This section explains how to install the printer driver. There are two ways to install the printer driver: using
1 Quick Install, which installs the settings at once, or installing the appropriate driver according to the port
you want to use.
Downloading the Printer Driver
You can install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with this printer or download it from the
supplier's Web site.
If your operating system is Windows XP Pro x64, Windows Vista x64, or Windows Server
2003/2003 R2/2008 x64, you must download the printer driver from the supplier's Web site. Select
this printer and the operating system you are using, and then download it.
Quick Install
Users of Windows 2000/XP/Vista, and Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 can install this software
easily using the supplied CD-ROM.
Using Quick Install, the PCL and RPCS printer drivers and DeskTopBinder- SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client are installed under the network environment, and the TCP/IP port will be set.
• To install the printer driver under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, and Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
• If this printer is connected using USB, see "Installing the Printer Driver Using USB" and install the printer
driver.
1. Quit all applications currently running.

2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
3. Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
4. Click [Quick Install].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
5. After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.] and then click [Next >].
6. Select the printer model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
For network connection via TCP/IP, select the printer whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To].
For parallel connection, select the printer whose printer port is displayed in [Connect To].
24
7. Click [Install].
The printer driver installation starts.
8. Click [Finish].
A message about restarting the computer appears. Restart the computer to complete the installation. 1
9. Click [Exit] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the CD-ROM.
• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch "Setup.exe" on
the CD-ROM root directory.
• Select a printer to whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To] to install SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client when using TCP/IP.
• Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between the printer and computer
is enabled via parallel connection. For details about bidirectional communication between the printer
and computer, see "Making Option Settings for the Printer".
• p.47 "Installing the Printer Driver Using USB"

• p.59 "Making Option Settings for the Printer"
Installing the Printer Driver for the Selected Port
Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
• To install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, and Windows Server
2003/2003 R2/2008, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as
an Administrator.
• Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver when using the
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

25
4. Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client].

5. The message to quit all other applications appears. Quit all applications, and then click [Next
>].
1 6. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After
reading through its contents, click [Yes].
7. Click [Full install] or [Custom install].
[Full install] installs all required applications: DeskTopBinder Lite and SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client.
[Custom install] installs selected applications.
8. Follow the instructions on the display and then click [Next >] to proceed to the next step.
9. After the installation is completed, select one of the options to restart the computer either
now or later, and click [Complete].
Restart the computer to complete the installation.
Changing the port settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout,
recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.
Windows 2000:
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

The [Printers] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
3. On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port].
The [Configuration] dialog box appears.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2:
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
2. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
3. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Configuration] dialog box appears.
26
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008:
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

The [Control Panel] window appears.
2. Click [Printer]. 1
3. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties].
4. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Configuration:] dialog box appears.
• User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.

• If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow the procedure below.
1. Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
2. Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon
on the tasktray.
3. Point to [Properties], and then click Extended Features Settings.
4. Select the Set [Recovery/Parallel Printing] for each port check box.
5. Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features] dialog box.
• For details about these settings, see "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client", or SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client Help.
• p.224 "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client"
Installing the PCL / RPCS printer drivers (TCP/IP)
• To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, and Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an
Administrators or Power Users group member.

4. Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
27
5. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement.], and then click [Next >].
6. Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
1 You can select several printer drivers.
7. Click [Next >].
8. Select the printer model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.
9. Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system, printer
model, and port.
10. Click [Port], and then click [Add].
11. Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
12. Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
13. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here,
click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.
14. Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port].
15. Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.
16. Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
17. Click [Continue].
Installation starts.
now or later, and then click [Finish].
• Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about
the number of sheets which each user prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
• A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add
Printer]. See "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver".
• p.56 "Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver"
28
Installing the PostScript 3 printer driver (TCP/IP)
• Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has
Administrators permission. 1
The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed
when the following language is selected: Suomi, Magyar, Cestina, Polski, Portugues, Russian,
Catala, Turkce.
4. Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
Step 5 does not apply for Windows Vista users.
5. Click [Next >].
6. Click [Local printer] or [Local printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
If you are using Windows Vista, you do not need to click [Next >].
7. Click [Create a new port:].
8. Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
9. Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a machine not listed
here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the IP address or host name of the machine.
11. Check that the name of the machine whose driver you want to install is selected, and then
click [Next >].
12. Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
13. Specify whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
14. Specify whether or not to print a test page.
If you are using other than Windows Vista, click [Next].
29
15. Click [Finish].

1 • A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the
printer driver Help.
• Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case, launch "Setup.exe" on the
CD-ROM root directory.
Installing the PCL/RPCS printer drivers (IPP)
• To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, and Windows Server 2003/2003

6. Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Select Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
model, and port.
10. Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK].
11. Click [IPP].
30
12. In the [Printer URL] box, enter "http://printer's IP address/printer" as the printer's address.
If the server authentication is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter
"https://printer's IP address/printer" (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
1
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://printer's IP address/ipp" as the printer's address.
13. Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the
one of any existing ports.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port
name.
14. Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For details about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
15. Click [OK].
17. Set a user code, if necessary.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.
Installation starts.
• Setting a user code allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check the number
of sheets each user prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
31
Installing the PostScript 3 printer driver (IPP)
1 Administrators permission.

Catala, Turkce.
5. Click [Next >].
6. Click [Local printer attached to this computer.], and then click [Next >].
If you are using Windows Vista, you do not need to click [Next >].
8. Click [DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
9. Click [IPP].
10. In the [Printer URL] box, enter "http://(machine's IP address or host name)/printer" as the
printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter
"https://(machine's IP address or host name)/printer" (Internet Explorer 5.01, or a higher version
must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter "http://machine's IP address or host name/ipp" as the printer's address.
If the address is "192.168.001.010", you must enter it as "192.168.1.10" to connect to the machine.
32
11. Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name different from the
one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box becomes the IPP port
name.
12. Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
1
If you are using Windows 2000, click [OK] after making necessary settings.
For information about the settings, see DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
13. Click [OK].
14. Check that the name of the printer driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next
>].
15. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
17. Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
If you are using other than Windows Vista, click [Next].
18. Click [Finish].
• A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the
Using the Standard TCP/IP port

This describes how to install the PCL/ RPCS or PostScript 3 printer drivers using the TCP/IP port.
• In an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the Standard TCP/IP Port. Use the SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client port.
Installing the PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers
33

1 The default interface language is English.
7. Click [Next >].
model, and port.
11. Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [OK].
Configure the Standard TCP/IP port settings. See Windows Help if [Standard TCP/IP Port] does not
appear.
12. Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
13. Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name if necessary.
When the device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter Driver C Model".
14. Click [Next >].
15. Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
The installation start dialog box reappears.
17. Configure the default printer as necessary.
34
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

The installer starts. 1
Catala, Turkce.
5. Click [Next >].
6. Click [Local printer] or [Local printer attached to this printer], and then click [Next >].
If you are using Windows Vista, you do not need to click [Next].
8. Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [Next >].
If you are using other than Windows 2000, [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Create a new port].
9. Click [Next >] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
10. Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name if necessary.
When screen for Device selection appears, select "RICOH NetworkPrinter Driver C Model".
11. Click [Next >].
12. Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
click [Next >].
Step 15 does not apply for other than Windows 2000 users.
15. Click [Next >].
If you are using other than Windows Vista, click [Next >].
35
18. Click [Finish].

1 • A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the
Using the LPR port

This describes how to install the PCL/RPCS or PostScript 3 printer drivers using the LPR port.
• If you are using other than Windows 2000 in an IPv6 environment, you cannot use the LPR Port. Use
the DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor port.

36

8. Click [Next >].
9. Double click the printer name to display the printer settings. 1
model, and port.
11. Click [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
If [LPR Port] does not appear, see Windows Help and install it.
12. Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box.
13. Enter "lp" in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then click [OK].
The port is added.
15. Configure the default printer as necessary.

Catala, Turkce.
5. Select [My Computer], and then click [Next >].
If you are using Windows 2000, you can click [Next >] without selecting [My Computer].
37
6. Click [Local printer] or [Local Printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next >].
If you are using other than Windows Vista, click [Next >]
1 8. Click [LPR Port], and then click [Next >].
If you are using other than Windows 2000, [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Create a new port].
9. Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box.
10. Enter "Ip" in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server box], and then click [OK].
click [Next >].
15. Click [Finish].
Using the WSD port

This section explains installation when using the WSD port.
• The WSD port can be used only under Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008.
38
• To install under Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, you must have an account that has
Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
• If the printer is connected using the WSD port, bidirectional communication is not possible. For details
about bidirectional communication, see "Making Option Settings for the Printer".
• You can connect to the printer only if both the printer and computer are on the same network segment,
1
or "Network discovery" is enabled. For details, see Windows Help.

2. On the [Start] menu, click [Network].
The [Network] window appears, and the device search begins automatically.
3. Right-click the printer's icon, and then click [Install].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Continue].
The [Found New Hardware] dialog box appears.
4. Click [Locate and install driver software (Recommended)].
5. Click [Don't search online].
6. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
7. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the computer's CD-ROM drive.
If the [AutoPlay] dialog box appears, click the [close] button and then proceed to step 8.
8. Click [Browse...], and then specify a location for the printer driver.
If the CD-ROM drive letter is D, the printer driver's source files are stored in "D: \DRIVERS\(RPCS,
PCL6, or PCL5C)\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1".
9. Click [Next].
If the [Windows can't verify the publisher of this driver software] message appears, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
10. Click [Close].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "WSD" port is added to the [Printers]
window.

2. Click [Start], and then click [Network].
The [Network] window appears, and the device search begins automatically.
39
3. Using as the NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer

The [Found New Hardware] dialog box appears.
1 4. Click [Locate and install driver software (Recommended)].
The [Found New Hardware] window appears.
5. Click [Don't search online].
6. Click [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
7. Insert the provided CD-ROM into the computer's CD-ROM drive.
If the [AutoPlay] dialog box appears, click the [close] button and then proceed to step 8.
8. Click [Browse...], and then specify a location for the printer driver.
If the CD-ROM drive letter is D, the printer driver's source files are stored in "D:\DRIVERS\PS
\XP_VISTA\(Language)\DISK1".
9. Click [Next].
If the [Windows can't verify the publisher of this driver software] message appears, click [Install this
driver software anyway].
10. Click [Close].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "WSD" port is added to the [Printers]
window.
• The port name that follows "WSD" uses random character strings. It cannot be changed freely.
• To stop the installation, click [Cancel] before the installation is complete. When re-installing the WSD
Port, right-click the printer's icon in the [Network] window, and then click [Uninstall].
• p.59 "Making Option Settings for the Printer"
40
Using as a Windows Network Printer

This describes how to install the PCL, RPCS or PostScript 3 printer driver when using the printer as a Windows
network printer. 1
To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting "Network printer server", and then select the
Windows 2000/XP/Vista, or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 shared printer.
This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000/
XP/Vista, or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 print server. Do not begin the following procedure
before the client is set up and configured correctly.
• To install the printer driver under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, and Windows Server 2003/2003
• If you print with a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, Recovery
Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used from the client.
• If you print under Windows XP/Vista or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 print server,
notification functions of SmartDeviceMonitor may not be used with the client.
Administrators permission.
• If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the DeskTopBinder-
SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
• If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 print server,
DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor notification functions may not be possible for the client.
• You can install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with this printer or download it from the
• If your operating system is Windows XP Pro x64, Windows Vista x64 or Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008 x64, you must download the printer driver from the manufacturer's Web site. Select this
printer and the operating system you are using, and then download it.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Drivers

41
1 You can select several printer drivers.
7. Click [Next >].
8. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer models you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
model, and port.
11. Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
12. Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Browse for Printer]
window.
15. Configure the user code as necessary.
For an RPCS printer driver, a user code can be set after the printer driver installation.
For details about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Restart the computer to complete installation.

Catala, Turkce.
42

5. Click [Next >]. 1
6. Click [Network printer] or [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer].
7. Select [Browse for a printer], and then click [Next >].
If you are using Windows 2000, select the location method from the [Locate Your Printer] screen
before clicking [Next >].
8. Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the [Shared printers]
window.
9. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
10. The printer driver installation starts.
11. Click [Next >].
12. Click [Finish].
• To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run.
• If you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See "Messages Displayed When Installing
the Printer Driver".
43
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote

Printer
1 This describes how to set up the Windows computer used as a NetWare client.
• In an IPv6 environment, NetWare servers cannot be used.
The following explanation assumes NetWare Client is installed on the client computer and the NetWare
server environment is correctly set up. Install all necessary client applications before following this
procedure.
Set up the printer driver while logging on to the NetWare file server.
The following values are used in the example:
• NetWare version: 4.1
• File server name: CAREE
• Queue name: R-QUEUE

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. In that case, launch "Setup.exe" on the
6. Click [Next >].
7. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to use.
model, and port.
44
Using as a NetWare Print Server / Remote Printer

10. Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
11. Double-click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.
The created queue is displayed. 1
12. Select the print queue, and then click [OK].
15. Click [Finish] in the [Select Program] dialog box.
17. After restarting the computer, open the printer properties from the [Printers and Faxes]
window.
Under Windows 2000/Vista or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, launch the [Printers]
window, and then open the printer properties.
18. Click the [NetWare setting] tab.
Under Windows 2000/Vista or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, on the [Printer Settings]
tab, clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check boxes.
Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the printer driver. If you
select the check boxes, the printer may not print correctly.
19. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
• The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using SmartDeviceMonitor or Telnet.
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
• In an IPv6 environment, Netware servers cannot be used.

Follow the procedure below to set up the PostScript 3 printer driver.
1. In the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, open the printer properties.
45
2. Click the [PostScript] tab.

When using Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, click the [Device
Settings] tab, and then proceed to step to clear the check box.
1 3. Click [Advanced].
4. Clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check boxes, and then click
[OK].
Form Feed
Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If
NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not print properly.
Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating system used:
• Under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, clear the [Form feed]
check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Banner Page
Do not use NetWare to configure a banner page.

Follow the procedure below to disable banner pages according to the operating system used:
• Under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, clear the [Enable
banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Printing after Resetting the Printer
Printer to print server connection requires 30 to 40 seconds to resume after the printer is reset. During this
period, jobs may be accepted (depending on NetWare specifications) but not printed.
To print after resetting the printer as a remote printer, check on the print server that the remote printer is
disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to print.
46
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in 1
progress.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.
Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2 - USB
• Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer
connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers] window.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer to install it from the
CD-ROM provided.
1. Check that the power of the printer is off.

2. Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the printer.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver for my device
[recommended]], and then click [Next >].
5. Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next >].
When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
7. Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• RPCS
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\XP_VISTA\(language)\disk1
• PCL5c
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5C\XP_VISTA\(language)\disk1
• PCL6
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\(language)\disk1
47
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\(language)\disk1
8. Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].
1 9. Click [Next >].
10. Click [Finish].
connected to the "USB001" port is added to the [Printers] window.
• To disable Auto Run, press the left Shift key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it
pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
• The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008 - USB
• Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has
connected to the "USB" port is added to the [Printers] window.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer to install it from the
CD-ROM provided.
1. Check that the power of the printer is off.

2. Connect the printer and computer using a USB cable.
Connect the USB cable firmly.
3. Turn on the power of the printer.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
4. In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver for my device
[recommended]], and then click [Next >].
If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
6. Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the best driver in
these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following locations:
• RPCS
48
D:\DRIVERS\RPCS\XP_VISTA\(language)\disk1
• PCL5c
D:\DRIVERS\PCL5C\XP_VISTA\(language)\disk1
• PCL6 1
D:\DRIVERS\PCL6\XP_VISTA\(language)\disk1
• PostScript 3
D:\DRIVERS\PS\XP_VISTA\(language)\disk1
7. Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next >].
9. Click [Finish].
If the installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the "USB001" port is added to the
[Printers and Faxes] window.
• To disable Auto Run, press the left Shift key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it
pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
• The number after "USB" varies depending on the number of printers connected.
Troubleshooting USB
Problem Solutions
The printer is not recognized automatically. Turn off the power of the printer, reconnect the USB
cable, and then turn it on again.
Windows has already configured the USB settings. Open Windows' Device Manager, and then,
under [Universal Serial Bus controllers], remove
any conflicting devices. Conflicting devices have a
[!] or [?] icon by them. Take care not to accidentally
remove required devices. For details, see Windows
Help.
When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows
Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, an erroneous
device is displayed under [USB Controller] in the
[Device Manager] dialog box.
49
Printing with Parallel Connection

This describes how to install the PCL, RPCS or PostScript 3 printer driver when using a parallel port.
1 To use a printer connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when installing the printer driver.
• You can install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with this printer or download it from the
• If your operating system is Windows XP Pro x64, Windows Vista x64, or Windows Server
2003/2003 R2/2008 x64, you must download the printer driver from the manufacturer's Web site.
Select this printer and the operating system you are using, and then download it.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

7. Click [Next >].
8. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model you want to use.
model, and port.
10. Check that [LPT1:] is shown in [Port].
12. Click [Finish].
50
Printing with Parallel Connection
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver 1

Catala, Turkce.
5. Click [Next >].
The following procedure depends on your operation system.
Windows 2000:
1. [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
2. Select [LPT1] at the [Printer Port] dialog box, and then click [Next >].
3. Select whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
4. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next
>].
5. Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Other than Windows 2000:

1. Click [Local printer attached to this computer].
2. Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next >].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
51
3. Select the name of the machine whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next
>].
4. Click [Close] to close the [Printer Port] dialog box.
1 5. Click [Next >].

7. Select whether or not to share the printer, and then click [Next >].
8. Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
52
Printing with Bluetooth Connection

Supported Profiles 1
SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers can be connected at
the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by SPP, one by HCRP.
• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer at the same
time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the connection
between the other devices, cancel the first established connection.
• Conditions for bidirectional communications
• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
BIP
• For BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed in the printer.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.
• User Codes are disabled for BIP.
• You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.
• In this manual, the instruction referred to print using SPP. To print using HCRP or BIP, see the Help
supplied with the Bluetooth adapter you use.
To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.
• To install the printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional/Vista, or Windows Server
2003/2003 R2/2008, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as
an Administrators or Power Users group member.
1. Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

2. Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
3. On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port].
53
4. Check that the message "Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) " appears under Client Ports. (X
indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)
5. Click [Close].
1 6. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

7. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
8. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
10. Under [Port], select the [COMx:] check box. X indicates the COM port number used by
Bluetooth.
11. Click [OK].
Close the [Printers] window.
• System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifications. For details, see
the manuals provided with each product.
• For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems or using it with different
utilities, see the manuals provided with those operating systems or utilities.
• To always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection] check box.
• If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network connection as follows:
1. Select the printer you want to use in the [Printers and Faxes] box.
2. Click [Connect].
• For details, see the manuals provided with the Bluetooth adaptor or computer equipped with
Bluetooth.
Configuring Security Mode Settings
This describes how to configure the security mode settings.
1. Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

2. On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode].
The [Security Mode] dialog box appears.
3. Select the security mode in the [Security Mode:] list.
If you click [High], or [Custom], and specify [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog box, enter the
Bluetooth password. For information about entering the password, see "Printing in the Security Mode".
For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.
For information about each mode, see the manuals provided with the utility.
54
4. Click [OK].
Close the [Security Mode] dialog box.
• For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager Help. For details about 1
the password entry which is required to transmit print jobs, see the following section.
Printing in the Security Mode
This describes how to print in the security mode.
1. Send the print job to the printer in use.

Depending on the computer configuration, the [Connect] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to
establish the network connection.
The [Authentication] dialog box appears.
2. Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK].
As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the printer's serial number. You can find the
serial number on the label on the back of the printer. For example, if the serial number is
00A0-001234, the Bluetooth password is 1234.
3. The print job is sent.
• The Bluetooth password differs for each printer and cannot be changed.
55
Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer

Driver
1 This section describes what to do if a message appears when installing the printer driver.
Message number 58 or 34 indicates that the printer driver cannot be installed using Auto Run. Install the
printer driver using [Add Printer] or [Install Printer].
Message number 58 appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed.
Windows 2000
This section describes the procedure under Windows 2000.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

2. Double-click the Add Printer icon.
3. Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the driver is \DRIVERS\(RPCS, PCL6, PCL5C, or
PS)\XP_VISTA\(language)\DISK1. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
4. Specify a port.
• Available ports vary according to your Windows operating system or the type of interface. For details,
see "Installing the Printer Driver".
Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2
This section describes the procedure under Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003
R2.

2. Click [Add a printer].
4. Specify a port.
56
Messages Displayed When Installing the Printer Driver
1
Windows XP Home Edition
This section describes the procedure under Windows XP Home Edition.

2. Click [Printer and Other Hardware].
3. Click [Printers and Faxes].
4. Click [Add a Printer].
6. Specify a port.
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008
This section describes the procedure under Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008.

2. Click [Hardware and Sound].
3. Click [Printers].
4. Click [Add a printer].
6. Specify a port.
57
1
58
Making Option Settings for the Printer
Making Option Settings for the Printer

Make option settings for the printer using the printer driver when bidirectional communication is disabled.
1
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication
Bidirectional communication allows information about paper size and feed direction settings to be
automatically sent to the printer. You can check printer status from your computer.
• Bidirectional communication is supported by Windows 2000/XP/Vista, and Windows Server
2003/2003 R2/2008.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional communication is enabled under Windows 2000,
the [Change Accessories] tab is unavailable.
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
When connected with parallel cables
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The printer must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The printer must be connected to a computer using the standard parallel cables and parallel
connectors.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer
pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS printer driver.
When connected with a network
• The printer must support bidirectional communication.
• The Standard TCP/IP port must be used.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS printer driver.
• In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:
• The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port and the TCP/IP protocol must be used. When using
the IPP protocol, the IPP port name must include the IP address.
• [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be
selected on the [Ports] tab with the RPCS printer driver.
When connected with USB
• The printer must be connected to the computer's USB port using a USB interface cable (for
Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008).
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
59
• The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional communication and updates the printer status
automatically.
1 • The PCL printer driver supports bidirectional communication. You can update the printer status
manually.
• Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the supplied CD-ROM.
If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled
Set up option settings when bidirectional communication is disabled.
• Under Windows 2000/XP/Vista, and Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, Manage Printers
permission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder. Log on as an

When using Windows 2000, point to [Settings] on the [Start] menu, and then click [Printers]. The
[Printers] window appears.
When using Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008, click [Control Panel] on the [start] menu,
and then click [Printer]. The [Printers] window appears.
When using Windows Vista and Windows 2008, right-click the icon of the printer you want to use,
and then click [Properties].
4. Click the [Change Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Change Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection is enabled. In this
case, no change is necessary for option settings.
If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab.
5. Select options installed from the [Select printer options:] area, and then make the necessary
settings.
6. Select the total amount of the memory in [Total memory:] when the optional SDRAM module
is added.
7. Under [Paper source tray settings:], click the tray to be used, and then select the appropriate
size, position, and type for the tray. Select the [Do not use Auto Tray Select] check box to
exclude the tray from the targets of automatic tray selection.
60
Installing Font Manager
Installing Font Manager
• Under Windows 2000 /XP/Vista, and Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, installing 1
applications by Auto Run requires Administrator privilege. To install a printer driver by Auto Run, log
on using an account that has Administrator privilege.

2. Insert the "Font Manager" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3. Click [Font Manager].
4. Follow the instructions on the display.
61
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or

7.0
1 Under Windows 2000/XP with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy PPD files to the PageMaker folder.
PPD files have the .ppd extension in the folder "DRIVERS PS XP_VISTA (Language) DISK1" on the CD-
ROM.
The "XP_VISTA" folder inside the "PS" folder is for Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2.
Use the folder that is appropriate for the operating system you are currently using.
The third folder "(Language)" may be substituted by an appropriate language name.
Copy the .ppd file to the PageMaker folder.
• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation
The directory is "C: PM6 RSRC PPD4".
The directory is "C: PM65 RSRC USENGLISH PPD4".
The "USENGLISH" may vary depending on your language selection.
The directory is "C: PM7 RSRC USENGLISH PPD4".
The "USENGLISH" may vary depending on your language selection.
• If the driver is not set correctly after copying the ".ppd" file, printing may not be performed properly.
• When using PageMaker, the optional features that can be selected by the printer driver will not be
active. The following procedure describes how to activate the optional printer features.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print Document] dialog box appears.
2. Make the necessary settings in the [Features] box.
62
This chapter explains how to print documents using the printer driver. It also describes the procedure for
configuring PDF Direct Print and other printing functions.
Two Dialog Box Types

2
There are two dialog box types of the [Printer Properties] dialog box.
"Custom Setting" is used as an example in this manual. For details about changing the dialog box types,
see the printer driver Help.
Multi-tab
This dialog box type is designed for users who often change print settings to perform various printing
operations.
Custom Setting
This dialog box type is designed for users who rarely change print settings. This type of dialog box
may vary depending on the installed options.
63
Displaying the Printer Driver Setting Screen

This describes how to launch printer driver's properties.
The following procedure explains how to make printer driver settings using Windows XP as an example.
The procedure may differ depending on the version of the operating system you are using.
2
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
• To change the printer's default settings (including settings for options), log on using an account that
has Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have
Manage Printers permission by default.
• You cannot change the printer default settings for individual users. Settings made in the [Printer
Properties] dialog box are applied to all users.

The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.
When you open the [Printer Properties] dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer
driver, a confirmation message appears. After you click [OK], the [Printer Properties] dialog box
appears.
4. Make the settings you require, and then click [OK].
• Depending on the application, the settings you make here may not apply as the default settings.
Making printer default settings - printing preferences
• The settings in the "Printing Settings" (Document Property) dialog box that can be modified and
retained differ depending on the printer driver, printer icon, and the users registered for each printer
icons.

64
Displaying the Printer Driver Setting Screen
3. On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].

The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
• Depending on the application, the settings you make here may not apply as the default settings.
2
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that
application. The following procedure explains how to make printer settings for a specific application using
Windows XP Wordpad as an example.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

The [Print] dialog box appears.
2. In the [Select Printer] list, select the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Preferences].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
• Procedures for opening the [Printing Preferences] dialog box vary depending on the application. For
details, see the manuals provided with the application.
• Any settings you make using this procedure apply to the current application only.
• General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of an application. Settings
made here are used the defaults when printing from the application.
65
Frequently Used Print Methods

This chapter explains how to use the various printing functions including specifying paper size and color,
duplex printing, combine printing, and watermark/overlay printing.
Each function described in this chapter is configured and registered under "Custom Settings". You can also
change the parameters for each function by modifying "Custom Settings".
2
• For details about Custom Settings, see "Using Custom Settings".
• p.76 "Using Custom Settings"
Standard Printing
This section explains how to print documents using the normal printing function with the printer driver.
• Before printing, make sure that the information on the installed options and loaded paper are correctly
set in [Change Accessories] in the printer driver. For details about opening [Change Accessories],
see "Making printer default settings - the printer properties".
1. Create a document using an appropriate application. On the [File] menu, click [Printing
Preference...].
2. Select [Color] or [Black and White] in the [Color/Black and White:] list.
Documents print faster when [Black and White] is selected instead of [Color].
3. When using paper with a different size from the document's size, select the [Reduce/
Enlarge] check box, and then select one of the following options from the [Reduce/Enlarge]
list:
• To scale the document to the size of the paper used, select [Fit to paper size].
• To scale the size of the printout by a specific percentage, select [Scale].
• To scale the horizontal and vertical proportions of the printout independently, select [Directional
Magnification].
Select the size of the paper used to print in [Printout paper size:].
4. Select the orientation of the document by selecting [Portrait] or [Landscape] in [Original
orientation] area.
5. When printing multiple copies, specify the number of sets in the [Copies] box.
66
6. Select the paper tray to be used and the type of the paper loaded in the specified tray in the
[Paper source tray] and [Paper type] list.
When [Auto Tray Select] is selected in the [Paper source tray] list, the source tray is automatically
selected according to the paper size and type specified.
7. Click [OK].
8. Print the document using the print function in the application.
2
• The types of the paper loaded in the paper trays are indicated on the printer's display. You can check
the selected paper type is loaded in which tray. However, the paper type setting available in the
printing preference dialog box may be different from the type indicated on the printer's display.
• If the paper tray loaded with the specified paper size and type is not available, a warning message
appears on the machine's control panel. If this happens, follow the instruction displayed on the screen
to specify a paper tray and perform force printing, or press the job reset button to cancel printing. For
details, see "If Error Occurs with the Specified Paper Size and Type".
• If [Color] is selected in the [Color/Black and White:] list, you can print in color using all or some of
the 4 available colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. For details about selecting the colors, see
"Printing with selected colors".
• p.64 "Making printer default settings - the printer properties"

• p.106 "If Error Occurs with the Specified Paper Size and Type"
• p.67 "Printing with selected colors"
Printing with selected colors

This section explains how to specify which colors are used to print a document. The 4 colors you can specify
are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
As an example, the following procedure explains how to print using only magenta and black.
Preference...].
2. Click [Print Quality] tab.
3. Check [User settings], and then select the user you want to change.
4. Click [Change User Settings...].
5. Click [Misc.].
6. Uncheck [Cyan] and [Yellow] from [Separate into CMYK, then print in designated color
only:].
7. Click [OK].
67
Printing on both sides of sheets
This section explains how to print on both sides of each page using the printer driver.
2
• When loading paper in the printer paper trays or the paper feed units, load at least 20 sheets. Also,
adjust the side guide so that it lightly touches the paper.
• Curled paper: If the paper is curled, flatten the paper before loading it.
• If you are using thick paper with a smooth surface, paper jams or multiple feeding can occur.
Fan the paper before loading it. If a paper jam or multiple feeding occurs even after you have
fanned the paper, set the paper one sheet at a time
Preference...].
2. When using the existing Custom Setting, click the icon in the [Custom Setting name] box.
If you do not wish to modify the custom settings already registered in the printer driver, change settings
such as paper size and source tray as required, and then proceed to step 10.
3. Click [Add/Change Custom Settings...].
4. Click the [Edit] tab, if it is not already selected.
5. Select the [Duplex/Booklet] check box.
6. Click the desired icon to specify the direction which the pages open to.
If you want to add binding margins, select the [Header/Footer/Adjust image position/Binding
margins] check box, and then click [Details].
7. Specify the margins on the front and back sides, and then click [OK].
8. Change other print settings if necessary, and then click [Save As...].
If you are modifying an existing setting and want to overwrite the previous setting, click the [Save]
button and then proceed to step 10.
9. Specify a name easily recognizable in the [Custom Setting name] box, and then click [OK].
10. Click [OK] to close the printer preference dialog box.
• If the document contains pages with different original sizes, page break may occur.
68
Types of duplex printing

This section explains the binding directions available when using the duplex printing function. When using
the duplex printing function, you can select whether to bind pages on an edge or in the center.
Bind on an edge
• Duplex (Open to Left)
2
BMF006S
• Duplex (Open to Right)
BMF007S
• Duplex (Open to Top)
BMF008S
Bind in the center

• Booklet1 (Open to Left)
69
2
BMF009S
• Booklet1 (Open to Right)
BMF010S
• Booklet1 (Open to Top)
BMF016S
• Booklet2 (Open to Left)
BMF011S
70
• Booklet2 (Open to Right)
BMF012S
• Booklet2 (Open to Top)
BMF017S
• To specify Booklet1 (Open to Top) and Booklet2 (Open to Top), [Landscape] must be selected in the
[Original orientation].
Combining Multiple Pages into Single Page
This section explains how to combine multiple pages onto a single sheet of paper. When using the combine
printing function, multiple pages can be scaled and combined onto a single sheet of paper.
• The combine printing function is not available on a custom size paper. To use the combine printing
function, specify the standard size paper.
Preference...].
71

5. Select the [Layout/Poster] check box, and then select the method of combining pages from
the list.
6. Specify the page order by selecting the desired icon.
7. Change other print settings if necessary, and then click [Save As...]
2 If you are modifying an existing setting and want to overwrite the previous setting, click the [Save]
• If the document contains pages with different original sizes, page break occurs.
• If the application you are using has the equivalent function, disable the function in the application. If
the function is enabled in the application, undesirable result may occur.
• For details about the combine printing such as combining pages with different orientations, see the
Types of combined printing

This section explains the different methods of the combine printing available. You can combine 2, 4, 9, or
16 pages onto a single sheet of paper. The page order can be specified from the following 4 patters.
2 pages per sheet
BMF018S
72
2
BMF023S
BMF024S
4 pages per sheet
BMF019S
BMF020S
73
2
BMF021S
BMF022S
Printing with Watermark/Overlay
This section explains how to print documents with text watermarks using the printer driver.
When the watermark function is enabled, image data or text string can be printed over document pages.
There are two types of watermarks available. With "Image" watermark, a bitmap image (.bmp) is printed
over the pages. "Text" watermark prints text string. You can specify only one kind of watermarks at a time.
Preference...].
5. Select the [Watermarks/Overlay] check box, and then select the type of the watermarks
from the list.
To change the watermarks setting, click [Edit].
6. Change other print settings if necessary, and then click [Save As...]
If you are modifying an existing setting and want to overwrite the previous setting, click the [Save]
74
• Other than the watermarks already registered in the printer driver, you can create and apply your
own watermarks. 2
• For details about creating original watermarks, see the printer driver Help.
Types of watermarks
This section explains the types of watermarks available.
There are several text watermarks already registered in the printer driver. The following watermarks are
available.
• COPY
BMU900S
• URGENT
BMU901S
• CONFIDENTIAL
75
2
BMU902S
• DRAFT
BMU903S
• ORIGINAL
BMU904S
Using Custom Settings
This section explains how to register and use the Custom settings.
Each function explained in this chapter is preconfigured and registered under "Custom Settings" in the [Print
Settings] tab.
You can apply the relevant setting by simply clicking on the custom setting name, and thereby eliminating
the redundant procedure to make the required changes. It also helps to avoid incorrect settings and
misprints.
76
Custom settings except [Normal Print] can be added, modified, and deleted as desired. It can also be
shared and used among different users. By using the registered custom settings, the various printer functions
can be utilized without the user having the expert knowledge of the printer driver.
When using custom settings, [Color] is selected by default. Be sure to change this setting to [Black and
White] if you do not want to print in color.
For details about registering, modifying, and deleting custom settings, see the printer driver Help.
2
77
Advanced Printing
This chapter explains various printing functions available on the printer.
Other than the [Edit] tab in the printing preference dialog box, you can also modify print settings in the
[Setup], [Finishing] and [Misc.] tabs. To change the settings explained in this section, click the following
tabs.
2
Settings that Can Be Changed on Each Tab
This section provides an overview of the [Setup] tab, [Finishing] tab and [Misc.] tab.
[Setup] tab
You can enable/disable the cover and slip sheets function.
• Cover sheets
Using this function, you can insert cover sheet fed from a different tray to that of the main paper,
and print on them.
• Slip Sheets
Using this function, you can insert slip sheets fed from a different tray to that of the main paper,
and print on them.
[Finishing] tab
You can enable/disable the collate function.
• Collate
When printing multiple sets of documents such as handouts for meetings, you can have prints
delivered in batches of ordered sets.
[Misc.] tab
You can change various settings for spool printing and other print options.
• Spool Printing
The print job is transmitted to the machine and temporarily stored when printing.
Printing on Cover Sheet
Using this function, you can insert cover sheet fed from a different tray to that of the main paper, and print
on them.
• To use this function, Collate must be set.

Prints the first page of the document on the sheet for the cover page.
78
Advanced Printing
Print on one side

Prints on one side of the cover sheet only, even when duplex printing is selected.
2
BAC021S
Print on both sides

Prints on both sides of the cover sheet when duplex printing is selected.
• Cover sheet printed on both sides
BAC022S
• Cover sheet printed on one side
BAC026S
Blank
• When printing one side
BAC023S
• When printing both side
79
BMU905S
2
• The cover sheets should be the same size and orientation as the body of the paper.
• If Auto Tray Select is set for the body paper feed tray, body paper will be delivered from a tray that
contains paper set in portrait orientation. Therefore, if the cover paper is set to landscape orientation,
the orientation of the cover and body paper will be different.
• For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.
Inserting Slip Sheets
Inserting a slip sheet between each page

• Print
BAC024S
• Blank
BAC019S
Inserting a slip sheet between OHP transparencies

• Print
80
Advanced Printing
BAC025S
• Blank 2
BAC020S
• Collate cannot be set when using slip sheets.

• When the duplex printing or cover printing is set, you cannot insert slip sheets.
• The slip sheet should be the same size and orientation as the body paper.
• If "Auto Tray Select" has been set as the paper feed tray for the body paper, the paper will be delivered
from a tray containing paper in orientation. Therefore, when the slip sheet has been set to
orientation, the orientation of the output slip sheet and body paper will be different.
• The same paper feed tray cannot be set for the body of the document and slip sheets.
Staple
With the optional Booklet Finisher SR3000 or Finisher SR3030 installed, sets can be stapled individually
when printing multiple sets.
Staple position
The specified staple position varies depending on paper size, type, quantity and feed orientation. The
following table shows staple positions:
81
Staple Position
BMW064S
Staple Capacity (Booklet Finisher SR3000)
Paper Size Staple Capacity
A3 , B4 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" ,

81/2" × 13" , 81/4" × 13" , 8" × 13" , 8K 30
A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2" × 11" , 71/4" ×

1 50
10 /2" , 16K
Staple Capacity (Finisher SR3030)
Paper Size Staple Capacity
A3 , B4 JIS , 12" × 18" , 11" × 17" ,

81/2" × 14" , 81/2" × 13" , 81/4" × 30
13" , 8"×13" , 8K
A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2"×11" , 71/4" ×

50
101/2" , 16K
82
Advanced Printing
Mixed Size
Staple Capacity (Booklet Staple Capacity (Finisher

Mixed Paper Size
Finisher SR3000) SR3030)
A3 and A4 22 30
B4 JIS and B5 JIS 22 30

2
11" × 17" and 81/ 2" ×
22 30
11"
81/2" × 14" , 81/2" ×

22 30
13" , and 81/2" × 11"
• When two-sided printing is selected, adjust the staple position to the binding direction.
• If you are punching at the same time, specify the same side.
Stapling Precautions
• Stapling can be done only with the optional finisher installed.

• Staple printing will be canceled under the following conditions:
• If the number of pages to staple exceeds maximum.
• If a paper size that cannot be stapled is selected.
• If a paper type that cannot be stapled is selected.
• If positions other than those fixed for stapling are specified.
• If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in the duplex mode and the staple position.
• If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in letterhead mode and the staple position.
• When staples have run out and Auto Continue is set (Printing will continue without stapling after
the message has been displayed).
• When only 1 page is printed when staples have run out.
• If paper sizes are mixed when a different paper size is specified during a print job.
• When printing on letterhead, stapling may not be at the specified position.
83
• If you cannot make staple settings even with Finisher installed, options may not be set correctly in the
printer driver. Correct option settings in the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
• When duplex printing is selected, adjust staple positions to the binding orientation.
• Depending on the software you are using, print settings may not be saved and the printed result may
not be as expected.
• When setting Staple in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate option is not selected in the
2 print settings of the application. If a collate option is selected in the application, printing will not be
as intended.
• When using tracing paper, the vertical/horizontal position of the staples is opposite to the vertical/
horizontal position specified in the printer driver settings.
• Also, staples on the front cover sheet come out reversed.
Punch
By installing an optional punch unit to the optional finisher, Booklet Finisher SR3030 or Finisher 3030,
holes can be punched into printed output.
Punch position
The specified punch position varies depending on paper feed and print data orientation. The following
table shows punch positions:
Punch Position
BMW063S
84
Advanced Printing
Holes Type (Booklet Finisher SR3000 and Finisher SR3030)
Type Paper Size
A3 , A4 *1, A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 12" × 18" *2, 11" ×

17" , 81/2" × 14" , 81/2" × 13" , 81/2" × 11" , 81/4" ×
2 holes 1 1 1 1
13" , 8" × 13" , 7 /4" × 10 /2" , 5 /2" × 8 /2" , 8K , 16K
2
A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 12" × 18" *2, 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×
3 holes
11" , 71/4" × 101/2" , 8K , 16K
A3 , A4 , B4 , B5 JIS , 12" × 18" *2, 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×

EU 4 holes
11" , 71/4" × 101/2" , 8K , 16K
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 12" × 18" *2, 11" ×

1 1 1
17" , 8 /2" × 14" , 8 /2 " × 13" , 8 /2" × 11" , 81/4" ×
Northern EU 4 holes
13" , 8" × 13" , 71/4" × 101/2" , 51/2" × 81/2" , 8K , 16K
*1 Punching on A4 is not available when the model is used with Finisher SR3030 .
*2 Punching on 12" × 18" is available only for Finisher SR3030.
• Punch positions will vary slightly from page to page as holes are punched into each sheet individually.
Punching Precautions
Follow these precautions when using the punch function.
• To use this function, an optional punch unit must be installed to the optional Finisher attached to the
printer.
• Punch printing will be canceled under the following conditions:
• When a paper type that cannot be punched is selected.
• When a paper size that cannot be punched is selected.
• If positions other than those fixed for punching are specified.
• If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in duplex mode and the punch position.
• If there are inconsistencies between the orientation in letterhead mode and the punch position.
• When the punch receptacle has become full and Auto Continue is set (Printing will continue
without punching after the message appears).
85
• If there are inconsistencies between the staple position and the punch position, when using with
staple function.
• Punching might not be in the specified position when printing on letterhead paper.
• If you cannot make punch settings even with the optional finisher installed, options may not be set
2 correctly in the printer driver. Correct option settings in the printer driver. For details, see the printer
driver Help.
• When duplex print is selected, adjust the punch position to the binding direction.
• Be sure to set the punch position the same as the staple position when using it with the staple function.
• Be sure to set paper size and orientation in the printer driver when punching.
• Depending on the application, print settings may not be enabled and printed output may not be as
expected.
• When setting Punch in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate option is not selected in the
print settings of the application.
• If a collate option is selected in the application, printing will not be as intended.
• When using tracing paper, the vertical/horizontal position of the punches is opposite to the vertical/
horizontal position specified in the printer driver settings.
Using Collate Function
The Collate function allows you to print while sorting printouts into page-ordered sets, such as when printing
multiple copies of meeting materials.
• Up to 150 pages can be stored using RAM. If the hard disk is installed, up to 1,000 pages can be
sorted.
Output can be assembled as sets in sequential order.
BAS053S
• If Auto Continue occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.

• If forced printing occurs on the first set, Collate will be canceled.
86
Advanced Printing
• When setting Collate in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate option is not selected in
the application's print settings. If a collate option is selected, printing will not be as intended.
• When setting Collate in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate option is not selected in
the print settings of the application.
• For details about printing method, see the printer driver Help.
Spool Printing
2
With Spool Printing, the print data is saved in the hard disk before printing. To use this function, set it from
the menu. See "Remote Maintenance by telnet".
• To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.
• Use the "spoolsw clear job" telnet command to clear a spooled print job. Do not turn off the printer
or computer while a print job is being spooled and the Data In is flashing. Print jobs that are interrupted
in this way remain on the printer's hard disk and will finish printing out when the printer is turned back
on.
• The Spool Printing function is available for data received using diprint, lpr, ipp, ftp, and sftp (TCP/IP
(IPv6)).
• When using diprint, the Spool Printing function cannot be used with bidirectional communication.
• The domain reserved for spool printing is about 1 GB.
• When Spool Printing is on, the size of a single print job cannot exceed 500 MB.
• When receiving jobs from multiple computers, the printer can spool a maximum of ten lpr jobs, and
only one diprint, ipp, ftp, sftp, or smb job. If the printer's spooling capacity is exceeded, newer jobs
cannot be printed. You must wait before sending further jobs.
• Printing the first page with Spool Printing will be slow.

• The computer requires less print processing time when large amounts of data are spooled.
• Stored spool jobs can be viewed or deleted using Web Image Monitor.
• The list of spool jobs cannot be viewed from the printer's control panel.
• For information about the "spoolsw clear job" command on the telnet, see "Remote Maintenance by
telnet".
• p.234 "Remote Maintenance by telnet"
87
Setting Spool Printing

Spool printing settings can be made using telnet or Web Image Monitor.
• Using Web Image Monitor
In [System] on the [Configuration] menu, click [Active] in [Spool Printing].
• Using telnet
2 Enter "spoolsw spool on".
• For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• For details about "spoolsw spool on", see Remote Maintenance by telnet.
Viewing or Deleting spooled jobs using Web Image Monitor

Follow the procedure below to check or delete spooled jobs using Web Image Monitor.
1. Open a Web browser.

2. Enter "http://(printer's address)/" in the address bar to access the printer whose settings
you want to change.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
3. Click [Login].
The window for entering the login user name and password appears.
4. Enter the login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Contact your administrator for information about the settings.
5. In the menu area, click [Job].
A submenu will appear.
6. On the [Printer] menu, click [Spool Printing].
A list of spooled jobs appears.
7. To delete a job, select the check box of the job you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
The selected job is deleted.
8. Click [Logout].
• For details about Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
88
Printing a PDF File Directly

You can send PDF files directly to the printer for printing, without having to open a PDF application.
There are the two methods of printing the PDF files directly, either using the DeskTopBinder Lite, or entering
commands.
2
• This function is possible only when the optional PostScript 3 unit is installed.
• This function is possible for genuine Adobe PDF files only.
• Version 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.6 PDF files are compatible.
• PDF files created using PDF version 1.5 Crypt Filter functions or more than eight DeviceN Color Space
components cannot be printed.
• PDF files created using PDF version 1.6 watermark note functions, or extended optional contents,
cannot be printed.
• PDF version 1.7 (Acrobat 8.0) files created without any functions that are exclusive to PDF version
1.7 can be printed.
• Due to reasons such as insufficient memory, some types of high compression PDF files might not be
printable.
• To print a document that contains transparency function data, the optional SDRAM module or hard
disk must be installed. However, the operation might still fail depending on the data contained in the
document. If this happens, use the printer driver to print the document.
• Paper size errors may occur when printing on custom size paper.
Using DeskTopBinder Lite
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite

Use this procedure to install DeskTopBinder Lite.

2. Insert the "Document Management Utility" CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case, launch "Setup.exe"
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
3. Click [DeskTopBinder Lite].
The [DeskTopBinder Lite] dialog box appears.
89
4. Click [DeskTopBinder Lite], and then click [OK].

5. Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTopBinder Lite.
If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTopBinder Lite, restart the computer
and continue the configuration.
2 DeskTopBinder Lite enhancements

Follow the DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement procedure to print PDF files directly.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and then click [Extended
Features Wizard].
The [Extended Features Wizard] dialog box appears.
2. Click [Start], and then click [Next>] repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] dialog box
appears.
3. In the [Printing Function2] dialog box, click [Add...].
The [PDF Direct Print Properties] dialog box appears.
4. Select the driver for this printer, and then click [OK].
The [PDF Direct Print Properties] dialog box closes.
5. Click [Next>] repeatedly until [Finish] appears.
6. Click [Finish].
Function palette
The Function palette contains buttons for functions that are already configured through DeskTopBinder
Lite enhancement. Using these buttons, you can print Windows files, preview printouts, convert images,
and register scanners for documents without having to open DeskTopBinder Lite. You can also use these
functions simply by dragging a target file to the button corresponding to the required function and dropping
it there.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and then click [Function
Palette].
An icon for the Function palette is added to the task tray displayed at the bottom right of the screen.
2. Right-click the new icon that has been added to the task tray, and then click [Properties].
The [Properties] dialog box appears.
3. Click the [Contents] tab, select the [PDF Direct Print] check box at the center, and then click
[OK].
The [Properties] screen closes and the [PDF Direct Print] icon is added to the palette.
90
PDF direct printing

Follow the procedure below to print PDF files directly.
1. Drag the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon in the palette and drop it
there.
The [Output File List-PDF Direct Print] dialog box appears.
2. Highlight the PDF you want to print, and then click [OK]. 2
The PDF file is printed.
Printing PDF password-protected documents

Follow the procedure below to print password- protected PDF files.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [DeskTopBinder], and then click [Extended
Features Wizard].
The [Extended Features Wizard] dialog box appears.
2. Click [Start], and then click [Next>] repeatedly until the [Printing Function2] dialog box
appears.
3. In the [Printing Function2] dialog box, click [Properties].
4. Select the [Use PDF Password] check box at the bottom right of the dialog box, and then
click [OK].
5. Click [Next>] repeatedly until [Finish] appears.
6. Click [Finish].
The [Extended Features Wizard] dialog box closes.
7. Drag the PDF file you want to print over the PDF Direct Printing icon on the Function Palette
and drop it there.
The [Output File List-PDF Direct Print] dialog box appears.
8. Click on the PDF file you want to print, making it appear highlighted, and then click [OK].
9. In the [PDF password:] box at the bottom right of the dialog box, enter the password for
the PDF file you want to print, and then click [OK].
The password-protected PDF file is printed.
• Before printing a password-protected PDF file, perform one of the followings:

• In the [PDF Direct Print Properties] dialog box, enter the password for the PDF file you want to
print
91
• Specify a password for the PDF file by selecting [Change PDF Password] in the [PDF Menu] on
the printer's control panel.
• If a [PDF Group Password] for the [PDF Menu] has been specified using DeskTopBinder Lite or the
printer's control panel, the same group password must be set on the other also.
PDF Direct Print Properties
2
9
1
2
3 10
11
12
4
13
5
14
15
6
16
7 17
BAC010S
1. Setting name:
Displays the plug-in configuration name (up to 63 single byte characters)
2. Change Icon...
Changes the icon displayed on the tool bar.
3. Printer
Displays a list of RPCS drivers that support PDF direct printing.
4. Duplex
Prints on both sides of sheets.
5. Layout
Prints multiple pages on a single sheet.
6. Punch (not available for this printer)
Punches holes in printed sheets.
7. Staple (not available for this printer)
Staples together printed sheets.
8. Display this dialog box before printing
Appears in PDF direct printing mode if this check box is selected.
9. Orientation:
Specify the original's orientation.
92
10. Number of copies

Specify the number of copies to print.
11. Collate
Sorts printed sheets.
12. Range
Specify which paper to print.
13. Printout paper size:
2
Specify the paper size you want copies to be printed onto.
14. Color/Black and White:
Specify color or black-and-white printing.
15. Resolution:
Specify a print resolution.
16. PDF password:
Enter the password for password-protected PDF files. A password-protected PDF file cannot be printed
unless its password is entered here.
17. Group password:
If a group password is assigned to DeskTopBinder Lite and this printer, enter the group password in this
field. The group password must be entered for printing to start.
Using Commands
You can print PDF files directly, using commands such as "ftp", "sftp", and "lpr".
For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX supplement.
93
Unauthorized Copy Control

You can embed patterns and text under printed text to prevent unauthorized copying of the document.
Unauthorized Copy Control consists of two functions: [Data security for copying] and [Mask type:].
2 • This function is designed to discourage copying of confidential documents; it does not prevent
unauthorized use of information.
Opening the Unauthorized Copy Control Window
1. In the RPCS printer driver, open the [Printing Preference] window.

3. Select the [Unauthorized copy...] check box.
4. Click [Control Settings...].
The Unauthorized Copy Control window appears.
• For details, see the printer driver Help.
Using [Data security for copying]
You can embed a print pattern by setting it in the printer driver.
Setting [Data security for copying] in the printer driver

• Select the [Data security for copying] check box. You can also enter the text in the [Text:] box.
• You cannot select the [Mask type:] check box at the same time.
• To print a document protected by gray overprint, the printer must be set up correctly. Contact
your administrator.
94
Printing a document using [Data security for copying]
BEK229S
1. The pattern and text you have set is printed.

2. The document is copied or stored in copiers / multifunction machines which the optional Copy
Data Security unit is installed.
3. The document is blanked by vertical stripes overprint.
• When printing a document that is set with [Data security for copying], the printer does not require the
optional Copy Data Security unit to be installed. The Copy Data Security unit is required when copying
or storing a document protected by vertical stripes overprint.
• Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.
• Printing at 200 200 dpi is not possible.
• You cannot partially embed a pattern and text in a document.
• To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size at least 50 pt (preferably 70 to 80 pt)
and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
• Use 182 257 mm (71/4 101/2 inches) or larger paper.
• Use ordinary or recycled paper of at least 70% whiteness.
• Duplex printing may interfere with this function as a result of text and patterns being visible through
the paper.
• For details about setting [Data security for copying], see the printer driver Help.
95
Using [Mask type:]
You can embed patterns and texts in a document by setting in the printer driver to prevent unauthorized
copying.
Setting [Mask type:] in the printer driver

• Select a pattern from [Mask type:], and then enter texts in the [Text:] box.
• You can select overprint color from [Black], [Cyan], or [Magenta] in the [Color:] list.
• You can set only [Text:], but [Mask type:] and [Text:] must be set together.
Printing a document using [Mask type:]
BEK228S
1. The pattern and text you have set is printed palely.

2. The document is copied, scanned, or stored in copiers/ multifunction machines.
3. The pattern and text you have set appear clearly.
• Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.

• Printing at 200 200 dpi is not possible.
• You cannot partially embed patterns and texts strings in a document.
96
• To make the embedded pattern clear, set the character size at least 50 pt (preferably 70 to 80 pt)
and character angle to between 30 and 40 degrees.
• Due to the effects of the settings, the results of copying, scanning, and saving documents in the
document server may vary depending on the printer model and setting conditions.
• Printing with background patterns and texts may be slower than normal printing.
• For details about setting [Mask type:], see the printer driver Help.
2
Important Notice
• The supplier does not provide warranty regarding the appearance of print patterns and other copy
protection features. The appearance of the print patterns and the performance of Unauthorized Copy
Control may vary depending on the quality of paper used and the printer model and settings.
• The supplier takes no responsibility for any damages sustained in connection with use of or inability
to make use of Unauthorized Copy Control print patterns.
97
Specifying the Classification Code for a Print Job

When printing in an environment where classification codes are required, a classification code must be
specified for each print job.
2 • The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support the classification codes and it cannot be used to print
under environment which the classification codes are required.
For the RPCS printer driver:
1. Open the printer properties dialog box after creating a document in an application.
2. Click the [Print Settings] or [Setup] tab.
3. Click [Details...].
If you select [Send to Job Binding] in the [Job type:] box, you cannot enter a classification code.
4. Enter the classification code in the [Classification code:] box, and then click [OK].
This code identifies the user. The classification code can contain up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9, "-") characters.
5. Make any other necessary print settings, and then click [OK].
6. A confirmation message appears. Read it, and then click [OK].
8. The print job is sent to the printer.
For the PCL printer driver:
2. Click the [Valid Access] tab.
3. Enter the classification code in the [Classification Code:] box.
• The specified classification code is stored in the printer driver.

• To switch between different classification codes, install the printer driver under different names, and
specify different classification code for each driver.
98

• p.64 "Displaying the Printer Driver Setting Screen"
99
Using the Virtual Printer

This section explains virtual printer functions.
A virtual printer is a pseudo printer that can only be recognized on a network. The virtual printer has various
print options, such as feeding tray selection and duplex printing, which you can set in advance. You can
also use the interrupt printing function. This function suspends the ongoing job and gives priority to a new
2 job. The optional hard disk must be installed to use this function.
If you use the virtual printer under UNIX, Solaris, and other operating systems, various print functions are
possible without having you manually enter usual print commands.
Adding a Virtual Printer
Use this procedure to add a virtual printer.
• Adding a virtual printer requires Administrators privilege. Log on using an account that has
Administrators privilege.
• The following Virtual Printer protocols are available: "TCP/IP (Unspecified, Normal)", "TCP/IP
(DIPRINT)", "TCP/IP (RHPP)", "Apple Talk", and "NetWare".
1. Log on to Web Image Monitor as an administrator.

2. In the menu area, click [Configuration], and then click [Virtual Printer Settings ]in the "Printer"
category.
A list of the available virtual printers appears.
3. Click [Add].
The screen for adding virtual printers appears.
4. In [Virtual Printer Name], enter a name for the new printer, and then select the protocol in
the [Protocol] list.
5. Click [OK].
The virtual printer is added.
• If you select [AppleTalk] or [NetWare] in the [Protocol] list, you cannot specify a virtual printer name.
• You can specify a virtual printer name using up to 47 characters.
• You can add up to 50 virtual printers. After 50 virtual printers have been added, [Add] will no longer
be displayed.
• For details about login user names and passwords, see "Using Web Image Monitor".
100
• p.197 "Using Web Image Monitor"
Changing a Virtual Printer Configuration
Use this procedure to change a virtual printer configuration.

2
• You must have Administrators privilege to change the configuration of a virtual printer. Log on using
an account that has Administrators privilege.

2. In the menu area, click [Configuration], and then click [Virtual Printer Settings] in the "Printer"
category.
A list of the available virtual printers appears.
3. Select the virtual printer whose configuration you want to change, and then click [Change].
If you want to configure this virtual printer for an interrupt printer, select [TCP/IP (Unspecified, Priority)]
in the protocol list.
4. Change the configuration as required.
5. Click [OK].
• For details about virtual printer configuration, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Confirming a Virtual Printer Configuration
Use this procedure to confirm a virtual printer configuration.
1. Start Web Image Monitor.

category.
A list of available virtual printers appears.
3. Select the virtual printer whose configuration details you want to confirm, and then click
[Details].
A configuration list for the selected virtual printer appears.
101
• [Details] is not displayed if you log on to Web Image Monitor as an administrator. To confirm a virtual
printer configuration, click [Change].
2 • p.197 "Using Web Image Monitor"
Deleting a Virtual Printer
Use this procedure to delete a virtual printer.
• You must have Administrators privilege to delete a virtual printer. Log on using an account that has
Administrators privilege.

category.
The list of available virtual printers appears.
3. Select the virtual printer that you want to delete, and then click [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen appears.
4. Click [OK].
• You cannot delete this printer's default virtual printer.

• [Delete] appears only if you have already added a virtual printer.
Printing Using a Virtual Printer
To print directly from a specified virtual printer, assign the virtual printer in the print command. If you use
the interrupt printing function, enter the name of the virtual printer that you configured for interrupt printing.
Before printing for the first time, specify the virtual printer you want to use.
1. Log on to Web Image Monitor in administrator mode.
102
2. In the menu area, click [Configuration], and then click [Basic Settings] in the "Printer"
category.
3. Select [Active] in [Virtual Printer], and then click [OK].
4. Send a command from your computer.
lpr
C:\>lpr -S "printer's IP address" [-PVirtual Printer Name] [-ol] \path name\file name
2
rcp
c:> rcp [-b] \path name\file name [\path name\file name...] printer's host name:["Virtual Printer
Name"]
ftp
ftp> put \path name\ file name Virtual Printer Name
• When the ongoing job meets any of the following conditions, interrupt printing is not possible even if
you print with the virtual printer that is configured for interrupt printing. The printer waits to print a new
job until it finishes printing the current job.
• When the staple function is specified for the ongoing print jog
• When the ongoing print job is performed using the bypass tray
• When a function related to cover or slip paper is specified for the ongoing print job
• If a large amount of memory is used for the ongoing print job or a large number of sheets are being
printed, there may not be enough memory to process an interrupt print job, or only part of the interrupt
job may be printed. If this happens, certain functions for the interrupt job, such as stapling or storing
data onto the printer, can be canceled or sheets can be sorted in a number smaller than the standard
maximum capacity.
103
Memory Capacity and Paper Size

Additional memory apart from the standard memory may be required depending on the paper size and
data type. The following tables provide primary examples of printable paper sizes.
2 One-sided printing (600 × 600 dpi)
Memory Capacity Printable paper sizes
12" × 18", A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 11" × 17",

512 MB (standard) 81/2" × 14", 81/2" × 11", 216 × 432 mm, 297 ×
432 mm
12" × 18", A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 11" × 17",

768 MB (standard and 256 MB) 81/2" × 14", 81/2" × 11", 216 × 432mm, 297 ×
432 mm, 305 × 1260 mm
12" × 18", A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 11" × 17",

1024 MB (standard and 512 MB) 81/2" × 14", 81/2" × 11", 216 × 432mm, 297 ×
432 mm, 305 × 1260 mm
Duplex printing (600 × 600 dpi)
Memory Capacity Printable paper sizes
• 512 MB (standard)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 11" × 17", 81/2" × 14",
• 768 MB (standard and 256 MB)
81/2" × 11"
• 1024 MB (standard and 512 MB)
104
Black and White [Printing] when [Photograph] or [DTP] is Selected for [Document type]
Black and White [Printing] when [Photograph]

or [DTP] is Selected for [Document type]
If you select [Photograph] or [DTP] for [Document type] in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box, black areas
of text and line art might be detected as color images, depending on the application you are using. If this
happens, the document might be printed and counted as a CMYK image. 2
To print and count the document as a Black and White image, use the following procedure to set the color
to black and white in the printer driver.
1. In the printer driver's [Printing Preferences] dialog box, click the [Print Quality] tab.
2. Select the [User settings] check box.
3. In the list box, select a user setting.
4. Click [Change User Settings...].
5. On the [Image Adjustments] tab, select a document type in the [Load document types:] list.
The following document types are selectable:
[Photograph (Quality)], [Photograph (Speed)], [Photograph (High Speed)], [DTP (Quality)], [DTP
(Speed)], and [DTP (High Speed)].
6. In the [Gray reproduction (Text/Line Art):] list, select [K (Black)].
The gray reproduction is set to pure black, and the [Load document types:] list becomes blank.
If you select the [Print as bitmap] check box on the [Misc.] tab, the gray reproduction setting is ignored,
and black areas of text and line art are printed and counted as CMYK images.
7. Click [OK].
• Black areas of text and line art that were produced using colors other than black and grey are printed
out and counted as CMYK images even if they appear as black or grey on the screen.
105
If Error Occurs with the Specified Paper Size and

Type
This section gives instructions for operating the printer when there is no tray for the selected paper size or
type, or when paper loaded in the printer has run out.
2
• The tray cannot be changed if the following functions are set:
• Duplex Print to a tray that does not support duplex printing
• Cover Sheet
• Slip Sheet
• If form feed is selected for a tray with the following settings, you can change the tray by canceling
the settings:
• Duplex Print
• Staple
• If [Auto Continue] is selected, form fed paper is printed after a set interval. For details, see System
Menu.
• p.166 "System Menu"
Printing from a Selected Tray
If the printer does not have a tray for the selected paper size or paper type, or if the selected paper loaded
in the printer has run out, a caution message appears. If this message appears, do the following procedure.
1. When the caution message appears, press [FormFeed].
A confirmation message appears.

106
If Error Occurs with the Specified Paper Size and Type
3. Select the tray for form feed using the [ ] or [ ] key from those that appear on the display
panel, and then press the [OK] key.
2
• If a tray with a smaller paper size is selected, the print job may be cut short, or other problems may
occur.
Canceling a Print Job
Follow this procedure for canceling the print job if the message prompting form feed appears.
1. Press [JobReset].
2. Press [Current].
The confirmation message appears.

To resume printing jobs, press [Resume].
3. Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.
4. Press [No] to return to the previous display.
107
• If the printer is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's
print job.
• Under Windows, If the printer is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent print jobs may
be canceled if the [Job Reset] key is pressed while "Waiting..." is displayed on the control panel. After
the interval set in [I/O Timeout] in [Host Interface] has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print
2 job sent from a different client computer will not be canceled in this case.
• You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed. For this reason, printing may continue
for a few pages after you press the [Job Reset] key.
• A print job containing a large volume of data may take considerable time to stop.
• To stop data printing, see "Canceling a Print Job".
• p.129 "Canceling a Print Job"
108
This chapter explains how to print documents stored in the machine.
Using the Print Job Function

This describes how to print or delete files stored in the printer. There are following types of print files: Sample
Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.
Print files sent from computers can be stored in the hard disk of the printer. Using the Print Job function, you
can print or delete the print files.
3
• To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.
Print Job screen
When the printer is turned on, the following screen appears if an optional hard disk is installed in the printer.
If you press [Prt.Jobs] on the initial screen, a screen prompting to select the type of print job appears.
After selecting a type, you can select print files in the list by pressing:
• [Job List]
Displays the Job List screen.
• [User ID]
Displays the User ID screen.
If you select Sample Print, Locked Print, and Hold Print, the print files saved in the printer are deleted after
printing is completed. If you select Stored Print, the files remain in the printer even after printing is finished.
109
Job List Screen
BEK216S
3 1. The type of print jobs

Displays the type of the print job you select.
2. Page number
Displays the current page number. Each time pressing the [ ] or [ ] key, the screen switches.
3. User ID, Date/Time, and File Name display
• User ID shows the user's ID set by the printer driver.
• Date and Time show the time at which the print job was stored in the printer.
• File name shows the name of the file. However, "****" is shown instead of the file name for a Locked Print
file.
4. [Print]
Prints a selected file.
5. [Change]
Changes or clears the password of a file if a password is set. To change the password of a Locked/Stored Print
job, press [Change], enter the current password, and then enter the new password on the confirmation screen.
To clear the password, press [Change], leave the entering/confirming a new password box blank, and then
press the [OK] key.
You can also set passwords to the Stored Print files that do not currently have passwords.
6. [Delete]
Deletes a selected file.
• When you press [Change] to change or clear a password, you must first enter the existing password.
If the password you entered is incorrect, you cannot change or clear any current passwords.
• You can use [Change] to set or clear passwords only when Stored Print files are stored in the printer.
110
Using the Print Job Function
User ID Screen
BEK217S
1. The type of print jobs 3

Displays the type of the print job you select.
2. Page number
Displays the current page number. Each time pressing the [ ] or [ ] key, the screen switches.
3. User ID
• User ID shows the ID of the user who stored the selected type of files.
• User ID set by the printer driver is shown.
4. [PrintAll]
Prints all files stored by the user whose user ID has been selected.
5. [Job List]
Switches the screen to the [Job List] screen.
Displays the print jobs of the selected user only.
• To cancel selecting a file, press the [JobReset] key.

• The display is not updated if a new file is stored while the list of stored files is displayed. To update
the display, press the [Menu] key to return to the initial screen, and then press [Prt.Jobs] again.
• If a large number of print jobs are stored in the printer, processing may slow temporarily, depending
on which functions are used.
• For details about printing each type of print job, see the followings:
• p.112 "Sample Print"
• p.115 "Locked Print"
• p.118 "Hold Print"
• p.121 "Stored Print"
111
Printing from the Print Job Screen

This section gives instruction about Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print.
Sample Print
Use this function to print only the first set of a multiple-set print job. After you have checked the result,
remaining sets can be printed or canceled using the printer's control panel. This can reduce misprints due
3 to mistakes in content or settings.
• A Sample Print file cannot be stored if:

• the hard disk is not installed in the printer.
• the total number of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print files in the printer is
over 100. (The maximum number varies depending on the volume of data in files.)
• the file contains over 1,000 pages.
• sent or stored files in the printer contain over 9,000 pages in total.
• If a Sample Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the control panel.
• Even after you turn off the printer, stored documents in the printer remain. However, the[ Auto Del.
Temp. Print Jobs] or [Auto Del Stored Print Jobs] settings are applied first.
• If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. By
default, Sample Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected
from the application's Print dialog box, more prints than intended may be produced.
• If the first set of the Sample Print files is not as you expected and you do not want to print remaining
sets, delete the Sample Print file using the display panel. If you print the remaining sets of the Sample
Print file, the job in the printer is deleted automatically.
• Sample Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor, after you select [Sample Print] using
the control panel will appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try
to print or delete those Sample Print files.
• If stored files have similar and long file names, recognizing the file you want to print on the display
panel may be difficult. Print the file you want to print either by checking the user ID or the time the file
is sent, or by changing the file name to something that can be recognized easily.
• For details about the error log on the display panel, see p.195 "Checking the Error Log".
112
• For details about [Auto Del. Temp. Print Jobs] and [Auto Del Stored Print Jobs], see p.154
"Maintenance Menu".
Printing a Sample Print file

The following procedure describes how to print a Sample Print file with the PCL 6/5c, RPCS or PostScript
3 printer driver.
• Applications with their own drivers, such as PageMaker, do not support this function.
3
1. From an application, select a command to print.
The Print dialog box appears.
2. Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. In the [Job type:] box, click [Sample Print].
When printing with the PostScript 3 printer driver, click [Sample Print] in the [Job type:] box on the
[Job Log] tab.
4. Click [Details...], and then enter a user ID in the [User ID:] box.
This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z,
0-9) characters.
5. Execute a command to print.
Make sure to set more than two copies.
The Sample Print job is sent to the printer, and the first set is printed.
6. On the printer's control panel, press [Prt.Jobs].
7. Select [Sample Print Jobs] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job List].
A list of Sample Print files stored in the printer appears.

Depending on the security settings, certain print jobs may not be displayed.
113
You can print files also by pressing [User ID].

8. Select the file you want to print using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Print].
Enter the new number of sets using the scroll keys. You can enter up to 999 sets.
3 Press the [Escape] key to correct any entry mistakes.
9. Press [Print].
The remaining sets are printed.
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
• If the set quantity is changed when [User ID] is pressed in step 7, the changed quantity is applied to
all selected files.
• When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.
• To stop printing after printing has started, press the [Job Reset] key. The file will be deleted.
• For details about [User ID], see p.126 "Printing from the User ID Screen".
Deleting Sample Print files

If you are not satisfied with the sample printout, you can delete the Sample Print file, revise it and print it
again until the settings are suitable.
1. Press [Prt.Jobs].
2. Select [Sample Print Jobs] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job List].
114
A list of Sample Print files stored in the printer appears.

3. Select the file you want to delete using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen will appear. 3

4. Press [Delete].
The selected file is deleted.
Locked Print
Use this function to maintain privacy when printing confidential documents on the printer over a shared
network. Usually, it is possible to print data using the display panel once it is stored in this printer. When
using Locked Print, it is not possible to print unless a password is entered on the printer's display panel.
Your confidential documents will be safe from being viewed by other people.
• A Locked Print file cannot be stored if:

• If a Locked Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the control panel.
• Even after you turn off the printer, stored documents remain. However, the [Auto Del. Temp. Print Jobs]
or [Auto Del Stored Print Jobs] settings are applied first.
• If the application has a collate option, make sure it is not selected before sending a print job. Locked
Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver as default. If a collate option is selected in
the application print dialog box, more sets than intended may be printed.
• After the Locked Print file is printed, the job is automatically deleted.
115
• Locked Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor, after you select [Locked Print] using
to print or delete those Locked Print files.
"Maintenance Menu".
3 Printing a Locked Print file

The following procedure describes how to print a Locked Print file with the PCL 6/5c, RPCS or PostScript
3 printer driver.
1. Configure the Locked Print in the printer driver's properties.

For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the corresponding Help files.
2. Start printing from the application's Print dialog box.
The Locked Print job is sent to the printer.
4. Select [Locked Print Jobs] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job List].
A list of Locked Print files stored in the printer appears.

116
The password screen appears.

6. Enter the password using the [ ], [ ],[ ] or [ ] key, and then press the [OK] key.
3
The print confirmation screen appears.

A confirmation screen will appear if the password is not entered correctly. Press [Clear] to enter the
password again.
If you forget your password, contact your administrator for help.
7. Press [Print].

Deleting Locked Print files
117
1. Select [Locked Print Jobs] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job List].
A list of Locked Print files stored in the printer appears.

3 2. Select the file you want to delete using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Delete].

3. Enter the password using the [ ], [ ],[ ] or [ ] key, and then press the [OK] key.
The delete confirmation screen appears.

password again.
If you forget your password, contact your administrator for help.
4. Press [Delete].
Hold Print
Use this function to temporarily hold a file in the printer, and print it from the computer or the printer's control
panel later.
• A Hold Print file cannot be stored if:
118

• If a Hold Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the control panel.
• Even after you turn off the printer, stored documents in the printer remain. However, the [Auto Del.
3
default, Hold Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected
• Hold Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor, after you select [Hold Print] using the
control panel will appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to
print or delete those Hold Print files.
is sent, or by changing the file name to something that can be recognized easily. If you enter the
document name on the printer driver's [Details...], that name appears on the display panel.
• It is possible, but not required, to set a file name or a password to a Hold Print file.
"Maintenance Menu".
Printing a Hold Print file

The following procedure describes how to print a Hold Print file with the PCL 6/5c or RPCS printer driver.
1. Configure Hold Print in the printer driver's properties.

For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
2. Click [Details...], and then enter a User ID in the [User ID:] box.
You can also set a file name. The file name you set will be displayed on the printer's Job List screen.
119

The Hold Print job is sent to the printer and stored.
3 5. Select [Hold Print Jobs] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job List].
A list of Hold Print files stored in the printer appears.

The confirmation screen appears.

7. Press [Print].
The Hold Print file is printed.

• For details about setting printer drivers, see the printer driver Help. You can also print or delete a Hold
Print file from Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
120
Deleting Hold Print files
2. Select [Hold Print Jobs] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job List].
3
A list of Hold Print files stored in the printer appears.


4. Press [Delete].
Stored Print
Use this function to store a file in the printer, and then print it from the computer or the printer's control panel
later.
Jobs are not deleted after they are printed, so the same job need not be resent in order to print multiple
copies.
• A Stored Print file cannot be stored if:

121
• If a Stored Print file has not been stored properly, check the error log on the control panel.
3 • Even after you turn off the printer, stored documents in the printer remain. However, the [Auto Del.
default, Stored Print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected
• Stored Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor, after you select [Stored Print] using
to print or delete those Stored Print files.
is sent, or by changing the file name to something that can be recognized easily.
• If you enter the document name on the printer driver's [Details...], that name appears on the display
panel.
"Maintenance Menu".
Printing a Stored Print file

The following procedure describes how to print a Stored Print file with the PCL 6/5c or RPCS printer driver.
1. Configure the Stored Print in the printer driver's properties.

You can select two ways for Stored Print:
• [Stored Print]
Stores the file in the printer and print it later using the control panel.
• [Store and Normal Print] (or [Store and Print])
Prints the file at once and also stores the file in the printer.
122
For details about configuring the printer drivers, see the relevant Help files.
2. Click [Details...], and then enter a User ID in the [User ID:] box.
You can also set a password. The same password must be entered when printing or deleting.
You can also set a file name. The file name you set will be displayed on the printer's Job List screen.
The Stored Print job is sent to the printer.
5. Select [Stored Print Jobs] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job List].
A list of Stored Print files stored in the printer appears.


If you set a password in the printer driver, a password confirmation screen appears. Enter the
password.
7. Press [Print].
The Stored Print file is printed.
123
• When multiple files are selected without setting a quantity, one set less than the minimum number of
all settings is applied. If the least number of settings is one set, all selected files will be printed at one
set.
• If the number of set quantity is changed when [User ID] is pressed in step 5, the changed quantity is
applied to all selected files.
• To stop printing after printing has started, press the [Job Reset] key. A Stored Print file is not deleted
even if the [Job Reset] key is pressed.
3 • The Stored Print file that sent to the printer is not deleted unless you delete a file or select [Auto Del
Stored Print Jobs].
• You can set or delete a password after sending files to the printer. Select the file and press [Change]
in the Print Job List screen. To set a password, enter the new password. To delete the password, leave
the password box blank on entering or confirming the new password, and press the [OK] key.
• For details about the [Auto Del Stored Print Jobs], see p.154 "Maintenance Menu".
Deleting stored print files
2. Select [Stored Print Jobs] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job List].

124
The delete confirmation screen will appear.

If you set the password in the printer driver, enter the password to delete.
If you forget your password, contact your administrator for help. 3
4. Press [Delete].
125
Printing from the User ID Screen

This describes how to print the files saved in the printer from the User ID screen.
Printing the Selected Print Job
1. On the initial screen, press [Prt.Jobs].
2. Press [User ID].
A list of user IDs whose files are stored in the printer appears.
3. Select the user ID whose file you want to print using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [Job
List].
The print job list of the selected user ID appears.


5. Press [Print].
The selected file is printed.
126
Printing from the User ID Screen
• If you print a Sample, Locked, or Hold Print file, the print file saved in the printer is deleted after printing
is completed.
3
Printing All Print Jobs
1. On the initial screen, press [Prt.Jobs].
2. Select a type of print jobs you want to print using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press [User
ID].
A list of user IDs whose files are stored in the printer appears.
3. Select the user ID whose file you want to print using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press
[PrintAll].
127
4. Press [Print].
The selected files are printed.
• If you print a Sample, Locked, or Hold Print file, the print file saved in the printer is deleted after printing
is completed.
• You cannot select a print job that is not stored under the selected user ID.
3 • When printing multiple Sample Print files without specifying the number of sets on the confirmation
screen, one set less than the least number of set specified on the computer is applied for every selected
document. If the number of sets specified on the computer is "1", one set each is printed for every
document.
• When printing multiple Stored Print files without specifying the number of sets on the confirmation
screen, the least number of set specified on the computer is applied for every selected document.
• If you select [Locked Print Jobs], enter the correct password. If there are multiple passwords, the printer
prints only files that correspond to the entered password.
• If you select Stored Print files, and some of these require a password, the printer prints files that
correspond to the entered password and files that do not require a password.
128

You can cancel printing from either the printer or a client computer. Since canceling procedures vary
depending on the print job status, check the job status and cancel printing according to the following
procedure.
Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel
1. Press [JobReset]. 3
2. Press [Current].
To resume printing jobs, press [Resume].

3. Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.
Press [No] to return to the previous display.
Windows - Canceling a Print Job from the computer
You can cancel a print job from the computer if transferring print jobs is not completed.
1. Double-click the printer icon on the Windows task tray.

A window appears, showing all print jobs currently queued for printing. Check the current status of
the job you want to cancel.
2. Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
3. On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel].
129
print job.
• If the printer is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent print jobs may be canceled if
[JobReset] is pressed while "Waiting..." is displayed on the control panel. After the interval set in [I/
O Timeout] in Printer Features has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print job sent from a different
client computer will not be canceled in this case.
3 for a few pages after you press [JobReset].
Mac OS - Canceling a Print Job from the computer
1. Double-click the printer icon on the desktop.

A window appears showing all print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the current
status of the job you want to cancel.
Under Mac OS X, start Print Center.
2. Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
3. Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.
print job.
• If the printer is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, sent print jobs may be canceled if
[JobReset] is pressed while "Waiting..." is displayed on the control panel. After the interval set in [I/
O Timeout] in Printer Features has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print job sent from a different
client computer will not be canceled in this case.
for a few pages after you press [JobReset].
130
4. Direct Printing from a Digital Camera
(PictBridge)
This chapter explains how to print photographs directly from a digital camera by using a USB cable and
a camera direct print card.
What is PictBridge?
You can connect a PictBridge-compatible digital camera to this printer using a USB cable. This allows you
to print photographs taken using the digital camera directly by operating the digital camera.
BMV051S
Before you can use this function, the printer requires a camera direct print card.
• Check your digital camera is PictBridge-compatible.

• Up to 999 images can be sent from the digital camera to the printer during one print transaction. If
an attempt is made to send more images, an error message is sent to the camera and printing fails.
• Since printing conditions are specified on the digital camera, specifiable parameters depend on the
particular digital camera. For details, see your digital camera's manual.
131
PictBridge Printing
Follow the procedure below to start PictBridge printing on this printer.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent. If you do, printing will fail.
• The USB host interface board is supplied with a USB cable and a hook onto which you can roll up
and hang the cable.
1. Check the printer and the digital camera are both switched on.
2. Connect a USB cable between the printer and the digital camera.
4 The Data In indicator on the printer blinks for several seconds, and “PctBrdg” is displayed on the
printer. This indicates that the printer has correctly recognized the digital camera.
3. On your digital camera, select the images you want to print, and specify the printing
conditions.
4. The printer receives settings from the digital camera and starts printing.
• Since printing conditions are specified on the digital camera, specifiable parameters depend on the
particular digital camera. For details, see the digital camera's manual.
• Some digital cameras require settings for manual PictBridge operation. For details, see your digital
camera's manual.
• For details about connection instructions, see Hardware Guide.
• To cancel printing, see p.129 "Canceling a Print Job".
132
What Can Be Done on This Printer

This printer can perform the following functions using its PictBridge feature.
The settings available for these functions are as follows:
• Single image printing
• Selected image printing
• All image printing
• Index printing
• Trimming
• Date and file name printing
• Paper size
4
• Image print size
• Multi-Image-Layout
• Printing quality
• Color matching
• Paper type specification
• Form printing
• Camera memo printing
• This printer does not support the following settings:

• DPOF printing
• Margin-less printing
• The setting parameters and their names may vary depending on the digital camera. For details, see
your digital camera's manual.
Index Printing
A3 (297 × 420)
Horizontal images × vertical images (in) Paper orientation
12 × 16
133
A4 (210 × 297)
8 × 12
12 × 8
A5 (148 × 210)
5×8
4 8×5
Letter (81/2"×11")
8 × 10
10 × 8
• Index printouts vary depending on the orientation of the paper placed on the specified size tray.
• Depending on the digital camera, a form feed may be inserted after one set of images belonging to
one type ends.
• The number of images in each size of paper is fixed.
Trimming
Use this function to print only the inside of the trimming area specified on the digital camera.
134
BPD204S
In the above figure, “- - -“ (dashed lines) indicates the trimming area.
Date and File Name Printing

4
Use this function to print the date and/or file name under the image.
BPD205S
In the above figure, "aaaaa" indicates the file name and "bbbbb" indicates the date.
Paper Size
Use this function to print on paper with the size specified on the digital camera.
Paper size name Actual size
Postcard 148 mm × 100 mm
Letter (81/2"×11") 279.4 mm × 216 mm (8 1/2 × 11)
A3 420 mm × 297 mm
A4 297 mm × 210 mm
A5 210 mm × 148 mm
135
Paper size name Actual size
A6 148 mm × 105 mm
B4 257 mm × 364 mm
B5 257 mm × 182 mm
B6 182 mm × 128 mm
• For details about specifying custom sizes, see Hardware Guide.
4
Image Print Size
Use this function to print images with the size specified on the digital camera.
BPD206S
indicates the image size specified on the camera.

You can specify the following image print sizes:
Fixed size
• 3.25" × 2.5"
• 5" × 2.5"
• 6" × 4"
• 7" × 5"
• 10" × 8"
• 254 mm × 178 mm
• 110 mm × 74 mm
• 89 mm × 55 mm
• 148 mm × 100 mm
136
• 8 cm × 6 cm
• 10 cm × 7 cm
• 13 cm × 9 cm
• 15 cm × 10 cm
• 18 cm × 13 cm
• 21 cm × 15 cm
• 24 cm × 18 cm
• An error occurs if the specified size is larger than the actual paper size.
4
Multi-Image-Layout
Use this function to print multiple images on the specified paper.
BPD207S
The number of images that can be printed on one page is as follows:
Paper size Number of images that can be specified
Postcard 2, 4
Letter (81/2"×11") 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32
A3 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32, 36, 49, 64
A4 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32
A5 2, 4, 8, 9, 16
A6 2, 4, 8
B4 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32, 36, 49
137
Paper size Number of images that can be specified
B5 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25
B6 2, 4, 8, 9
The number and arrangement of images that can be specified are as follows:
Vertical images × horizontal

Number of images Paper orientation
images
2 2×1
4 4 2×2
8 4×2
9 3×3
16 4×4
25 5×5
32 8×4
36 6×6
49 7×7
64 8×8
• A form feed may be inserted between images depending on the digital camera in use.
• Printing in the specified way may not be possible depending on the specification for the number of
images to be printed.
Printing Quality
Use this function to print images at the selected printing quality.

If you select [Default] or [Normal], the printer prints in normal quality; if you select [Fine], the printer prints
in the best quality.
138
Color Matching
Use this function to optimize colors when printing images.

If you select [Default] or [OFF], the printer prioritizes gradation for color matching, if you select [ON], the
printer prioritizes saturation.
Paper Type Specification
This function sends the printer's paper type information to the digital camera. The names of paper types
displayed on the digital camera's screen are different to the names displayed on the printer. Use the table
below to match the paper types.
To display a paper type name on the digital camera's screen, use the printer's control panel to set the paper
4
type of the printer correctly.
The paper type detected by the digital camera The paper type of the printer
Default All type of paper
Plain Paper Plain or recycled paper
Fast Photo Paper Glossy paper
Form Printing
Use this function to print images in a predetermined layout format.
BPD208S
Camera Memo Printing
Use this function to print text data together with an image if it is attached to the image.
139
Exiting PictBridge
Follow the procedure below to quit the PictBridge mode.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent to the printer. If you do, printing will fail.
1. Check that "Ready" is displayed on the printer’s control panel.

2. Disconnect the USB cable from the printer.
140
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work
When PictBridge Printing Does Not Work

This section explains likely causes and possible solutions for problems that can occur when PictBridge
printing.
Problem Cause Solution
PictBridge is not available. There is a problem with the USB Use the following procedure to
connection or the PictBridge check the connection and
settings. settings:
1. Disconnect and then
reconnect the USB cable.
2. Check the PictBridge
4
settings are enabled.
3. Disconnect the USB cable,
and then turn off the printer.
Turn the printer back on.
When the printer has fully
booted up, reconnect the
USB cable.
When two or more digital You have connected multiple Connect one digital camera only.
cameras are connected, the digital cameras. Do not connect multiple cameras.
second and subsequent cameras
are not recognized.
Printing is disabled. The number of originals exceeds The maximum specifiable print
the maximum number of pages quantity at a time is 999.
that can be printed at a time. Respecify the quantity to 999 or
less, and then retry printing.
Printing is disabled. There is no paper of the specified There is no paper of the specified
size remaining. size remaining.
If you have to use paper that is
not of the specified size, perform
Form Feed. To cancel printing,
perform Job Cancel.
Printing is disabled. The paper size setting for this tray Select the paper size setting that
cannot be printed on the printer. can be printed on the printer.
141
Other Reference Information

For further details about printing on this printer, see Hardware Guide.
142
5. Making Printer Settings Using the
Control Panel
This chapter explains the menu displayed on the control panel and how to change the printer's settings.
Menu Chart
This section explains how to change the default settings of the printer and provides information about the
parameters included in each menu.
Memory Erase Status
Displays data status inside the memory.
This menu can be selected only when the optional security card is installed.
Paper Input
5
Menu
Paper Size: Bypass Tray
Paper Size: Tray 2
Paper Size: Tray 3
Paper Size: Tray 4
Paper Size: Tray 5
Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Tray 1
Paper Type: Tray 2
Paper Type: Tray 3
Paper Type: Tray 4
Paper Type: Tray 5
Duplex Tray
Auto Tray Select
Tray Priority
143
• Only installed trays appear on the display panel.

Maintenance
Menu
Quality Maintenance
General Settings
Timer Settings
HD Management
5 • [HD Management] appears only when the optional hard disk is installed.
List/Test Print
Menu
Multiple Lists
Config. Page
Error Log
Network Summary
Supply Info List
Menu List
Color Demo Page
PCL Config./Font Page
PS Config./Font Page
PDF Config./Font Page
Hex Dump
Operations Test
144
Menu Chart
System
Menu
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Default Printer Lang.
Energy Saver 1
Energy Saver 2 5
Print Compressed Data
Memory Usage
B&W Page Detect
Spool Printing
RAM Disk
Auto Email Notify
• [Spool Printing] appears only when the optional hard disk is installed.
• [RAM Disk] appears only when the optional hard disk is not installed.
Print Settings
Menu
Machine Modes
PCL Menu
PS Menu
PDF Menu
145
Security Options
Menu
Extended Security
Service Mode Lock
Firmware Version
Network Security Level
Auto Erase Memory Setting
Erase All Memory
Transfer Log Setting
5 Machine Data Encryption
• [Service Mode Lock] may not appear depending on the setting of the printer.
• [Auto Erase Memory Setting] and [Erase All Memory] appear when the optional security card is
installed.
• [Machine Data Encryption] appears only when the optional HDD encryption unit is installed.
Host Interface
Menu
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
Network
Wireless LAN
USB Settings
• [Wireless LAN] appears when the optional wireless LAN interface unit is installed.
Shutdown
Prepares the printer for power off. To prevent damage to the hard disk or memory leading to
malfunction, be sure to shutdown the printer properly before turning off the power switch.
146
Menu Chart
• For details about shutting down the printer, see "Turning off the Power", Hardware Guide.
Language
Menu
English
German
French
Italian
Dutch
Swedish
5
Norwegian
Danish
Spanish
Finnish
Portuguese
Czech
Polish
Hungarian
Russian
147
Memory Erase Status Menu

Displays data status inside the memory.
• The Memory Erase Status menu appears only when the optional security card is installed.
5
BMW028S
The menu screen appears.

2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Memory Erase Status], and then press the [OK] key.
3. The current memory status is displayed.
[Data to erase remaining.] : Data remain inside the memory.
[Currently no data to erase.] : No data remain inside the memory.
[Erasing Data...] : Data are being deleted.
148
Paper Input Menu
Paper Input Menu

This section explains about paper settings on the paper input menu such as paper sizes and types on each
tray.
Paper Input Menu Parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the paper input menu.
Paper Size: Bypass Tray
You can specify the paper size for Bypass Tray.
• : Auto Detect,A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 B4 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , C5 Env. , C6 Env. , DL Env. , 12" × 18" , 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×
14" , 81/2" × 13" , 81/2" × 11" , 81/4" × 13" , 8" × 13" ,
71/4" × 101/2" , 51/2" × 81/2" , 41/8" × 91/2" , 37/8" × 71/2" , Custom Size
5
• : Auto Detect, 12" × 18" , 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" , 81/2" × 13" , 81/2" ×
11" , 81/4" × 13" , 8" × 13" , 71/4" × 101/2" , 51/2" × 81/2" ,
41/8" × 91/2" , 37/8" × 71/2" , A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , B6 JIS
, C5 Env. , C6 Env. , DL Env. , 8K , 16K , Custom Size
• Default:
• : Auto Detect
• : Auto Detect
Paper Size: Tray 2 to 5
You can specify the paper size for Tray 2 to 5.
• : Auto Detect, A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11" × 17" , 81/2" ×
14" , 81/ 1
2" × 13" , 8 /2" × 11" , 81/4" × 13" ,
8" × 13" , 71/4" × 101/2" , Custom Size
• : Auto Detect, 11" × 17" , 81/2" × 14" , 81/2" × 13" , 81/2" × 11" ,
81/ 1 1
4" × 13" , 8" × 13" , 7 /4" × 10 /2" , A3 , A4 , A5 ,
B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 8K , 16K , Custom Size
• Default:
• : Auto Detect
• : Auto Detect
149
Paper Type: Bypass Tray

No Display (Plain Paper), Recycled Paper, Special Paper 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3, Color
Paper, Letterhead, Label Paper, OHP (Transparency), Envelope, Coated Paper: Gloss Print, Coated
Paper, Preprinted Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock, Thin Paper, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick
Paper 2, Thick Paper 3, +Custom1, +Custom2, +Custom3, +Custom4, +Custom5, +Custom6,
+Custom7, +Custom8
• Default : No Display (Plain Paper)

• For details about the types of paper that can be loaded in the Bypass Tray, see Hardware Guide.
• Be sure to set a paper type using the control panel. If you do not set it, the printing result might
not be proper.
Paper Type: Tray 1 to 5
No Display (Plain Paper), Recycled Paper, Special Paper 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3, Color
5 Paper, Letterhead, Label Paper, Coated Paper: Gloss Print, Coated Paper, Preprinted Paper, Bond
Paper, Cardstock, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3, +Custom1, +Custom2,
+Custom3, +Custom4, +Custom5, +Custom6, +Custom7, +Custom8
• Default : No Display (Plain Paper)

• For details about the types of paper that can be loaded in each tray, see Hardware Guide.
• Be sure to set a paper type using the control panel. If you do not set it, the printing result might
not be proper.
Duplex Tray
You can set each tray for duplex printing. Only installed trays appear on the display panel.
• Tray 1 to Tray 5
• On
• Off
• Default: On
• Bypass Tray
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
Auto Tray Select
You can select whether to assign each tray to automatically print the paper size and type set by printer
driver.
150
Paper Input Menu
• Default: On (Tray 1 to 5), Off (Bypass Tray)
• When using custom size paper, if automatic tray selection is enabled, the size selected on the
control panel has priority. If this setting is disabled, the size selected from the printer driver has
priority.
• You can select multiple trays.
• If you need to have a tray locked, you must select the tray using both printer driver and control
panel.
• Bypass Tray
• On
• Off
• Default: Off 5
Tray Priority
You can set a tray to be checked first when automatic tray selection is enabled from the printer driver.
The tray selected here is used when no tray is selected for a print job.
• Default : Tray 1
• It is recommended that you load paper of the size and orientation you use most frequently in the
tray selected in this setting.
• JIS stands for "Japanese Industrial Standard".
Changing the Paper Input Menu
Automatic tray selection

Follow the procedure below to change the automatic tray selection setting.
151
BMW028S

2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Paper Input], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [AutoTray Select], and then press the [OK] key.
5 4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display the tray you want to select, and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [On], and then press the [OK] key.
Wait for one second. The [Auto Tray Select] screen appears.
Tray priority
Follow the procedure below to change the tray priority.
BMW028S

2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Paper Input], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Tray Priority], and then press the [OK] key.
152
Paper Input Menu
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select a tray you want to use, and then press the [OK] key.
Wait for one second. The [Paper Input] screen appears.
153
Maintenance Menu
You can set printing conditions such as density and calibration, and printer management such as deleting
temporary print jobs from the hard disk.
Maintenance Menu Parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the maintenance menu.
Quality Maintenance
Color Registration
You can perform automatic adjustment of color registration.
5 Color Calibration
You can adjust the gradation of bright (highlighted parts) and medium areas (middle parts) for printing.
• Adjust Auto Density
You can print the gradation of auto density.
• Print Sheet 1
You can print gradation correction sheet 1.
• Print Sheet 2
You can print gradation correction sheet 2.
• Reset Setting
You can reset the gradation correction value to default.
• Only the installed trays appear on the display panel.

Registration
You can adjust the starting position of the printing page.
• Print Test Sheet
You can print the registration test sheet.
Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5

• Adjustment
You can select the start position for printing on a page.
154
Maintenance Menu
Horizontal: Tray 3, Horizontal: Tray 4, Horizontal: Tray 5

4 Color Graphic Mode
This mode adjusts levels of toner color overlap. If characters or lines blur, setting priority on text may
make them clearer. Under normal conditions, set priority on photo.
• Text Priority
• Photo Priority
• Default: Photo Priority

Image Area
You can select whether or not to enlarge print image to edges of paper.
• Do not enlarge
5
• Enlarge
• Default: Do not enlarge
General Settings
Plain Paper Setting
You can select the type of plain paper.
• Tray 1
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
• Bypass Tray
155
• Default: Plain Paper 1

Letterhead Setting
You can select the letterhead printing mode.
• Tray 1
Letterhead 1, Letterhead 2, Letterhead 3
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
5 • Tray 5
• Bypass Tray
• Default: Letterhead 1
Coated Paper Setting
You can select the coated paper printing mode.
• Tray 1
Coated Paper 1, Coated Paper 2, Coated Paper 3, Coated Paper 4, Coated Paper 5, Coated
Paper 6, Coated Paper 7
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
• Tray 4
• Tray 5
156
Maintenance Menu
• Bypass Tray
• Default: Coated Paper 1

Replacement Alert
Use this function to specify the timing to notify user when supplies need to be replaced. Settings can
be made separately for photo conductor unit, intermediate transfer unit, or fusing unit.
• Photoconductor Unit
Notify Sooner, Normal, Notify Later
5
• Default: Normal
• Intermediate Transfer Unit
• Default: Normal
• Fusing Unit
• Default: Normal
Supply End Option
You can specify whether or not to continue printing after the photoconductor exceeds its service life.
• Continue Printing
• Stop Printing
• Default: Continue Printing

Display Supply Info
You can select whether or not to display the amount of toner on the initial screen.
• On
• Off
157
• Default: On
Menu Protect
You can select whether or not to protect menu. When you enable this setting, specify protection level.
• Level 1
• Level 2
• Off
• Default: Level 2
• If you would like to lower the protection level, disable this setting or select [Level 1].
• You may not be able to change this setting depending on the setting of the printer.
5 List/Test Print Lock

You can select whether or not to prohibit List/Test printing.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
• You may not be able to change this setting depending on the setting of the printer.
Unit of measure
You can specify the unit for measurement.
• mm
• inch
• Default:
• mm ( )
• inch ( )
Panel Key Sound
You can select whether or not to enable the panel key sound.
• On
• Off
• Default: On
158
Maintenance Menu
Warm-up Beeper
You can select whether or not to sound the beeper when the printer has completed a warm-up process.
• On
• Off
• Default: On
Display Contrast
You can specify the density of the display.
Key Repeat
You can specify whether or not to scroll the display panel when the [ ] or [ ] key is held down. When
you enable this setting, specify the scroll speed. (If repeat time is set to "Long", scroll speed becomes
slow.)
• Do not Repeat 5
• Normal
• Repeat Time: Medium
• Repeat Time: Long
• Default: Normal
Timer Settings
Auto Reset Timer
Specify whether or not to cancel settings made if no operation has been performed for a certain period
of time while changing configuration using the control panel. When set to on, specify how long the
printer is to wait before resetting configuration.
• On
• Off
• Default: On (60 seconds)

Set Date
You can set the date of the printer's internal clock using the [ ] or [ ] key.
Set Time
You can set the time of the printer's internal clock using the [ ] or [ ] key.
159
HD Management
Specify the settings related to deletion of data saved on the hard disk. This menu appears only when the
optional hard disk is installed. A hard disk is pre-installed in the HDD standard model.
Delete All Temporary Jobs
Use this function to delete all temporary documents saved on the hard disk (Sample Print, Locked Print
and Hold Print data) at once.
Delete All Stored Jobs
Use this function to delete all Stored Print data saved on the hard disk at once.
Auto Delete Temporary Jobs
Specify whether or not to automatically delete temporary documents saved on the hard disk (Sample
Print, Locked Print and Hold Print data). When set to on, specify how long the printer is to wait before
deleting the documents.
5 • On
• Off
• Default: Off
• If you enable this setting, specify the timer in hours. (Default: 8 hours)
Auto Delete Stored Jobs
Specify whether or not to automatically delete Stored Print data saved on the hard disk. When set to
on, specify how long the printer is to wait before deleting the documents.
• On
• Off
• Default: On
• If you enable this setting, specify the timer in days. (Default: 3 days)
Changing the Maintenance Menu
This section explains changing the maintenance menu using examples.
Automatic deletion of temporary jobs in the hard disk

Follow the procedure below to set automatic deletion of temporary jobs stored in the hard disk.
160
Maintenance Menu
BMW028S

2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Maintenance], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [HD Management], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Auto Del. Temp. Print Jobs], and then press the [OK] key.
5
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [On], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to set automatic deletion timer in hours between 1 through 200.
Wait for one second. The hard disk management screen appears.
161
List/Test Print Menu

You can print lists showing configurations on printer or the paper printings.
Also, you can check the types and characters of all the printable fonts.
List/Test Print Menu Parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the list/test print menu.
Multiple Lists
You can print the configuration page and error log, network summary and supply list.
Config. Page
You can print the current configuration of the printer.
5 Error Log
You can print an error report.
Network Summary
You can print the network device status.
Supply Info List
You can print the supply status.
Menu List
You can print a menu list showing all available menus.
Color Demo Page
You can print a color demonstration page.
PCL Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PCL font list.
PS Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PostScript font list.
PDF Config./Font Page
You can print the current configuration and installed PDF font list.
Hex Dump
You can print the data sent by the computer using Hex Dump.
Operations Test
Use this to check the printer and its options for operability, including paper feed and output, punching
and stapling. Only settings of installed options are displayed. If a specified function fails, the printer
displays a message and stops printing. If the test is successful, the printer prints black frames.
162
Printing a Configuration Page
Follow the procedure below to print the configuration page.
• The configuration page is printed on A4 or Letter (81/2"×11") size paper, so load them in the same
paper tray.
5
BMW028S

2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [List/Test Print], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Config. Page], and then press the [OK] key.
After the configuration page is printed out, the screen returns to List/Test print menu.
Interpreting the Configuration Page
System Reference
Unit Number
Shows the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer.
Total Counter
Shows the total number of pages printed by the printer to date.
Firmware Version
• Printer
Shows the version number of the printer controller firmware.
• Engine
163
Shows the version number of the printer engine firmware.

• NIB
Shows the version number of the network interface board.
Device Connection
Shows the names of device options installed in the printer.
HDD: Font / Macro Download
Shows the hard disk status
Printer Language
Shows the version number of the printer language.
Attached Equipment
Shows the options attached to the printer.
Paper Input
5 Shows the current Paper Input settings.
• For details, see p.149 "Paper Input Menu".

Maintenance
Shows the current Maintenance settings.
• For details, see p.154 "Maintenance Menu".

System
Shows the current System settings.
• For details, see p.166 "System Menu".

Machine Modes
Shows the current Machine Modes settings.
• For details, see p.171 "Print Settings Menu".

PCL Menu
Shows the current PCL settings.

PS Menu
Shows the current PS settings.
164

PDF Menu
Shows the current PDF settings.

Host Interface
Shows the current Host Interface settings.
When DHCP is active on the network, the IPv4 address, subnet mask and gateway address appear
in parentheses.
• For details, see p.187 "Host Interface Menu".

Interface Information
5
Interface information is displayed.
165
System Menu
The system menu allows you to set the printer's basic functions. Although you can operate the printer using
the default settings, you can also change its settings to better suit your printing needs. Changes made to
settings remain effective after power off.
System Menu Parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the system menu.
Print Error Report
Select whether or not to print an error report when a printer error or memory error occurs.
• Off
5 • On
• Default: Off
Auto Continue
Specify whether or not to continue printing after a system error. When you enable this setting, specify
how long the printer is to display error before resuming print.
• Off
• Immediate
• 1 minute
• 5 minutes
• 10 minutes
• 15 minutes
• Default: Off
• When [Auto Continue] is set to on, and a certain error occurs in the printer while printing, the
job might be cancelled, or printing will not be as intended. When a job is cancelled due to error,
the printer automatically begins the next job in the queue.
Memory Overflow
You can specify whether or not to print a memory overflow error report.
• Do not Print
• Error Information
166
System Menu
• Default: Do not Print

Printer Language
You can specify the printer language.
• Auto
• PCL
• PS
• PDF
• Default: Auto
Sub Paper Size
Specify whether or not to use paper of the alternate size automatically, if paper of the specified size
is not loaded. When this setting is set to off, the printer uses paper of any size loaded in the specified
5
tray.
• Auto
• Off
• Default: Off
Default Printer Lang.
Select the printer language to use when the printer fails to detect the printer language.
• PCL
• PS
• PDF
• Default: PCL
Energy Saver 1
Select whether or not to switch to Energy Saver 1 mode.
• On
• Off
• Default: On
• When set to on, the printer switches to Energy Saver 1 mode after printing is complete. Electric
power consumption is greater than in Energy Saver 2 mode, but the printer returns to Ready
mode in about 10 seconds.
167
Energy Saver 2
In Energy Saver 2 mode, electric power consumption is reduced.
Energy Saver On/Off
Select whether or not to switch to Energy Saver 2 mode.
• On
• Off
• Default: On
• When the printer switches to Energy Saver 2 mode, the Power indicator is unlit, but the
Online indicator remains lit.
Energy Saver Timer
Specify the lead time needed to switch to Energy Saver mode.
5 • 1 minute
• 5 minutes
• 15 minutes
• 20 minutes
• 30 minutes
• 45 minutes
• 60 minutes
• Default: 20 minutes
Print Compressed Data
Specify whether or not to print compressed data.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
Memory Usage
Select memory to be used from Font Priority or Frame Priority.
• Font Priority
• Frame Priority
• Default : Frame Priority
168
System Menu
B&W Page Detect

Specify whether to recognize black-and-white images by page or by document. Black-and-white
recognition function allows the printer to print monochrome images in monochrome mode even if
color printing is specified.
• Per Page
• Per Job
• Default : Per Job

Spool Printing
Specify whether or not to complete spooling before starting to print.
• On
• Off
5
• Default: Off
• Spooling stores a sent print job temporarily in the printer, and then prints it.
• This menu appears only when the optional hard disk is installed.
RAM Disk
If the optional hard disk is not installed for PDF Direct Print, select a value of 2 MB or higher.
• 0MB
• 2MB
• 4MB
• 8MB
• 16MB
• When the amount of SDRAM is small and [RAM Disk] is set to [16MB], printing may not be
possible depending on the print job and duplex printing may be canceled. If this happens,
increase the amount of SDRAM, or set [RAM Disk] to [8MB] or less.
• Default: 4MB
• This menu appears only when the optional hard disk is not installed.
• For details about the optional SDRAM module, see Hardware Guide.
Auto Email Notify
Specify whether or not to send an error message to a preset e-mail address when an error occurs in
the printer.
169
• On
• Off
• After changing the setting, turn off the power of the printer briefly, and then turn it on again.
• Default: On
• For information, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Changing the System Menu
Follow the procedure below to change the settings for Energy Saver Timer.
BMW028S

2. Press [ ] or [ ] key to display [System], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press [ ] or [ ] key to display [Energy Saver 2], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Energy Saver Timer], and then enter the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the lead time needed to switch to Energy Saver mode.
Wait for one second. The Energy Saver 2 screen appears.
170
Print Settings Menu
Print Settings Menu

The system menu allows you to set conditions for printing.
Print Settings Menu Parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the print settings menu.
Machine Modes
Copies
Specify the number of copies to print.
If the number of copies to print is specified by command or the printer driver, this setting is
overridden.
• 1 to 999 5
Page Size
Specify the default paper size.
: A3, A4, A5, A6, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, B6 JIS, C5 Env., C6 Env., DL Env., 12 × 18, 11 ×
17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2,
41/8 × 91/2, 37/8 × 71/2, Custom Size
: 12 × 18, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 71/4
× 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2, 41/8 × 91/2, 37/8 × 71/2, A3, A4, A5, A6, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, B6
JIS, C5 Env., C6 Env., DL Env., 8K, 16K, Custom Size
• Default:
• : A4
• : 81/2 × 11
• The default paper size is used when the paper size is not specified in the print data.
Edge to Edge Print
Select to whether or not to print using the whole area of paper, leaving no edge borders.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
Duplex
Select whether or not to print on both sides of a sheet. When set to on, specify the binding method.
171
• Off
• Long Edge Bind
• Short Edge Bind
• Default: Off
Output Tray
Specify output tray to be used when the output tray is not specified in the print data.
• Standard Tray
• Mailbox Tray 1 to 4
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray
• Auto Output Tray Switching
5
• Default: Standard Tray
• Finisher trays appear only when an optional finisher is attached.
• [Mailbox Tray 1] to 4 appears when the mailbox is attached.
• [Auto Output Tray Switching] appears when the mailbox is attached and the finisher is not.
If you select [Auto Output Tray Switching] and print using the printer driver without
specifying which tray to output to, printing is outputted in the following order: Standard
Tray, Mailbox trays 1 through 4. This method allows a large volume of continuous printing
output.
Job Separation
Select whether to use job separation function when paper is output to an output tray capable of
job separation.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
Rotate by 180 Degrees
Select whether or not to rotate image by 180 degrees when printing.
• On
• Off
• Default : Off
172
Print Settings Menu
Blank Page Print

Select whether or not to print blank pages.
• On
• Off
• Default: On
Letterhead Setting
Specify whether or not to print with the letterhead printing mode.
• Off
Not printing with the letterhead printing mode.
• Auto Detect
Print with the letterhead printing mode when the letterhead printing mode is selected.
• On (Always)
5
Print with the letterhead printing mode regularly.
• Default: Auto Detect

Bypass Tray Priority
When paper size/type setting does not match between the printer driver and the printer, you
can select which setting is used.
• Driver/Command
• Machine Settings
• Default: Driver/Command
Tray Switching
Select whether or not to automatically switch to a suitable tray when the setting of the current
tray does not match the paper size/type specified by the printer driver.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
Collate Settings
Select a collate type.
• Collate
173
• Shift Collate
• Default: Shift Collate

Staple Settings
Select a stapling type.
• Off
• Top Left Slant
• Top Right Slant
• Left 2
• Top 2
• Right 2
• Top Left
5 • Top Right
• Center
• Default: Off
Punch Settings
Select a punch type.
• Off
• Left 2
• Top 2
• Right 2
• Left 3
• Top 3
• Right 3
• Left 4
• Top 4
• Right 4
• Default: Off
Extend Auto Tray Switching
Select whether or not to automatically switch to a suitable tray when the current tray runs out of
paper.
174
Print Settings Menu
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
PCL Menu
You can set conditions when using PCL for printing.
Orientation
Select the page orientation.
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Default: Portrait
Form Lines
5
Specify the number of lines per page between 5 and 128.
• Default:
• : 64
• : 60
• The default paper size is used when the paper size is not specified in the print data.
Font Source
Specify the location of the default font.
• Resident
• RAM
• HDD
• SD
• SD Font Download
• Default: Resident
• When you select [RAM], you can select only fonts downloaded to the printer RAM.
• When you select [HDD], you can select only fonts downloaded to the optional hard disk.
• When you select [SD Font Download], you can select only fonts downloaded to the SD
card.
175
Font Number
Specify the ID of the default font you want to use.
• 0 to 63 (Resident)
• 1 to X (Download; “X” is the number of downloaded fonts)
• Default: 0
Point Size
Specify the point size you want to use for the default font between 4 and 999.75 in 0.25
increments.
• Default: 12.00 points

• This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.
5 Font Pitch
Specify the number of characters per inch you want to use for the default font between 0.44 and
99.99 in 0.01 increments.
• Default: 10.00 pitch

• This setting is effective only for fixed-space fonts.
Symbol Set
You can specify the character set for the default font. Available sets are as follows:
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK, Win L1, Win
L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math-8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont,
Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0
• Default: PC-8
Courier Font
Select the type of courier font.
• Regular
• Dark
• Default: Regular
Ext. A4 Width
Select whether or not to extend the width of the printable area of A4 sheets, by reducing side
margins.
176
Print Settings Menu
• Off
• On
• Default: Off
Append CR to LF
Select whether or not to append a CR code to each LF code to print text data clearly.
• Off
• On
• Default: Off
Resolution
You can specify the print resolution in dots per inch.
• 300dpi
5
• 600dpi Fast
• 600dpi Std.
• 600dpi Hq.
• Default: 600dpi Std.

PS Menu
You can set conditions when using PostScript for printing.
Job Timeout
You can specify how long the printer waits (in seconds) before canceling the current job when
the job is interrupted while being processed.
• Use Driver/Command
• Use Machine Settings
• Default: Use Driver/Command

• If you select Use Machine Settings, enter a value between 0 and 999. (Default: 0)
Wait Timeout
You can specify how long the printer waits (in seconds) before it cancels receiving a job when
the printer cannot detect the end of the job.
• Use Driver/Command
• Use Machine Settings
177
• Default: Use Driver/Command

• If you select Use Machine Settings, enter a value between 0 and 999. (Default: 300)
Data Format
Select the data format from Binary Data or TBCP.
This setting is ineffective when using a parallel or EtherTalk connection.
When using a parallel or USB connection, the print job is canceled if binary data is sent from
the printer driver.
When using an Ethernet connection, the print job is canceled if:
• The printer driver data format is TBCP and the data format selected using the control panel
is Binary Data.
• The printer driver data format is binary and the data format selected using the control panel
5 is TBCP.
• Default: TBCP
Resolution
Select the resolution.
• 600dpi Fast
• 600dpi Std.
• 600dpi Hq.
• 1200dpi
• Default: 600dpi Std.

Color Setting
Specify the RGB setting for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• None
• Fine
• Super Fine
• Default: Super Fine

Color Profile
Specify the color profile for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• Auto
178
Print Settings Menu
• Presentation
• Solid Color
• Photographic
• User Setting
• Default: Auto
Process Color Model
Specify the color model.
• Color
• Black and White
• Default: Color
Orientation Auto Detect
5
Specify auto detection of the print orientation.
• On
• Off
• Default: On
PDF Menu
You can set conditions when using PDF for printing.
Change PDF Password
Specify the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• If you do not set a PDF password, this menu does not appear.
• The password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but must be sent through the network.
For increased security, use this menu on the control panel to set the password directly.
PDF Group Password
Specify a group password specified using DeskTopBinder Lite.
• If you do not set a PDF group password, this menu does not appear.
• When you use a group password, the optional data protection unit must be installed.
• The password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but must be sent through the network.
For increased security, use this menu on the control panel to set the password directly.
179
• Default: no password set

Resolution
Specify the resolution for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• 600dpi Fast
• 600dpi Standard
• 600dpi High Quality
• 1200dpi
• Default: 600dpi (Standard)

Color Setting
Specify the RGB setting for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• None
5 • Fine
• Super Fine
• Default: Super Fine

Color Profile
Specify the color profile for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• Auto
• Presentation
• Solid Color
• Photographic
• User Setting
• Default: Auto
Process Color Model
Specify the color model.
• Color
• Black and White
• Default: Color
Orientation Auto Detect
Specify auto detection of the print orientation.
180
Print Settings Menu
• On
• Off
• Default: On
Changing the Print Settings Menu
Follow the procedure below to change Bypass Tray Priority.
BMW028S

2. Press [ ] or [ ] key to display [Print Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press [ ] or [ ] key to display [Machine Modes], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Bypass Tray Priority], and then enter the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired setting item, and then press the [OK] key.
Wait for one second. The [Machine Modes] screen appears.
181
Security Options Menu

The system menu allows you to set conditions for printing.
Security Options Menu Parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the security options menu.
Extended Security
Depending on the setting of the printer, some of the settings listed below may not appear.
Driver Encryption Key
Specify the driver encryption key.
Encrypt Address Book
5 Select whether or not to encrypt the printer's address book data.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
Restrict User Info.Display
Select whether or not to display user information as “********” when checking job information
without being authenticated through user authentication.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
Enhance File Protection
Select whether or not to automatically lock password-protected print files if an invalid password
is entered ten times. When a file is locked, you cannot select them even if the correct password
is entered.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
182
Settings by SNMPv1 and v2

Select whether or not to prohibit changes to the printer settings through access using SNMPv1,
v2 protocol.
• Prohibit
• Do not Prohibit
• Default: Do not Prohibit

Simple Encryption
Select whether or not to use apply simple encryption (restrict usage) when enhanced encryption
cannot be used.
• Restrict
• Do not Restrict
5
• Default: Do not Restrict
Authenticate Current Job
Select whether or not authentication is required for operations such as canceling jobs. If set to
[Login Privilege], only authorized users or your administrator can operate the printer. If set to
[Access Privilege], users who sent a print job or your administrator can operate the printer.
• Login Privilege
• Access Privilege
• Off
• Default: Off
Password Policy
Specify the format of passwords: types of characters to be used and minimum length.
Valid characters for passwords are upper-case letters, lower-case letters, decimal numbers, and
symbols such as #. If complexity is set to [Level 1], passwords must use two types of these
characters; if set to [Level 2], three types.
• Complexity Setting
• Default: Do not Restrict

• Minimum Character No.
Between 0 to 32
183
• Default: 0
• If set to 0, minimum length is not specified.
@Remote Service
Select whether or not to prohibit @Remote Service.
• Prohibit
• Do not Prohibit

• If you would like to set to Prohibit, contact your service representative.
Update Firmware
5 Select whether or not to prohibit Update Firmware.

• Prohibit
• Do not Prohibit

Change Firmware Structure
Select whether or not to prohibit Change Firmware Structure.
• Prohibit
• Do not Prohibit

Service Mode Lock
Select whether or not to prohibit entering service mode.
• On
• Off
• Default: Off
• This setting may not appear depending on the setting of the printer.
Firmware Version
Display the firmware version of the printer.
184
Network Security Level

Specify the network security level.
• Level 0
• Level 1
• Level 2
• Default: Level 0
Auto Erase Memory Setting
Select whether or not to automatically delete memory. When set to on, specify the overwrite times.
• On
Number of Erase: Between 1 to 3
• Off
5
• Default: Off
• This setting appears only when the optional security card is installed.
Erase All Memory
Select to delete all data inside the memory. When deleting memory, specify the overwrite times.
• EraseNo.
Between 1 to 3
Transfer Log Setting
You can select whether or not to send log information to the log collection server.
• On (Only available from the log collection server.)
• Off
• Default: Off
Machine Data Encryption
Encrypt data stored on the hard disk. Once you encrypt the data, the following menus appear on the
control panel display.
• Update Encryption Key
Update the encryption key.
• Cancel Encryption
185
Cancel the encryption settings.

• Print Encryption Key
Print the encryption key.
• This setting appears only when the optional HDD encryption unit is installed.
Changing the Security Options Menu
Follow the procedure below to erase data inside memory.
BMW028S

2. Press [ ] or [ ] key to display [Security Options], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press [ ] or [ ] key to display [Extended Security], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [Erase All Memory], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [On], and then press [EraseNo.].
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to enter overwrite times, and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select [On], and then press the [OK] key.
Wait for one second. The [Security Options] menu appears.
186
Host Interface Menu
Host Interface Menu

You can set configurations about network connections and communication when using parallel connection
between the printer and the computer. The changed configuration holds even if the printer is turned off.
Host Interface Menu Parameters
This section explains parameters that can be set on the host interface menu.
I/O Buffer
Select the size of I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting.
• 128 KB
• 256 KB
5
• Default: 128 KB
I/O Timeout
Specify how many seconds the printer should wait before ending a print job. If printing operation is
frequently interrupted by data from other ports, you can increase the timeout period.
• 10 seconds
• 15 seconds
• 20 seconds
• 25 seconds
• 60 seconds
• Default: 15 seconds
Network
You can make network-related settings.
Machine IPv4 Address
Select whether to set the IPv4 address automatically or manually.
• Auto-Obtain (DHCP)/Specify (Default: Auto-Obtain (DHCP))
When DHCP is set to on, the IPv4 address, subnet mask address, and gateway address
cannot be changed. To change them, set DHCP to off. Contact your administrator for
information about the network configuration.
• IP Add.
Manually specify the IPv4 address.
187
• Default: 11.22. 33.44

• Subnet M
Manually specify the subnet mask.
• Default: 0.0.0.0
• Gateway
Manually specify the gateway address.
• Default: 0.0.0.0
IPv6 Stateless Setting
5 Select whether to enable or disable IPv6.

• Active
• Inactive
• Default: Active
IPsec
This is a security function. For details, contact your administrator.
• Active
• Inactive
• Default: Inactive
NW Frame Type
Specify the frame type for NetWare.
• Auto Select
• Ethernet II
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet SNAP
• Default: Auto Select
188
Host Interface Menu
Effective Protocol
Specify the effective protocol.
• IPv4
Active, Inactive
• Default: Active
• IPv6
Active, Inactive
• NetWare
Active, Inactive
5
• SMB
Active, Inactive
• Default: Active
• AppleTalk
Active, Inactive
Ethernet Speed
Specify the network speed to operate the printer.
• Auto Select
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• Default: Auto Select
189
IEEE802.1X Auth.(Ethernet)
Specify IEEE 802.1X Ethernet authentication.
• Active
• Inactive
• For details about IEEE 802.1X authentication, see "Configuration", Hardware Guide.
Restr.IEEE802.1X Auth.Def.
Restore the default IEEE 802.1X setting.
LAN Type
Select Ethernet or Wireless LAN.
• Ethernet
5 • Wireless LAN
• Default: Ethernet
• This menu appears only when the optional wireless LAN interface unit is installed.
Parallel Interface
Specify parallel interface settings. This menu appears when the IEEE 1284 interface board is installed.
Parallel Timing
Specify the parallel interface timing.
• ACK inside
• ACK outside
• STB down
• Default: ACK outside

Parallel Communication Speed
Specify whether or not to use DMA transfer for receiving data.
• High Speed
• Standard
• Default: High Speed

Selection Signal Status
Specify the selection signal level of the parallel interface.
190
Host Interface Menu
• High
• Low
• Default: High
Input Prime
You usually do not need to change this setting.
• Active
• Inactive
Bidirectional Communication
Specify whether to enable or disable bidirectional communication.
• On
5
• Off
• Default: On
Wireless LAN
Configure settings for wireless LAN. This menu appears only when the optional wireless LAN interface
unit is installed.
Communication Mode
Specify the transmission mode for wireless LAN.
• 802.11 Ad-hoc Mode
• Infrastructure Mode
• Default: Infrastructure Mode

SSID Setting
Specify an SSID in infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc Mode.
• SSID
• Default: blank (ASSID)

• Select [?] to enter [/] for the SSID. Also, [¥] appears when printing the configuration page,
read it as [/].
• Characters used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).
191
• An SSID is set automatically to the nearest access point if no SSID has been set.
• If no SSID has been set for Ad-hoc Mode, an SSID is set automatically and the same SSID
is used for Ad-hoc Mode and infrastructure mode.
• If blank is specified in SSID for Ad-hoc Mode, “ASSID” appears.
• An SSID can also be set using Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor
Help.
Ad-hoc Channel
Select channels: 1-14, 36,40,44,48 ( )/1-11, 36,40,44,48 ( )
• Default: 11
Security Method
Select whether to enable encryption and specify the security type when the encryption is enabled.
5 • Off
• WEP
Change (HEX), Change (ASCII)
• WPA
Encryption Method (TKIP, CCMP(AES)), Authentication Method (WPA-PSK, WPA),
(WPA2-PSK), (WPA2)
• Default: Off
• WPA appears only when the optional wireless LAN interface unit is installed.
Wireless LAN Signal
You can check the signal strength when using wireless LAN.
Restore Defaults
Reset the wireless LAN to default.
USB Settings
Select speed for USB interface.
USB Speed
• Auto
• Full Speed
• Default: Auto
Fixed USB Port
• Level 1
192
Host Interface Menu
• Level 2
• Off
• Default: Off
Changing the Host Interface Menu
Follow the procedure below to change the I/O Timeout setting.
BMW028S

2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Host Interface], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [I/O Timeout], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the lead time needed to end a printing operation, and then
press the [OK] key.
Wait for one second. The [Host Interface] menu appears.
193
Language Menu
You can set a language to be displayed on the menu.
Language Menu Parameters
You can select the language you use. Available languages are as follows:
English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Spanish, Finnish, Portuguese,
Czech, Polish, Hungarian, Russian.
• Default: English
5 Changing the Language Menu
Follow the procedure below to change the interface language.
BMW028S

2. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display [Language], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the language, and then press the [OK] key.
Wait for one second. The [Language] menu screen appears.
194
Options Menu
Options Menu
Using the options menu, you can configure settings related to form feeding and error logs. This section
provides a list of the configurable settings and explains how to check error logs.
Options Menu Parameters
Form feed
Outputs data that are unprintable, due to errors such as the absence of a line-feed code.
Error log
If a document cannot be printed due to errors or other reasons, an error log is created. You can check
the error log using the control panel.
• All
• Sample Print Jobs
5
• Locked Print Jobs
• Hold Print Jobs
• Stored Print Jobs
Checking the Error Log
If files could not be stored due to printing errors, identify the cause of the errors by checking the error log
on the control panel.
• The most recent 30 errors are stored in the error log. If a new error is added when there are 30 errors
already stored, the oldest error is deleted. However, if the oldest error belongs to one of the following
print jobs, it is not deleted. The error is stored separately until the number of those errors reaches 30.
You can check any of these print jobs for error log information.
• Sample Print Jobs
• Locked Print Jobs
• Hold Print Jobs
• Stored Print Jobs
• If the main power switch is turned off, the log is deleted.
195
1. Press [Option].
2. Select [Error Log] using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press the [OK] key.
3. Select a type of print jobs using the [ ] or [ ] key, and then press the [OK] key.
5 If you select [All], all error logs appears.
4. Select the error log you want to check using the [ ] or [ ] key.
Press the [Menu] key until the initial screen appears after checking the log.
• To print files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files have been printed or deleted.
196
6. Monitoring and Configuring the
Printer
This chapter explains how to use Web Image Monitor and other applications to monitor the printer or
change its settings.
Using Web Image Monitor

Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the printer status and change settings.
Introduction to Web Image Monitor
Available operations
The following operations can be remotely performed using Web Image Monitor from a client
computer.
• Displaying printer status or settings 6
• Checking the print job status or history
• Interrupting currently printing jobs
• Resetting the printer
• Managing the Address Book
• Making printer settings
• Making network protocol settings
• Making security settings
Configuring the printer
To perform the operations from Web Image Monitor, TCP/IP is required. After the printer is configured
to use TCP/IP, operations from Web Image Monitor become available.
Recommended Web browser
• Windows:
Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 or higher
Firefox 1.0 or higher
• Mac OS:
Firefox 1.0 or higher
Safari 1.0, 1.2, 2.0 (412.2) or higher
Web Image Monitor supports screen reader software. We recommend JAWS 7.0 or a later version.
197
• Safari cannot be used on Mac OS X 10.4.1.

• Display and operation problems can occur if you do not enable JavaScript and cookies, or if you are
using a non-recommended Web Browser.
• If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact your administrator for
information about the settings.
• If you click your browser's back button but the previous page does not appear, click the browser's
refresh button and try again.
• Printer information is not automatically updated. To perform an update, click [Refresh] in the display
area.
• We recommend using Web Image Monitor in the same network.
• You cannot access to the printer from outside the firewall.
• When using the printer under DHCP, the IP address may be automatically changed by the DHCP
server settings. Enable DDNS setting on the printer, and then connect using the printer's host name.
Alternatively, set a static IP address to the DHCP server.
6 • If the HTTP port is disabled, connection to the printer using the printer's URL cannot be established.
SSL setting must be enabled on this printer. For details, contact your administrator.
• When using the SSL encryption protocol, enter “https://( printer's IP address or host name)/”.
• Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the most recent available version. We
recommend Internet Explorer 6.0 or later.
• When you are using Firefox, fonts and colors may be different, or tables may be out of shape.
• When using a host name under Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 or Windows Vista with IPv6
protocol, perform host name resolution using an external DNS server. The host file cannot be used.
• To use JAWS 7.0 under Web Image Monitor, you must be running Windows OS and Microsoft
Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, or a later version.
Displaying Top Page
This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.
• When entering an IPv4 address, do not begin segments with zeros. For example: If the address is
“192.168.001.010”, you must enter it as “192.168.1.10”.

2. Enter “http://( printer's IP address or host name)/” in your Web browser's URL bar.
If the printer's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it.
198
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server
authentication is issued, enter “https://( printer's IP address or host name)/”.
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:
BMW038S
6
1. Menu area
If you select menu, its content will be shown on the work area, or the sub area.
2. Tab area
Details about each menu appear.
3. Header area
The dialog box for switching to the user mode and administrator mode appears, and each mode's menu will be
displayed.
The link to help and dialog box for keyword search appears.
4. Help
Use Help to view or download Help file contents.
5. Display area
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.
Printer information in the display area is not automatically updated. Click [Refresh] at the upper right in the display
area to update the printer information. Click the Web browser's [Refresh] button to refresh the entire browser
screen.
• When using a host name under Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 or Windows Vista with IPv6
protocol, perform host name resolution using an external DNS server. The host file cannot be used.
199
When User Authentication is Set
Login (using Web Image Monitor)

Follow the procedure below to log on when user authentication is set.
1. Click [Login].
2. Enter a login user name and password, and then click [Login].
• For user code authentication, enter a user code in [Login User Name], and then click [Login].
• The procedure may differ depending on the Web browser used.
Log off (using Web Image Monitor)
6 Click [Logout] to log off.
• When you log on and made the setting, always click [Logout].
About Menu and Mode
There are two modes available with Web Image Monitor: guest mode and administrator mode.
Displayed Items may differ depending on the printer type.
Guest mode
In the guest mode, printer status, settings, and print job status can be viewed, but the printer settings
cannot be changed.
200
BMW039S
1. Home
The [Status], [Supplies], [Device Info], and [Counter] tab are displayed. Details of the tab menu are displayed
on the work area.
2. Printer: Print Jobs
6
Allows you to display list of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print jobs.
3. Job
Display all print files.
4. Configuration
Display current printer and network settings.
Administrator mode
In the administrator mode, you can configure various printer settings.
BMW040S
1. Home
The [Status], [Supplies], [Device Info], and [Counter] tab are displayed. Details of the tab menu are displayed
on the work area.
201
2. Printer: Print Jobs

Allows you to display list of Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print, and Stored Print jobs.
3. Job
Display all print files.
4. Address Book
User information can be registered, displayed, changed, and deleted.
5. Configuration
Make system settings for the printer, interface settings, and security.
6. Reset Device
Click to reset the printer. If a print job is being processed, the printer will be reset after the print job is completed.
This button is located on Top Page.
7. Reset Printer Job
Click to reset current print jobs and print jobs in queue. This button is located on Top Page.
Access in the Administrator Mode

6
Follow the procedure below to access Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.
1. On Top Page, click [Login].

2. Enter your login user name and password, and then click [Login].
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help
When using Help for the first time, clicking the icon marked “? ” ( ) makes the following screen appear,
in which you can view Help in two different ways, as shown below:
Viewing Help on our Web site
Downloading Help to your computer.
Downloading and checking Help
You can download Help to your computer. As the Help URL, you can specify the path to the local file
to view the Help without connecting to the Internet.
• By clicking “?” ( ) in the header area, the contents of Help appear.

• By clicking “?” ( ), the Help icon in the display area, Help for the setting items in the display
area appears.
202
Downloading Help
1. In the [OS] list, select the operating system.

2. In the [Language] list, select the language.
3. Click [Download].
4. Download Help by following the instructions on the screen.
5. Store the downloaded compressed file in a given location, and then decompress the file.
To create a link for the Help button ( ), save the downloaded Help files on a Web server.
Linking the URL of the downloaded Help

You can link the URL of the help file on a Web server to the “?” button.
1. Log on to Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.

3. Click [Webpage].
4. In the [Set Help URL Target] box, enter the URL of the help file. 6
If you saved the file to a Web server, and the URL of the index file is “http:// a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/
index.html”, enter “http://a.b.c.d/HELP/”.
5. Click [OK].
• If you save the Help files on your hard disk, you must access them directly - you cannot link to them
using the Help button ( ).
203
Registering Classification Codes

This section explains classification codes.
If you register classification codes, the printer logs the number of prints made under each code.
You can register classification codes to individual users and specified purposes, enabling you to monitor
printer usage by each.
For example, you can manage accounts according to individual clients or account titles.
Classification Code - Based Process (example)
BJF013S
1. Divisions, sections, departments, project teams, users, etc., to be managed.

2. The appropriate classification code for the print job is entered.
For details, see "Specifying Classification Code for Print Job".
3. The job is printed.
When printing in an environment where classification codes are required, print jobs that do not have a
classification code cannot be printed.
For details, see "Configuring Classification Codes".
4. Classification codes are collected and managed by an external log collection system.
204
Configuring Classification Codes
Use Web Image Monitor to specify whether or not to apply classification code requirement to print jobs.
• The configuration page can be printed at any time.

• The default setting for classification code requirement is "Optional".

2. Click [Login].
A dialog box for entering the login user name and login password appears.
4. Click [Configuration] in the left area, and then click [Logs].
5. Check that [Required] or [Optional] is selected for [Classification Code] in the [Common
Settings for All Logs] column.
If "Required" is selected for the classification code requirement setting in Web Image Monitor, any 6
print job that without a classification code specified will not be printed.
6. Click [OK].
7. Click [Logout].
When printing in an environment where classification codes are required, a classification code must be
specified for each print job.
• The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support the classification codes and it cannot be used to print
under environment which the classification codes are required.
For the RPCS printer driver:
2. Click the [Print Settings] or [Setup] tab.
3. Select Job type in [Job type:] box.
4. Click [Details...].
If you select [Send to Job Binding] in the [Job type:] box, you cannot enter a classification code.
205
5. Enter the classification code in the [Classification code:] box, and then click [OK].
For the PCL printer driver:
2. Click the [Valid Access] tab.
3. Enter the classification code in the [Classification Code:] box.
6 5. A confirmation message appears. Read it, and then click [OK].
• The specified classification code is stored in the printer driver.

• To switch between different classification codes, install the printer driver under different names, and
specify different classification code for each driver.
• For details about how to view the log collected using Classification Code, see the manual for the
external log collection system.
Address Book Backup and Restore - Web Image Monitor
Using Web Image Monitor, you can save or restore the printer’s address book data.
Backing Up Address Book Data

Follow the procedure below to save a copy of the printer’s address book data.
206

For details about logging in, see “Monitoring and Configuring the Printer”.
2. Click [Address Book].
3. Click [Maintenance].
4. Enter the encryption key and click [Backup].
Enter the encryption key that was set when the address book was encrypted. For details, contact your
administrator.
Restoring Address Book Data

Follow the procedure below to restore previously saved address book data to the printer.

For details about logging in, see “Monitoring and Configuring the Printer”.
2. Click [Address Book].
6
3. Click [Maintenance].
4. Click [Restore].
5. Select the file you want to restore.
The address data currently on the printer will be overwritten by the backed-up data. Also, user counters
will be reset.
207
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can monitor the network printers. Also, you can change the
configuration of the network interface board using TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.
• IPv6 cannot be used on this function.
Introduction to SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Protocol stack provided with operating system

• Windows 2000
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetWare
6 Novell Client for Windows 2000/XP

• Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
• Windows XP
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Novell Client for Windows 2000/XP
• Windows Vista
TCP/IP
Novell Client for Windows 2000/XP/Vista
• Windows Server 2008
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Available operations
The following functions are available:
• Printer Information function
• Display the network settings and detailed information of the printer.
• Display the number of pages printed under each user code.
• Display the status of print jobs sent from computers.
208
• Change the printer network settings.

• Device Settings function
• Lock some of the setting items on the control panel so that they cannot be changed using
the control panel.
• Select type of paper loaded in the paper trays.
• Energy Saver function
• Enable or disable the Energy Saver mode.
• System Status function
• Display the information such as when paper is depleted during printing on a computer.
• Groups function
• Monitor multiple printers at the same time. When there are multiple printers to manage, you
can create groups and classify the printers to facilitate management.
• You can customize printer status according to groups, and send status notification e-mail
to a computer.
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

6
Follow the procedure below to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

4. Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin], and then click [Next>].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
5. After reading through its contents, click [Next>].
6. Follow the instructions on the screen.
A message appears when the installation is completed.
7. Click [OK].
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.
• Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case, launch “Setup.exe”
located on the CD-ROM root directory.
209
• If you are required to restart the computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, restart the
computer and continue the configuration.
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration
Follow the procedure below to change the network interface board configuration using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
1. Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

2. On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [IPv4], [IPX/SPX] or [IPv4
SNMPv3].
A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.
Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.
If you are using IPv4 SNMPv3, enter the user authentication.
3. In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.
4. On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool].
6
A Web browser opens and the window for entering the user name and password for the Web Image
Monitor administrator appears.
NIB Setup Tool starts. Follow the instruction on the screen.
6. Configure settings using Web Image Monitor.
7. Click [Logout].
9. Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
• For details about Web Image Monitor, see “Using Web Image Monitor”.
210
Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel
Follow the procedure below to lock the menus on the printer's control panel.

SNMPv3].
4. On the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [System].
6
A Web browser opens and the window for entering the login user name and password for the Web
Image Monitor administrator appears.
For details about the user name and password, contact your administrator.
The [System] page of Web Image Monitor appears.
6. On the [Protect Printer Display Panel], select [Level 1] or [Level 2].
7. Click [OK].
8. Click [Logout].
Changing the Paper Type
Follow the procedure below to change the paper type.
211

SNMPv3].
4. On the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Paper].
The [Paper] page appears.
Select a paper type in the [Paper Type] list for each tray.
6 6. Enter required setting items, and then click [OK].

7. Click [Logout].
• For details about setting items, see Help in the [General Settings] on [Configuration] page.
Managing User Information
Follow the procedure below to manage the user's information using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Prints jobs can be managed and functions restricted by user codes.
Starting User Management Tool

Follow the procedure below to start User Management Tool.
212
SNMPv3].
3. In the list, select a printer you want to manage.
4. On the [Tools] menu, click [User Management Tool].
The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.
5. Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
Enter the same user name and password you enter to log on to the Web Image Monitor. For details 6
about the user name and password, contact your administrator.
User Management Tool starts.
• For details about User Management Tool, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Displaying the number of sheets printed

Follow the procedure below to display the number of sheets printed under each user.
1. Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin User Management Tool.

2. Click the [User Counter Information] tab of User Management Tool.
The number of pages printed under each user appears.
213
3. Click [Exit] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
Exporting the information about the number of pages printed

Follow the procedure below to export the information of the number of pages printed under each user
code as a ".csv" file.

3. On the [File] menu, click [Export User Statistics List].
4. Specify the save location and file name, and then click [Save].
Resetting the number of pages printed to 0

Follow the procedure below to reset the number of pages printed under each user to 0.

3. Select the user whose information you want to reset.
214
4. On the [Edit] menu, click [Reset User Counters].
5. Select the check box, and then click [OK].

A confirmation message appears. 6
6. Click [OK].
The count for the selected paper type becomes 0 and [Modified] is displayed for [Status].
7. On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply Settings].
Changes are applied to information on the [User Counter Information] tab.

215
Restricting functions
Follow the procedure below to restrict use of individual functions.

3. Click the user whose functions you want to restrict.
4. On the [Edit] menu of User Management Tool, click [Restrict Access To Device].
5. Select the check box of the functions you want to restrict.

6. Click [OK].
7. Click [Yes].
The settings are applied.
Setting applicable functions to new users

Follow the procedure below to add new users and set functions applicable to them.
216
2. Click the [Access Control List] tab of User Management Tool.
3. On the [Edit] menu, click [Add New User].
4. Enter the user code and user name.

5. Select the check box of the functions applicable to the new user.
If the check boxes are unavailable, there is no restriction to use that function.
6. Click [OK].
The user is added, and [New] is displayed for [Status].
7. On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply Settings].
The settings are applied.
• For details about setting restrictions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
217
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode
Follow the procedure below to configure Energy Saver mode.

SNMPv3].
3. Select the printer whose settings you want to make.
To make settings for all printers in the selected group, select no printer.
4. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Energy Save Mode], [Set Individually], and then click
[On].
To select all the printers in the group, select [Set By Group].

To disable Energy Save mode, click [Off].
• For details about the setting for Energy Saver mode, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Setting a Password
Follow the procedure below to set a password.

SNMPv3].
218
4. On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool].
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears. 6
7. Click [Program/Change Administrator] on the [Device Settings] area, and then change the
settings.
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [Logout].
Checking the Printer Status
Follow the procedure below to check printer status.

SNMPv3].
If you are using TCP/IP SNMP v3, enter the user authentication.
219
3. To obtain status details, click the printer in the list, and then click [Open] on the [Device]
menu.
The printer status appears in the dialog box.
4. Click [System] or [Printer].
• For details about status icons and items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Changing Names and Comments
Follow the procedure below to change the names and comments of the printer.

6 SNMPv3].
3. Select a printer in the list, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instructions on the screen.
6. Click [System] on the [Device Settings] area, and then change the settings.
7. Click [OK].
8. Click [Logout].
• In the [Device Name] box, enter a device name on the printer using up to 31 characters.
• In the [Comment] box, enter a comment on the printer using up to 31 characters.
220
Address Book Backup and Restore - SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Using the Address Management Tool, you can save or restore the printer’s address book data.
Backing Up Address Book Data - SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Follow the procedure below to save a copy of the printer’s address book data.
1. Click [File].
2. Click [Backup Data].
3. Enter the encryption key and click [OK].
Enter the encryption key that was set when the address book was encrypted. For details, contact your 6
administrator.
4. Specify the save location.
Restoring Address Book Data - SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Follow the procedure below to restore previously saved address book data to the printer.
1. Click [File].
2. Click [Restore Data].
3. Select the file you want to restore and click [Open].
4. Enter the encryption key and click [OK].
5. Click [Send].
The address data currently on the printer will be overwritten by the backed-up data. Also, user counters
will be reset.
Viewing and Deleting Spool Print Jobs
221
SNMPv3].
3. Select a printer in the list, and then click [Spool Printing Job List(Printer)] on the [Tools] menu.
[Spool Printing Job List] appears in the Web Image Monitor.
5. Click [Logout].
6
• To display Spool Printing Job List, [Spool Printing] must be set to [Active] on Web Image Monitor in
advance.
• To delete the Spool Printing Job, select the document you want to delete and then click [Delete].
• For details, see Help in the [Spool Printing Job List] area.
Managing Address Information

SNMPv3].
3. Select a printer in the list, and then click [Address Management Tool] on the [Tools] menu.
The dialog box for entering the login user name and password appears.
222
4. Enter the login user name and password, and then click [OK].
[Address Management Tool] starts. Make the necessary settings.
5. Click [Exit].
223
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

To view the status of printers using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, configure SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client beforehand.
Monitoring Printers
Follow the procedure below to monitor the printer using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
1. Right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, point to [Property], and then click
[Monitor Device Settings...].
6 2. On the [Printers Folder] tab, select the printer you want to monitor, and then select the [To
Be Monitored] check box in the Monitoring Information Settings area.
To display the name of the monitored printer on the task bar, you must first select the [Display on the
task bar menu] check box, and then select the [Displayed on Task Bar] check box.
3. Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the configured printer is monitored.
• For details about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
224
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Checking the Printer Status
Follow the procedure below to check printer status using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
1. Right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, and then click the printer name on the
task bar.
• For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. 6
When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
When using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, note the following:
• The network printer can only receive one print job from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client at a time. While
the network printer is printing, another user cannot access it until the job is finished. In this case,
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client tries to access the network printer until the retry interval expires.
• If SmartDeviceMonitor for Client cannot access the network printer and times out, it will stop sending
the print job. In this case, you should cancel the paused status from the print queue window.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client will resume access to the network printer. You can delete the print job
from the print queue window, but canceling a print job printed by the network printer might cause the
next job sent from another user to be incorrectly printed.
• If a print job sent from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is interrupted and the network printer cancels
the job because something went wrong, send the print job again.
• Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print queue window, regardless of protocol.
• If various users send print jobs using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client to network printers, the printing
order might not be the same as that in which the jobs were sent.
• An IP address cannot be used for the IPP port name because the IP address is used for the
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port name.
• When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server
authentication is issued, enter “https://( printer's IP address or host name)/ ”. Internet Explorer must
225
be installed on your computer. Use the highest version. Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is
recommended.
• If the [Security Alert] dialog box appears when accessing the printer using IPP to create or configure
an IPP port, or when printing, install the certificate. To select the certificate store location when using
Certificate Import Wizard, click [Place all certificates in the following store], and then click [Local
Computer] under [Trusted Root Certification Authorities].
• For details about SSL settings, contact your administrator.
226
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail

Whenever a paper tray becomes empty or paper jams, a notification e-mail is sent to the registered
addresses.
You can make the timing and content settings for notification e-mail.
Configuring E-mail Notification
• Depending on your e-mail application, a phishing warning might appear after you receive an e-mail
message. To prevent phishing warnings appearing after you receive e-mail from a specified sender,
you must add the sender to your e-mail application's exclusion list. For details about how to do this,
see your e-mail application's Help.
• Service call.
• Toner is empty.
• Toner is nearly empty. 6
• Paper has jammed.
• Cover is open.
• Paper tray is empty.
• Paper tray is nearly empty.
• Paper tray error.
• Output paper tray is full.
• Unit connection error.
• Duplex unit error.
• Photoconductor unit needs replacing.
• Photoconductor unit needs replacing soon.
• Waste toner bottle is full.
• Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
• Stapler has no staples.
• Fusing unit needs replacing.
• Fusing unit needs replacing soon.
• Intermediate transfer unit needs replacing.
• Intermediate transfer unit needs replacing soon.
• Punch waste receptacle is full.
227
• Memory for file storage is full soon.

• Log error.
1. Open a Web browser, and then enter "http://(printer's address)/" in the address bar.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server
authentication is issued, enter "https://(printer's address)/".
2. Click [Login] on Top Page of Web Image Monitor.
3. Enter the user name and password, and then click [Login].
5. On the [Device Settings] area, click [E-mail].
6. Make the following settings:
• Items in the Reception column: Make the necessary settings for sending and receiving e-mail.
6 • Items in the SMTP column: Configure the SMTP server. Check your mailing environment, and
then specify the necessary items. You can also perform mail authentication for the SMTP server.
• Items in the POP before SMTP column: Configure the POP server. Check your mailing
environment, and then specify the necessary items. You can also perform mail authentication for
the POP server.
• Items in the POP3/IMAP4 column: Configure the POP3 or IMAP4 server. Check your mailing
environment, and then specify the necessary items.
• Items in the E-mail Communication Port column: Configure the port to be used for access to the
mail server.
• Items in the E-Mail Notification Account column: Specify these items if you want to use on-demand
e-mail notification.
7. Click [OK].
Auto E-mail Notification
1. Click [Configuration] in the menu area, and then click [Auto E-mail Notification] on the
[Device Settings] area.
The dialog box for making notification settings appears.
• Items in Notification Message column: You can set this according to your needs, for example,
the printer's location, service representative contact information.
228
• Items in the Groups to Notify column: E-mail notification addresses can be grouped as required.
• Items in the Select Groups/Items to Notify column: Select groups for each notification type, such
as printer status and error.
To make detailed settings for these items, click [Edit] next to [Detailed Settings of Each Item].
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [Logout].
On-demand E-mail Notification
1. Click [Configuration] in the menu area, and then click [On-demand E-mail Notification] on
the [Device Settings] area.
The dialog box for making notification settings appears.
• Notification Subject: Enter a text string to be added to the subject line of return e-mails.
• Items in Notification Message column: You can set this according to your needs, for example,
6
the printer's location, service representative contact information.
• Items in the Access Restriction to Information column: Select whether to restrict accesses based
on a specific category of information.
• Items in the Receivable E-mail Address/Domain Name Settings column: Enter an e-mail address
or domain name to use for requesting information by e-mail and to receive its return e-mail.
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [Logout].
Mail authentication
You can configure mail authentication to prevent illegal use of the mail server.
SMTP authentication
Specify SMTP authentication.
When mail is sent to the SMTP server, authentication is performed using the SMTP AUTH protocol by
prompting the mail originator to enter the user name and password. This prevents illegal use of the
SMTP server.
1. In the menu area, click [E-mail]
229
• SMTP Authentication: Enable or disable SMTP authentication.

• SMTP Auth. E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address.
• SMTP Auth. User Name: Enter the SMTP account name.
• SMTP Auth. Password: To set or change the password for SMTP AUTH.
• SMTP Auth. Encryption: Select whether to encrypt the password or not.
[Auto Select]: If the authentication method is PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAM-MD5, or DIGEST-
MD5.
[Active]: If the authentication method is CRAM-MD5 or DIGEST-MD5.
[Inactive]: If the authentication method is PLAIN or LOGIN.
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [Logout].
POP before SMTP authentication
Select whether to log on to the POP3 server before sending e-mail.
6 1. In the menu area, click [E-mail].
• POP before SMTP: Enable or disable POP before SMTP.
• POP E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address.
• POP User Name: Enter the POP account name.
• POP Password: To set or change the POP password.
• Timeout setting after POP Auth.: Enter the time available before connecting to the SMTP
server after logging on to the POP server.
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [Logout].
Sending On-demand E-mail
To use on-demand e-mail notification, perform the following configuration tasks in Web Image Monitor.
1. In the menu area, click [E-mail].

• E-mail Notification E-mail Address: Enter the address using alphanumeric characters.
• Receive E-mail Notification: Specify whether to use on-demand e-mail notification.
• E-mail Notification User Name: Enter the administrator's user name as the mail originator name.
230
• E-mail Notification Password: Enter the password of the mail notification user.
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [Logout].
Format of on-demand e-mail messages
To use mail notification, you need to send an on-demand e-mail message to this printer.
Using your mail software, enter the following:
Item Description
Subject (Referred to as Subject) Enter a request regarding the device. For details,
see the table below.
From (Referred to as From) Specify a valid mail address. The device

information will be sent to the address specified
here.
Subject field 6
Format: devicestatus?parametername=parameter[&=parameter][& =parameter]...
Subject field coding examples
Coding example Action
devicestatus?request=sysconfig& format=text& The device's system configuration information

lang=en will be sent in an English text format.
devicestatus?request=sysconfig The device's system configuration information

will be sent in a preset format and language.
Parameters
Parameter Meaning Default
request Information to be obtained Mandatory
format Mail format Mail will be sent in the format

preset for each mail address.
lang Language for mail body Mail will be sent in the

language preset for each mail
address.
231
Parameters specifying the information to be obtained
Information to be obtained Parameter
System configuration information sysconfig
Network configuration information netconfig
Printer configuration information prtconfig
Supplies information supply
Device status information status
Parameters specifying the mail format
Mail format Parameter
Text text
6 HTML html
XML xml
Parameters specifying the language for mail body
Language for mail body Parameter
English en
French fr
German de
Italian it
Spanish es
Dutch nl
Danish da
Finnish fi
Norwegian no
Portuguese pt
Swedish sv
232
Language for mail body Parameter
Czech cs
Polish pl
Hungarian hu
• A mail message must be within 1 MB in size.

• E-mail may be incomplete if sent immediately after power on.
• The Subject field is case-insensitive.
• Parameter names can be written in any order.
• HTML and XML can be selected for subject field, but output is text only.
233
Remote Maintenance by telnet
• Remote Maintenance should be password-protected so that access is allowed to administrators only.

• The password is the same as the one of Web Image Monitor administrator. When the password is
changed using "mshell", other passwords change also.
• Some commands cannot be used depending on your printer.
Using telnet
Follow the procedure below to use telnet.
• Only one user at a time can log on to perform remote maintenance.
1. Use the IP address or the host name of the printer to start telnet.
6 % telnet "IP_address"
2. Enter your user name and password.
3. Enter a command.
4. Quit telnet.
msh> logout
The configuration message about saving the changes appears.
5. Enter "yes" to save the changes, and then press the [OK] key.
If you do not want to save the changes, enter "no", and then press the [OK] key. To make further
changes, enter "return" at the command line, and then press the [OK] key.
• If the message "Can not write NVRAM information" appears, the changes are not saved. Repeat the
procedure above.
• When the changes are saved, the network interface board is reset automatically with that changes.
• When the network interface board resets, the print job in print process will be printed. However, print
jobs in queue will be canceled.
8021x
Use "8021x" commands to display IEEE 802.1x related information.
234
View settings
msh> 8021x
Configuration
msh> 8021x "parameter"
Parameter Value configured
eap {tls|ttls|leap|peap} {chap|mschap| You can specify the EAP authentication type.
mschapv2|pap|md5|tls} tls: EAP-TLS (default)
ttls: EAP-TTLS
leap: LEAP
peap: PEAP
chap, mschap, mschapv2, pap, md5, or tls are
settings for the phase 2 method, and must be set
when using EAP-TTLS or PEAP.
Do not make these settings when using other EAP
authentication types. 6
If you select EAP-TTLS, you can select chap,
mschap, mschapv2, pap, or md5.
If you select PEAP, you can select mschapv2 or
tls.
username "character string" You can specify the login user name for the
Radius server.
Usable characters: ASCII 0x20-0x7e (31
bytes).
The default is blank.
username2 "character string" You can specify the phase 2 username for EAP-
TTLS/PEAP phase 2 authentication.
bytes).
domain "character string" You can specify the login domain name for the
Radius server.
The characters you can enter are ASCII
0x20-0x7e (31 bytes), but not "@" or "\".
235
password "character string" You can specify the login for the Radius server.
bytes). The default is blank.
srvcert {on|off} You can set the server certificate. The default is
"off".
imca {on|off} You can enable or disable the certificate when

the intermediate certificate authority is present.
The default is "off".
srvid "character string" You can set the server ID and subdomain of the
certificate server.
claer {a each command|all} Returns the selected setting to its default value.
6 If you specify "all", all settings will be restored to
their default values. However, IEEE 802.1x
Auth. status (enable or disable) for Ethernet and
wireless LAN will not be initialized.
access
Use the "access" command to view and configure access control. You can also specify two or more access
ranges.
View settings
msh> access
IPv4 configuration
msh> access [×] range "start-address end-address"
• [×] represents a target number between 1 and 5. (Up to five access ranges can be registered
and selected.)
Example: to specify accessible IPv4 addresses between 192.168.0.10 and 192.168.0.20:
msh> access 1 range6 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20
IPv6 configuration
msh> access [×] range6 "start-address end-address"
236
and selected.)
Example: to specify accessible IPv6 addresses between 2001:DB8::100 and 2001:DB8::200.
msh> access 1 range6 2001:DB8::100 2001:DB8::200
IPv6 access mask configuration
msh> access [×] mask6 "base-address prefixlen"
and selected.)
Example: to specify accessible IPv6 addresses to 2001:DB8::/32
msh> access 1 mask6 2001:DB8:: 32
Access control initialization
msh> access flush
• Use the "flush" command to restore the default settings so that all access ranges become "0.0.0.0"
for IPv4, and ":: " for IPv6.
• The access range restricts computers from use of the printer by IP address. If you do not need to
6
restrict printing, make the setting "0.0.0.0" for IPv4, and "::" for IPv6.
• Valid ranges must be from lower (start address) to higher (end address).
• If you are running IPv4 or IPv6, up to five access ranges can be registered and selected.
• IPv6 can register and select the range and the mask for each access ranges.
• IPv6 mask ranges between 1 - 128 can be selected.
• Up to five access ranges can be specified. The entry is invalid if the target number is omitted.
• You cannot send print jobs, or access Web Image Monitor and diprint from a restricted IP
address.
appletalk
Use the "appletalk" command to view and configure Apple Talk parameters.
View settings
msh> appletalk
• [2] means "active" and [0] means "inactive".
• The default is [2].
Changing PAP timeout configuration
msh> appletalk ptimeout value > 0
• Timeout value becomes effective.
237
msh> appletalk ptimeout value = 0

• Timeout value becomes ineffective.
authfree
Use the "authfree" command to view and configure AuthFree parameters.

View settings
The following command displays the current AuthFree settings:
msh> authfree
• If print job authentication exclusion is not set, authentication exclusion control cannot be
displayed.
IPv4 address settings
msh> authfree "ID " range_addr1 range_addr2
IPv6 address settings
6 msh> authfree "ID " range6_addr1 range6_addr2

IPv6 address mask configuration
msh> authfree "ID " mask6_addr1 masklen
Parallel/USB settings
msh> authfree [parallel | usb] [on|off]
• To enable authfree, set to on. To disable authfree, set to off. Always specify the interface.
Authentication exclusion control initialization
msh> authfree flush
autonet
Use the "autonet" command to view and configure AutoNet parameters.

View settings
The following command displays the current AutoNet settings:
msh> autonet
Configuration
You can configure AutoNet settings.
msh> autonet {on|off}
• {on} means "active" and {off} means "inactive".
238
Current interface priority configuration display

msh> autonet priority
Interface priority configuration
msh> autonet priority "interface_name"
• You can give interface's AutoNet parameter priority.
• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the wireless LAN interface unit is installed.
Interface name Interface configured
ether Ethernet interface
wlan Wireless LAN interface
• If an interface is not selected, the current interface connection settings remain in effect.
• For details about AutoNet, refer to autonet parameters. 6
bonjour
Use the "bonjour" command to display bonjour-related settings.

View settings
Bonjour settings are displayed.
msh> bonjour
Bonjour service name setting
You can specify the bonjour service name.
msh> bonjour cname "computer name"
• The computer name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
Bonjour Installation location information setting
You can enter information about the location where the printer is installed.
msh> bonjour location "location"
• Information about location can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Setting order of priority for each protocol
• diprint
msh> bonjour diprint [0-99]
• lpr
239
msh> bonjour lpr [0-99]

• ipp
msh> bonjour ipp [0-99]
You can specify the order of priority for "diprint", "lpr", and "ipp". Smaller numbers indicate higher
priority.
IP TTL setting
msh> bonjour ip ttl {1-255}
You can specify the IP TTL (the number of routers a packet can pass through).
• The default is 255.

Resetting the computer name and location information
You can reset the computer name and location information.
msh> bonjour clear {cname | location}
• cname
6 Reset the computer name. The default computer name will be displayed when the computer is
restarted.
• location
Reset the location information. The previous location information will be deleted.
Interface configuration
msh> bonjour linklocal "interface_name"
• If many types of interface are installed, configure the interface that communicates with linklocal
address.
• If you do not specify an interface, the Ethernet interface is automatically selected.
Interface Interface configured
btconfig
Use the “btconfig” command to make Bluetooth settings.

View settings
Bluetooth settings are displayed.
240
msh> btconfig
Mode settings
You can set the Bluetooth operation mode to {private} or {public}.
msh> btconfig {private|public}
• The default is {public}.
devicename
Use the "devicename" command to display and change the printer name.
View settings
msh> devicename
Printer name configuration
msh> devicename name "string"
• Enter a printer name using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
• Set single names for each printer. 6
Printer name initialization
msh> device name clearname
Reset the printer name to its default.
dhcp
Use the "dhcp" command to configure DHCP settings.

View settings
The following command displays the current DHCP settings.
msh> dhcp
Configuration
You can configure DHCP.
msh> dhcp "interface_name" {on|off}
• Click {on} to enable DHCP. Click {off} to disable DHCP.
• If the DNS server address and domain name are obtained from DHCP, be sure to click {on}.
241
Current interface priority configuration display

msh> dhcp priority
Interface priority configuration
msh> dhcp priority "interface_name"
• You can select which interface has DHCP parameter priority.
• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.
DNS server address selection
msh> dhcp dnsaddr {dhcp | static}
• Specify whether to obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server or use the address set
by a user.
• To obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server, specify "dhcp". To use the address set
by a user, specify "static".
6 Domain name selection
msh> dhcp domainname {dhcp | static}
• Specify whether to obtain the domain name from the DNS server or use the domain name set
by a user.
• To obtain the domain name from the DHCP server, specify "dhcp". To use the domain name set
by a user, specify "static".
dhcp6
Use the “dhcp6”command to display or configure DHCPv6 settings.

View settings
The following command displays the current DHCPv6 settings.
msh> dhcp6
DHCPv6-lite configuration and display
msh> dhcp6 “interface_name” lite {on|off}
Viewing and specifying DNS server address selection (obtained from the dhcpv6 server/user
specified value)
msh> dhcp6 dnsaddr {dhcp|static}
DUID(DHCP unique ID) deletion and display
msh> dhcp6 duid clear
242
Viewing and specifying the time required to re-obtain the parameter obtained from dhcpv6
msh> dhcp6 ooption lifetime [0-65535]
• It can be entered between 0 and 65535 minutes.
• The default is 60 minutes.
• If you specify "0", you cannot re-obtain the value.
dns
Use the "dns" command to configure or display DNS (Domain Name System) settings.
View settings
The following command displays current DNS settings:
msh> dns
IPv4 DNS server configuration
The following command enables or disables the IPv4 DNS server address:
msh> dns "number" server "server address" 6
The following command displays a configuration using the IP address 192.168.15.16 on a DNS 1
server:
msh> dns 1 server 192.168.15.16
• You can register IPv4 DNS Server address.
• You can register up to three IPv4 DNS server numbers.
• You cannot use "255.255.255.255" as the DNS server address.
IPv6 DNS server configuration
The following command enables or disables the IPv6 DNS server address:
msh> dns "number" server6 "server address"
• You can register IPv6 DNS Server address.
• You can register up to three IPv6 DNS server numbers.
Dynamic DNS function setting
msh> dns "interface_name" ddns {on|off}
• You can set the dynamic DNS function "active" or "inactive".
243
Specifying the record overlap operation

msh> dns overlap {update|add}
• You can specify operations performed when records overlap.
• update
To delete old records and register new records.
• add
To add new records and store the old records.
• When CNAME overlaps, it is always changed, irrespective of settings.
CNAME registration
msh> dns cname {on|off}
• You can specify whether to register CNAME.
6 • {on} means "active" and {off} means "inactive".
• The CNAME registered is the default name beginning with rnp. CNAME cannot be changed.
A records registration
msh> dns arecord {dhcp|own}
• {dhcp}
You can specify the method of registering an A record when the dynamic DNS function is enabled
and DHCP is used.
• {own}
To register an A record using the printer as the DNS client.
The DNS server address and the domain name already designated are used for the registration.
Record updating interval settings
msh> dns interval "time"
• You can specify the interval after which records are updated when using the dynamic DNS
function.
• The updating interval is specified hourly. It can be entered between 1 and 255 hours.
• The default is 24 hours.
domainname
Use the "domainname" command to display or configure the domain name settings.
244
You can configure the Ethernet interface or wireless LAN interface.

View settings
The following command displays the current domain name:
msh> domainname
Interface domain configuration
msh> domainname "interface_name"
Setting the domain name
msh> domainname "interface_name" name "domain name"
• A domain name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
• The Ethernet interface and wireless LAN interface will have the same domain name.
Interface Interface set
wlan Wireless LAN interface 6

Deleting the domain name
msh> domainname "interface_name" clear "name"
etherauth
Use "Ethernet" command to display or modify the authentication related parameters for Ethernet.
View settings
msh> etherauth
802.1x Configuration
msh> etherauth 8021x {on|off}
{on} means "active" and {off} means "inactive".
help
Use the "help" command to display the available command list and the procedures for using those
commands.
Command list display
msh> help
245
Display of procedure for using commands

msh> help "command_name"
hostname
Use the "hostname" command to change the printer name.

View settings
msh> hostname
IPv4 Configuration
msh> hostname "interface_name" "printer_name"
• Enter the printer name using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
• You cannot use a printer name starting with "RNP" or "rnp".
• The Ethernet interface and wireless LAN interface will have the same printer name.
6 Interface name Interface configured
Initializing the printer name for each interface

msh>hostname "interface_name" clear "name"
ifconfig
Use the "ifconfig" command to view and configure TCP/IP (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address,
default gateway address) for the printer.
View settings
msh> ifconfig
IPv4 configuration
msh> ifconfig "interface_name" "parameter" "address"
• If you did not enter an interface name, it is automatically set to the Ethernet interface.
ether Ethernet Interface
246
wlan wireless LAN Interface
The following explains how to configure an IPv4 address 192.168.15.16 on Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.15.16
IPv6 configuration
msh> ifconfig ether inet6 "interface_name" "prefixlen"
The following explains how to configure a IPv6 address to 2001:DB8::100 with prefix length 64 on
the Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether inet6 2001:DB8::100 64
Netmask configuration
msh> ifconfig "interface_name" netmask "address"
The following explains how to configure a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 on Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0
Broadcast address configuration
6
msh> ifconfig "interface_name" broadcast "address"
Changing the interface
msh> ifconfig "interface" up
You can specify either the Ethernet interface or wireless LAN interface when using the optional wireless
LAN interface unit is installed.
• To get the above addresses, contact your administrator.

• Use the default configuration if you cannot obtain setting addresses.
• The IP address, subnet mask and broadcast address are the same as that for the ethernet interface
and wireless LAN interface.
• TCP/IP configuration is the same for both Ethernet and wireless LAN interface. If interfaces are
changed, the new interface inherits the configuration.
• Use "0x" as the initial two letters of a hexadecimal address.
info
Use the "info" command to display printer information such as paper tray, output tray, and printer language.
Printer information display
msh> info
247
• For details about displayed contents, see p.274 "Getting Printer Information over the Network".
ipsec
Use the "ipsec" command to view and configure IPsec settings.

Viewing settings
The following command displays the current IPsec settings:
msh> ipsec
• For details about displayed contents, see Security Guide.
ipp
6 Use the "ipp" command to view and configure IPP settings.

Viewing settings
The following command displays the current IPP settings:
msh> ipp
IPP timeout configuration
Specify how many seconds the computer waits before canceling an interrupted print job. The time
can be entered between 30 to 65535 seconds.
msh> ipp timeout [30 - 65535]
IPP user authorization configuration
Use IPP user authorization to restrict users to print with IPP. The default is "off".
msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off}
• User authorization settings are "basic" and "digest".
• Use "off" to remove a user's authorization.
• If user authorization is specified, register a user name. You can register up to 10 users.
IPP user configuration
Configure IPP users according to the following messages:
msh> ipp user
The following message appears:
msh> Input user number (1 to 10):
Enter the number, user name, and password.
248
msh> IPP user name:user1

msh> IPP password:*******
After configuring the settings, the following message appears:
User configuration changed.
ipv6
Use the "ipv6" command to display and configure IPv6 settings.

View setting
msh> ipv6
IPv6 stateless address
msh> ipv6 stateless {on|off}
lpr
Use the “lpr” command to view and configure LPR settings.

6
View setting
msh> lpr
Checking host name when deleting the job
msh> lpr chkhost {on|off}
If “on” is selected, you can delete print jobs only from the IP address of the host that sent the print job.
If LPR is disabled, you can also delete print jobs sent from IP addresses other than that of the host.
Printer Error Detection Function
lpr prnerrchk {on|off}
If you set this to “on”, the printer stops receiving data and will wait until the error is resolved before
continuing processing a job.
netware
Use the "netware" command to configure the NetWare settings such as the print server name or file server
name.
Netware printer server names
msh> netware pname "character string"
• Enter the NetWare print server name using up to 47 characters.
249
Netware file server names

msh> netware fname
• Enter the NetWare file server name using up to 47 characters.
Encap type
msh> netware encap {802.3|802.2|snap|ethernet2|auto}
Remote printer number
msh> netware rnum {0-254}
Timeout
msh> netware timeout {3-255}
Printer server mode
msh> netware mode pserver
msh> netware mode ps
Remote printer mode
msh> netware mode rprinter
6 msh> netware mode rp
NDS context name
msh> netware context "character string"
SAP interval
msh> netware "sap_interval"
Setting login mode for file server
msh> netware login server
Setting login mode for NDS tree
msh> netware login tree
Setting login mode for NDS tree name
msh> netware tree "NDS name"
File transfer protocol
msh> netware trans {ipv4pri|ipxpri|ipv4|ipx}
If you do not specify the protocol, the current setting is displayed.
Protocol Set Protocol
ipv4pri IPv4+IPX(IPv4)
ipxpri IPv4+IPX(IPX)
ipv4 IPv4
250
Protocol Set Protocol
ipx IPX
passwd
Use the "passwd" command to change the remote maintenance password.

Changing the password
msh> passwd
• Enter the current password.
• Enter the new password.
• Renter the new password to confirm it.
Changing the Password of the administrators using the supervisor
msh> passwd {Administrator ID}
• Enter the new password.
6
• Renter the new password to confirm it.
• Be sure not to forget or lose the password.

• The password can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Passwords are case-sensitive.
For example, "R" is not the same as "r".
pathmtu
Use the "pathmtu" command to display and configure the PathMTU Discovery service function.
View settings
msh> pathmtu
Configuration
msh> pathmtu {on|off}
• The default is "on".
• If the MTU size of the sent data is larger than the router's MTU, the router will declare it
impassable, and communication will fail. If this happens, selecting the "pathmtu" to "off"
optimized the MTU size and prevents data output failure.
• Depending on the environment, information might not be obtained from the router, and
communication will fail. If this happens, select the "pathmtu" to "off".
251
prnlog
Use the "prnlog" command to obtain printer log information.

Print logs display
msh> prnlog
• Displays 16 previous print jobs.
msh> prnlog "ID Number"
• Specify the ID number of the displayed print log information to display additional details about
a print job.
• For details about displayed contents, see p.274 "Getting Printer Information over the Network".
rhpp
6 Use the "rhpp" command to view and configure RHPP settings.

View settings
msh> rhpp
Changing rhpp port number
msh> rhpp [1024-65535]
• The default is 59100.
Setting timeout
msh> rhpp timeout [30-65535]
• The default is 300 seconds.
• “RHPP” is an abbreviation of “Reliable Host Printing Protocol”, which is a manufacturer-original

printing protocol.
route
Use the "route" command to view and control the routing table.
All route information display
msh> route get "destination"
• Specify the IPv4 address to destination.
"0.0.0.0" cannot be specified as destination address.
252
Enabling/disabling specified IPv4 destination

msh> route active {host|net} "destination" {on | off}
• You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes the default setting.
Adding IPv4 Routing Table
msh> route add {host|net} "destination" "gateway"
• Adds a host or network route to "destination", and a gateway address to "gateway" in the table.
• Specify the IPv4 address to destination and gateway.
• Host becomes the default setting.
Setting default IPv4 Gateway
msh> route add default gateway
Deleting specified IPv4 destination from Routing Table
msh> route delete {host|net} "destination"
• Host becomes the default setting.
• IPv4 address of destination can be specified.
Setting IPv6 Default Gateway 6
msh> route add6 default gateway
Adding a specified IPv6 destination to Routing Table
msh> route add6 "destination" "prefixlen" "gateway"
Deleting a specified IPv6 destination from Routing Table
msh> route delete6 "destination" "prefixlen"
Display information about a specified IPv6 route information
msh> route get6 "destination"
Enabling/disabling a specified IPv6 destination
msh> route active6 "destination" "prefixlen" {on | off}
Route initialization
msh> route flush
• The maximum number of IPv4 routing tables is 16.

• The maximum number of IPv6 routing tables is 2.
• Set a gateway address when communicating with devices on an external network.
253
• The same gateway address is shared by all interfaces.

• "Prefixlen" is a number between 1 and 128.
set
Use the "set" command to set the protocol information display "active" or "inactive".
View settings
The following command displays protocol information (active/inactive).
msh> set ipv4
msh> set ipv6
msh> set appletalk
msh> set netware
msh> set smb
msh> set protocol
6 • When protocol is specified, information about TCP/IP, Apple Talk, Netware, SCSI print, and
SMB appears.
msh> set parallel
msh> set usb
msh> set bluetooth
msh> set lpr
msh> set lpr6
msh> set ftp
msh> set ftp6
msh> set rsh
msh> set rsh6
msh> set diprint
msh> set diprint6
msh> set web
msh> set snmp
msh> set ssl
msh> set ssl6
msh> set nrs
msh> set rfu
msh> set rfu6
254
msh> set ipp

msh> set ipp6
msh> set http
msh> set http6
msh> set bonjour
msh> set bonjour6
msh> set nbt
msh> set ssdp
msh> set ssh
msh> set sftp
msh> set sftp6
Configuration
• Enter "up" enable protocol, and enter "down" to disable protocol.
You can set the protocol to "active" or "inactive".
msh> set ipv4 {up | down} 6
• If you disable IPv4, you cannot use remote access after logging off. If you did this by mistake,
you can use the control panel to enable remote access via IPv4.
• Disabling IPv4 also disables lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp, ssl, ipp, http, bonjour, and sftp.
msh> set ipv6 {up | down}
• If you disable IPv6, you cannot use remote access after logging off. If you did this by mistake,
you can use the control panel to enable remote access via IPv6.
• Disabling IPv6 also disables lpr6, ftp6, rsh6, diprint6, ssl6, ipp6, http6, and sftp6.
msh> set appletalk {up | down}
msh> set netware {up | down}
msh> set smb {up | down}
msh> set lpr {up | down}
msh> set lpr6 {up | down}
msh> set ftp {up | down}
msh> set ftp6 {up | down}
msh> set rsh {up | down}
msh> set rsh6 {up | down}
msh> set diprint {up | down}
msh> set diprint6 {up | down}
msh> set web {up | down}
255
msh> set snmp {up | down}

msh> set ssl {up | down}
msh> set ssl6 {up | down}
• If Secured Sockets Layer (SSL, an encryption protocol) function is not available for the
printer, you cannot use the function by enabling it.
msh> set nrs {up | down}
msh> set rfu {up | down}
msh> set rfu6 {up | down}
msh> set ipp {up | down}
msh> set ipp6 {up | down}
msh> set http {up | down}
msh> set http6 {up | down}
msh> set bonjour {up | down}
msh> set bonjour6 {up | down}
6 msh> set ssh {up | down}
msh> set ssdp {up | down}
msh> set nbt {up | down}
msh> set sftp {up | down}
msh> set sftp6 {up | down}
show
Use the "show" command to display network interface board configuration settings.
View settings
msh> show
• If "-p" is added, you can view settings one by one.
• For details about the information displayed, see p.281 "Understanding the Displayed Information".
slp
Use "slp" command to view and configure SLP settings.

msh> slp ttl "ttl_val"
256
• You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of NetWare 5/5.1 and
Netware 6/6.5. Using the "slp" command, you can configure the value of TTL which can be used by
SLP multicast packet.
• The default value of TTL is 1. A search is executed only within a local segment. If the router does not
support multicast, the settings are not available even if the TTL value is increased.
• The acceptable TTL value is between 1 and 255.
smb
Use the "smb" command to configure or delete the computer or workgroup name for SMB.
Computer Name settings
msh> smb comp "computer name"
• Set computer name using up to 15 characters. Names beginning with "RNP" or "rnp" cannot be
entered.
Working Group Name settings
msh> smb group "work group name" 6
• Set workgroup name using up to 15 characters.
Comment settings
msh> smb comment "comment"
• Set comment using up to 31 characters.
Notify print job completion
msh> smb notif {on | off}
• To notify print job completion, specify "on". Otherwise, specify "off".
Deleting Computer Nam
msh> smb clear comp
Deleting Group Name
msh> smb clear group
Deleting Comment
msh> smb clear comment
View Protocol
msh> smb protocol
snmp
Use the "snmp" command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such as the community name.
257
View settings
msh> snmp
• Default access settings 1 is as follows:
Community name:public
IPv4 address:0.0.0.0
IPv6 address:::
IPX address:00000000:000000000000
Access type:read-only
Effective Protocol:IPv4/IPv6/IPX
• Default access settings 2 is as follows:
Community name:admin
IPv4 address:0.0.0.0
IPv6 address:::
IPX address:00000000:000000000000
6 Access type:read-write
Effective Protocol:IPv4/IPv6/IPX
• If "-p" is added, you can view settings one by one.
• To display the current community, specify its registration number.
Display
msh> snmp ?
Community name configuration
msh> snmp "number" name "community_name"
• You can configure ten SNMP access settings numbered 1-10.
• The printer cannot be accessed from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client if "public" is not registered in numbers 1-10. When changing the community name, use
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and SNMP Setup Tool to correspond with printer settings.
• The community name can be entered using up to 15 characters.
Deleting community name
msh> snmp "number" clear name
Access type configuration
msh> snmp "number" type "access_type"
Access type Type of access permission
no not accessible
258
Access type Type of access permission
read read only
write read and write
trap user is notified of trapmessages
Protocol configuration
msh> snmp {ipv4|ipv6|ipx} {on|off}
• Use the following command to set protocols "active" or "inactive": If you set a protocol "inactive",
all access settings for that protocol are disabled.
• Specify "ipv4" for IPv4, "ipv6" for IPv6, or "ipx" for IPX/SPX.
• All protocols cannot be turned off concurrently.
Configuration of protocol for each registration number
msh> snmp "number" active {ipv4|ipv6|ipx} {on|off} 6
• To change the protocol of access settings, use the following command. However, if you have
disabled a protocol with the above command, activating it here has no effect.
Access configuration
msh> snmp "number" {ipv4|ipv6|ipx} "address"
• You can configure a host address according to the protocol used.
• The network interface board accepts requests only from hosts that have IPv4, IPv6, and IPX
addresses with access types of "read-only" or "read-write". Enter "0" to have network interface
board accept requests from any host without requiring a specific type of access.
• Enter a host address to deliver "trap" access type information to.
• To specify IPv4 or IPv6, enter "ipv4" or "ipv6" followed by a space, and then the IPv4 or IPv6
address.
• To specify IPX/SPX, enter "ipx" followed by a space, the IPX address followed by a decimal,
and then the MAC address of the network interface board.
sysLocation configuration
msh> snmp location
Deleting sysLocation
msh> snmp clear location
sysContact setting
msh> snmp contact
259
Deleting sysContact
msh> snmp clear contact
SNMP v1v2 function configuration
msh> snmp v1v2 {on|off}
• Specify "on" to enable, and "off" to disable.
SNMP v3 function configuration
msh> snmp v3 {on|off}
SNMP TRAP configuration
msh> snmp trap {v1|v2|v3} {on|off}
Remote Configuration Authorization configuration
msh> snmp remote {on|off}
• Specify "on" to enable, and "off" to disable the SNMP v1v2 setting.
6 SNMP v3 TRAP configuration display
msh> snmp v3trap
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5}
If a number from 1-5 is entered, settings are displayed for that number only.
Configuring a sending address for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} {ipv4|ipv6|ipx} "address"
Configuring a sending protocol for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} active {ipv4|ipv6|ipx} {on|off}
Configuring a user account for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} account "account_name"
Enter an account name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Deleting an SNMP v3 TRAP user account
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} clear account
Configuring an SNMP v3 encryption algorithm
msh> snmp v3auth {md5|sha1}
Configuring SNMP v3 encryption
msh> snmp v3priv {auto|on}
Set "auto" for automatic encryption configuration.
Set "on" for mandatory encryption configuration.
260
sntp
The printer clock can be synchronized with a NTP server clock using Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).
Use the "sntp" command to change SNTP settings.
View settings
msh> sntp
NTP server address configuration
You can specify the IP address of the NTP server.
msh> sntp server "IP_address"
Interval configuration
msh> sntp interval "polling_time"
• You can specify the interval at which the printer synchronizes with the operator-specified NTP
server. The default is 60 minutes.
• The interval can be entered from 0, or between 16 and 10,080 minutes.
• If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only when you turn the printer on. After
that, the printer does not synchronize with the NTP server. 6
Time-zone configuration
msh> sntp timezone "+/-hour_time"
• You can specify the time difference between the printer clock and NTP server clock. The values
are between -12:00 and +13:00.
spoolsw
Use the "spoolsw" command to view and configure Job Spool settings.
You can only specify diprint, lpr, ipp, ftp, smb and sftp protocol.
View settings
The Job Spool setting appears.
msh> spoolsw
Job Spool setting
msh> spoolsw spool {on | off}
• Specify "on" to enable Job Spool, or "off" to disable it.

Resetting Job spool setting
msh> spoolsw clear job {on | off}
261
• When the printer power is cut during job spooling, this determines whether to reprint the spooled
job.
Protocol configuration
msh> spoolsw diprint {on | off}
msh> spoolsw lpr {on | off}
msh> spoolsw ipp {on | off}
msh> spoolsw smb {on | off}
msh> spoolsw ftp {on | off}
msh> spoolsw sftp {on|off}
• You can specify the settings for diprint, lpr, ipp, smb and sftp.
ssdp
Use the "ssdp" command to view and configure SSDP settings.
6 View settings
msh> ssdp
Setting effective time
msh> ssdp profile {1801-86400}
The default is 10800 seconds.
Advertise packet TTL settings
msh> ssdp ttl {1-255}
The default is 4.
ssh
Use the "ssh" command to view and configure SSH settings.

View settings
msh> ssh
Data compression communication settings
msh> ssh compression {on|off}
The default is "on".
SSH/SFTP communication port setting
msh> ssh port {22, 1024-65535}
The default is 22.
262
SSH/SFTP communication timeout setting

msh> ssh timeout {0-65535}
The default is 300.
SSH/SFTP communication login timeout setting
msh> ssh logintimeout {0-65535}
The default is 300.
Setting an open key for SSH/SFTP
msh> ssh genkey {512|768|1024} "character string"
Create an open key for SSH/SFTP communication.
Usable characters are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes) other than "0".
The default key length is 1024, and the character string is blank.
Deleting open key for ssh/sftp communication
msh> ssh delkey
• If you do not specify a character string, current setting is displayed. 6
status
Use the "status" command to display the printer status.

Messages
msh> status
• For details, see p.274 "Getting Printer Information over the Network".
syslog
Use the "syslog" command to display the information stored in the printer's system log.
View message
msh> syslog
• For details about the information displayed, see p.292 "Message List".
263
upnp
Use the "upnp" command to display and configure the universal plug and play.
Public URL display
msh> upnp url
Public URL configuration
Msh< upnp url "string"
• Enter the URL string in the character string.
web
Use the "web" command to display and configure parameters on Web Image Monitor.
View Settings
msh> web
6 URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by clicking URL on Web Image Monitor.
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the number corresponding to the URL. Up to two URLs can be registered
and specified.
msh> web url http://"The URL or IP address you want to register"/
Deleting URLs registered as link destinations
msh> web x clear url
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the corresponding number to the URL.
Link name configuration
You can enter the name for URL that appears on Web Image Monitor.
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the corresponding number to the link name.
msh> web name "Name you want to display"
Resetting URL names registered as link destinations
msh> web x clear name
Specify "1" or "2" for x as the number corresponding to the link name.
Help URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by clicking [Help] or [?] on Web Image Monitor.
msh> web help http://"Help URL or IP address"/help/
Deleting Help URL
msh> web clear help
264
wiconfig
Use the "wiconfig" command to make settings for wireless LAN.

View settings
msh> wiconfig
View wireless LAN settings
msh> wiconfig cardinfo
• If wireless LAN is not working correctly, its information is not displayed.
Configuration
msh> wiconfig "parameter"
mode {ap|802.11adhoc} You can set infrastructure mode (ap), or 802.11

ad hoc mode (802.11adhoc).
The default is infrastructure mode.
6
ssid "ID value" You can make settings for the SSID in the
infrastructure mode.
Usable characters are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32
bytes).
An SSID value is set automatically to the nearest
access point if no setting is made.
If no setting is made for the ad hoc mode, the
same value as for the infrastructure mode or an
ASSID value is automatically set. The default is
blank.
channel "channel no." You can enable or disable the WEP function. To
enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to disable
it, specify [off].
To start the WEP function, enter the correct WEP
key. The default is "11".
265
key "key value" val {1|2|3|4} You can specify the WEP key when entering in
hexadecimal.
With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit
hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use
26 digit hexadecimals.
Up to four WEP keys can be registered. Specify
the number to be registered with "val".
When a WEP is specified by key, the WEP
specified by key phrase is overwritten.
To use this function, set the same key number and
WEP key for all ports that transmit data to each
other. Put "0x" on the front of WEP key.
You can omit the numbers with "val". The key
number is set to 1 when making these omissions.
6 The default is blank.
keyphrase "phrase" val {1|2|3|4} You can specify the WEP key when entering in
ASCII.
With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit
hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use
26 digit hexadecimals.
Up to four WEP keys can be registered. Specify
the number to be registered with "val".
When a WEP is specified by key phrase, the
WEP specified by key is overwritten.
To use this function, set the same key number and
WEP key for all ports that transmit data to each
other.
You can omit the numbers with "val". The key
number is set to 1 when making these omissions.
encval {1|2|3|4} You can specify which of the four WEP keys is
used for packet encoding. "1" is set if a number
is not specified.
266
wepauth [open|shared] You can set an authorization mode when using

WEP. The specified value and authorized mode
are as follows:
open: open system authorized (default)
shared: shared key authorized rate
rate [auto|11m|5.5m|2m|1m] You can set the wireless LAN transmitting speed.
The speed you specify here is the speed at which
data is sent. You can receive data at any speed.
auto: automatically set (default)
11m: 11 Mbps fixed
5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed
2m:2 Mbps fixed
1m: 1 Mbps fixed
security {none|wep|wpa} You can specify the security mode.

6
none: No encryption(default)S
wep: WEP encryption
wpa: WPA encryption
wpaenc {tkip|ccmp} You can specify WPA encryption key when using
WPA encryption.
tkip: TKIP (default)
ccmp: CCMP (AES)
wpaauth {wpapsk | wpa} You can specify the WPA authentication mode
when using WPA encryption.
wpapsk: WPA-PSK authentication(default)
wpa: WPA(802.1X) authentication
psk "character string" You can specify the Pre-Shared key.

Usable characters: ASCII 0x20-0x7e (8 to 63
bytes).
267
eap {tls|ttls|leap|peap} {chap|mschap| You can specify the EAP authentication type.
mschapv2|pap|md5|tls} tls: EAP-TLS (default)
ttls: EAP-TTLS
leap: LEAP
peap: PEAP
chap, mschap, mschapv2, pap, md5, or tls are
settings for the phase 2 method, and must be set
when using EAP-TTLS or PEAP.
Do not make these settings when using other EAP
authentication types.
If you select EAP-TTLS, you can select chap,
mschap, mschapv2, pap, or md5.
If you select PEAP, you can select mschapv2 or
6 tls.
username "character string" You can specify the login user name for the
Radius server.
Usable characters: ASCII 0x20-0x7e(31 bytes)
other than "@". The default is blank.
username2 "character string" You can specify the phase 2 username for EAP-
TTLS/PEAP phase 2 authentication.
Usable characters: ASCII 0x20-0x7e (31 bytes)
domain "character string" You can specify the login domain name for the
Radius server.
Usable characters: ASCII0x20-0x7e (31 bytes)
password "character string" You can specify the login password for the
Radius server.
Usable characters: ASCII 0x20-0x7e(128
srvcert {on | off} You can set the server certificate. The default is
"off".
268
imca {on | off} You can enable or disable the certificate when
the intermediate certificate authority is present.
The default is "off".
srvid "character string" You can set the server ID and subdomain of the
certificate server.
• You can use this command only when the wireless LAN interface unit is installed.
wins
Use the "wins" command to configure WINS server settings.

Viewing settings
msh> wins 6
• If the IPv4 address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IPv4 address, the DHCP address
is the valid address.
Configuration
msh> wins "interface_name" {on | off}
• Be sure to specify the interface.
Address configuration
Use the following command to configure a WINS server IP address:
msh> wins "interface_name" {primary|secondary} "IP address"
• Use the "primary" command to configure a primary WINS server IPv4 address.
• Use the "secondary" command to configure a secondary WINS server IPv4 address.
• Do not use "255.255.255.255" as the IPv4 address.
269
NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Scope ID Selection

You can specify the NBT scope ID.
msh> wins "interface_name" scope "scope ID"
• The scope ID can be entered using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
• Be sure to specify the interface.
wsmfp
Use the “wsmfp” command to view and configure WS-MFP settings.

6 View settings
msh> wsmfp
Comment settings
msh> wsmfp comments “comment”
• If you do not specify a comment, current setting is displayed.
Location configuration
mah> wsmfp location “location”
• If you do not specify a comment, current setting is displayed.
Presentation URL configuration
msh> wsmfp url “URL”
• Ebter the URL string in the “URL”.
WS-Device TCP port configuration
msh> wsmfp devport “port_number”
• The Default is 53000.
WS-Printer TCP port configuration
msh> wsmfp prnport “port_number”
• The Default is 53001.
Timeout configuration
msh> wsmfp prntimeout [30-65535]
270
• The default is 900 seconds.

Comment initialization
msh> wsmfp clear comments
Location initialization
msh> wsmfp clear location
Presentation URL initialization
msh> wsmfp clear url
271
SNMP
Using the SNMP manager, you can get information about the printer.
The SNMP agent operating on UDP and IPX is incorporated into the built-in Ethernet board and optional
wireless LAN interface unit of this printer.
This printer also supports SNMPv3, which increases user authentication, data encryption, and access
control security.
To encrypt communication by SNMPv3, you must specify the printer's encrypted password.
• If you changed the printer's community name, change the configuration of the connected computer
accordingly, using SNMP Setup Tool. For details, see SNMP Setup Tool Help.
The default community names are [public] and [admin]. You can get MIB information using these community
names.
Start SNMP Setup Tool
• Windows XP/Vista:
6 Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin] on the [All Programs] menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
Supported MIBs(SNMPv1/v2)
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
• HostResourceMIB
• IPv6-TCP-MIB
• IPv6-UDP-MIB
• IPv6-MIB
• IPv6-ICMP-MIB
• RicohPrivateMIB
Supported MIBs(SNMPv3)
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
• HostResourceMIB
• IPv6-TCP-MIB
• IPv6-UDP-MIB
• IPv6-MIB
272
SNMP
• IPv6-ICMP-MIB
• RicohPrivateMIB
• SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
• SNMP-TARGET-MIB
• SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
• SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB
• SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB
273
Getting Printer Information over the Network

This section explains details of each item displayed in the printer status and information.
Current Printer Status
The printer status can be checked using the following commands:

• UNIX: Use the "lpq" command and "rsh", "rcp", "ftp" and "sftp" parameters.
• mshell: Use the "status" command.
Messages Description
Add staples (Booklet: Back) The staple of booklet finisher (back) is

exhausted.
Add staples (Booklet: Both) The staple of booklet finisher is exhausted.
6 Add staples (Booklet: Front) The staple of booklet finisher (front) is exhausted.
Adjusting... The printer is initializing or calibrating.
Call Service Center There is a malfunction in the printer.
Canceling Job... The job is being reset.
Configuring... Setting is being changed.
Cover Open: Bridge Unit Left The left cover of the Bridge Unit is open.
Cover Open: Bridge Unit Right The right cover of the Bridge Unit is open.
Cover Open: Duplex Unit The cover of the duplex unit is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Front The front cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Upper The upper cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Front The front cover is open.
Cover Open: Lower Right The lower right cover is open.
Cover Open: Lower Right Cover The lower right cover is open.
Cover Open: Mailbox The cover of the mailbox is open.
Cover Open: Upper Right Cover The upper right cover of the duplex unit is open.
274
Current Job Suspended Current job is suspended.
Empty: Black Toner The black toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Cyan Toner The cyan toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Magenta Toner The magenta toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Yellow Toner The yellow toner cartridge is almost empty.
Energy Saver Mode The printer is in Energy Saver Mode.
Error: Ethernet Board An Ethernet board error has occurred.
Error: HDD Board A hard disk drive board error has occurred.
Error: Optional Font An error has occurred in the font file of the printer.
Error: Optional RAM An error has occurred in the optional memory

unit. 6
Error: Parallel I/F Board An error has occurred in the parallel interface.
Error: PDL An error has occurred in the page description

language.
Error: Rem. Certificate Renewal An error has occurred in the remote certificate
renewal.
Error: USB Interface An error has occurred in the USB interface.
Error: Wireless Board An error has occurred in the wireless board.
Error: Wireless Card Wireless card is not inserted during start up, or
the wireless LAN interface unit or the wireless
card is taken out after start up.
Exceed Booklet Stapling Limit The printing has exceeded the stapling limit of
the booklet finisher.
Full: Finisher Booklet Tray Booklet tray of Finisher is full.
Full: Finisher Shift Tray Shift tray of Finisher is full.
Full: Finisher Upper Tray The upper tray of Finisher is full.
Full: Hole Punch Receptacle Punch Chip receptacle for hole punch is full.
275
Full: Mailbox Tray 1 Tray 1 of the mailbox is full.
Full: Output Tray(s) All the output paper trays are full.
Full: Standard Tray Standard output tray is full.
Full: Waste Toner Waste toner is full.
Hex Dump Mode It is a hex dump mode.
Independent-supplier Toner Toner that is not recommended is set.
Jobs Suspended All jobs are suspended.

6 Loading Toner... Toner is being supplied.
Low: Black Toner The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or
toner is almost running out.
Low: Cyan Toner The cyan toner cartridge is not set correctly, or
Low: Magenta Toner The magenta toner cartridge is not set correctly,
or toner is almost running out.
Low: Yellow Toner The yellow toner cartridge is not set correctly, or
Malfunction: Booklet Processor There is a problem with booklet finisher.
Malfunction: Finisher There is a problem with Finisher.
Malfunction: Output Tray There is a problem with output tray.
Malfunction: Staple Unit There is a problem with the staple unit.
Malfunction: Tray 1 There is a problem with tray 1.
276
Malfunction: Tray 3 (LCT) There is a problem with the large capacity tray.
Mismatch: Paper Size Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of
selected size.
Mismatch: Paper Size and Type Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of
selected size and type.
Mismatch: Paper Type Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of
selected type.
Near Replacing: Black PCU Prepare the new black photoconductor unit.
Near Replacing: Color PCU Prepare the new color photoconductor unit.
Near Replacing: Fusing Unit Prepare the new fusing unit. 6

Near Replacing: Int. Transfer Prepare the new transfer unit.
Nearly Full: Waste Toner Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Need more Staples Stapler has almost run out of staples.
No Paper: Selected Tray There is no paper in specified tray.
No Paper: Tray 1 There is no paper in tray 1.
No Paper: Tray 3 (LCT) There is no paper in the large capacity tray.
Not Detected: Black Toner Black toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Cyan Toner Cyan toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Fusing Unit The fusing unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Input Tray The paper feed tray is not correctly set.
277
Not Detected: Intermediate Transfer Unit The transfer unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Magenta Toner Magenta toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (C) The photoconductor unit (cyan) is not correctly
set.
Not Detected: PCU (K) The photoconductor unit (black) is not correctly
set.
Not Detected: PCU (M) The photoconductor unit (magenta) is not

correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (Y) The photoconductor unit (yellow) is not correctly
set.
Not Detected: Tray 1 Tray 1 is not correctly set.
6 Not Detected: Tray 2 Tray 2 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 3 (LCT) The large capacity tray is not correctly set.
Not Detected: WasteToner Bottle Waste toner bottle is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Yellow Toner Yellow toner is not correctly set.
Offline Printer is offline.
Paper in Finisher The paper remains in Finisher.
Paper Misfeed: Duplex Unit The paper has jammed in the duplex unit.
Paper Misfeed: Input Tray The paper has jammed in the input tray.
Paper Misfeed: Internal/Output The paper has jammed inside the printer.
Paper Misfeed: Mailbox The paper has jammed in the mailbox.
Printing... Printing is in progress.
Proxy User/Password Incorrect Proxy user name or Password is incorrect.
278
Ready The printer is ready to print.
Renewing Remote Certificate Remote Certificate is Renewing.
Replace Black PCU It is time to replace the black photoconductor

unit.
Replace Fusing Unit It is time to replace the fusing unit.
Replace Int. Transfer Unit It is time to replace the transfer unit.
Replace PCU (Color) It is time to replace the photoconductor unit

(color).
SD Card Authentication failed SD card authentication failed.
Supplies Order Call failed The supply order call has failed.
Tray Error: Duplex Printing Selected paper tray cannot be used for duplex
printing. 6
Warming Up... The printer is warming up.
• For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX Supplement.
• Check the error contents that may be printed in the configuration page. For details about printing a
configuration page, see p.162 "List/Test Print Menu".
Printer Configuration
You can check the printer configuration using telnet.

This section explains the checking procedure for input/output tray and printer language.
• UNIX: Use the "info" command and "rsh", "rcp", "ftp" and "sftp" parameters.
• mshell: Use the "info" command.
Input Tray
Item Description
No. ID number of the paper tray
279
Item Description
Name Name of the paper tray
PaperSize Size of paper loaded in the paper tray
status Current status of the paper tray

• Normal: Normal
• NoInputTray: No tray
• PaperEnd: No paper
Output Tray
Item Description
No. ID number of the output tray
Name Name of the output tray

6 status Current status of the output tray
• Normal: Normal
• PaperExist: Paper exist
• OverFlow: Paper is full
• Error: Other errors
Emulation
Item Description
No. ID number of the printer language used by the

printer
Name Name of the printer language used in the printer
Version Version of the printer language
• For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
• For details about mshell "info" commands, see p.234 "Remote Maintenance by telnet".
280
Understanding the Displayed Information

This section explains how to read status information returned by the network interface board.
Print Job Information
Use the following command to display print job information:

• UNIX: Use the "info" command and "rsh", "rcp", and "ftp" parameters.
• mshell: Use the "info" command.
Item Description
Rank Print job status.

• Active
Printing or preparing for printing.
• 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th...
6
Waiting to be transferred to the printer.
Owner Print request user name.
Job Print request number.
Files The name of the document.
Total Size The size of the data (spooled).

The default is 0 bytes.
Print Log Information
This is a record of the most recent 16 jobs printed.

Use the following command to display print log information:
• UNIX: Use the "prnlog" command and "rsh", "rcp", and "ftp" parameters.
• telnet : Use the "prnlog" command. See p.234 "Remote Maintenance by telnet".
281
Item Description
ID Print request ID.
User Print request user name.
Page Number of pages printed
Print Request Result

Communication Result
• OK
Print was completed normally. However, the
print result may not be as required due to
printer problems.
Result • NG
Printing was not completed normally.
• Canceled
6 An "rcp", "rsh", or "lpr" command print request
was canceled, possibly due to the printing
application. Not applicable to the "ftp" or
"rprinter" command.
Time Time the print requested was received.

Time of print request reception
Printer driver-configured User ID.

User ID
Appears when the print request ID is specified.
Name of the document for printing

JobName
Appears when the print request ID is specified.
Configuring the Network Interface Board
Use the following command to display network interface board settings:
282
• telnet : Use the "show" command.
Item Description
Common
Mode
Protocol Up/Down Protocol Settings
AppleTalk
IPv4
IPv6
IPsec
NetWare
SMB
PictBridge
6
Device Up/Down Device Settings
Parallel
USB
Bluetooth
Ethernet interface
Syslog priority
NVRAM version
Device name
Comment
Location
Contact
Soft switch
AppleTalk AppleTalk settings
Mode
283
Item Description
Net
Object
Type
Zone
TCP/IP TCP/IP settings
Mode(IPv4)
Mode(IPv6)
ftp
lpr
rsh
6 telnet
diprint
web
http
ftpc
snmp
ipp
autonet
bonjour
ssl
nrs
rfu
nbt
ssdp
ssh
284
Item Description
sftp
WSD (Device)
WSD (Printer)
rhpp
IPv4
DHCP
Address
Netmask
Broadcast
Gateway
IPv6
6
Stateless
Manual
Gateway
DHCPv6-lite
DUID
DHCPv6 option lifetime
IPsec
Manual Mode
Excluded Protocol
https
dns
dhcp
wins
EncapType
285
Item Description
Host name
DNS Domain
Access Control Access Control settings
IPv4
AccessEntry[X] X can be set between 1 and 5.
IPv6
AccessEntry[X] X can be set between 1 and 5.
SNTP Server Time settings
Time Zone
SNTP Server polling time

6 SYSLOG server Websys settings
Home page URL1
Home page linkname1
Home page URL2
Home page linkname2
Help page URL
RHPP Port
RHPP timeout
NetWare
EncapType
RPRINTER number
Print server name
File server name
Context name
Switch
286
Item Description
Mode
NDS/Bindery
Packet negotiation
Login Mode
Print job timeout
Protocol
SAP interval time
NDS Tree Name
Transfer Protocol
SMB SMB settings
Switch
6
Mode
Direct print
Notification
Workgroup name
Computer name
Comment
Share name[1]
Protocol
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN settings
Host Name
Communication Mode
SSID
Channel
Security
287
Item Description
WEP Authentication
WEP Encryption key number
WEP Encryption keys [X] X can be set between 1 and 4.
WPA Encryption
WPA Authentication
Pre-Shared Key
User name
Domain name
EAP Type
Password
6 Phase 2 user name
Phase 2 Method TTLS
Phase 2 Method PEAP
Server cert.
Intermediate CA
Server ID
Sub domain
MIC check
Ethernet
802.1X Authentication
DNS DNS settings
IPv4
Server[X] X can be set between 1 and 3.
Selected IPv4 DNS Server
IPv6
288
Item Description
Server[X] X can be set between 1 and 3.
Selected IPv6 DNS Server
Resolver Protocol
Domain Name
ether
wlan
DDNS
ether
wlan
WINS WINS settings
ether
6
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
wlan
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
Bluetooth
Bluetooth mode
SSDP SSDP settings
UUID
Profile
TTL
UPnP UPnP settings
URL
Bonjour Bonjour (Rendezvous) settings
289
Item Description
Computer Name (cname)
Local Hostname (ether)
Local Hostname (wlan)
Location
Priority (diprint)
Priority (lpr)
Priority (ipp)
IP TTL
LinkLocal Route for Multi I/F
IPP Port
6 SNMP SNMP settings
SNMPv1v2
SNMPv3
protocol
v1Trap
v2Trap
v3Trap
SNMPv1v2 Remote Setting
SNMPv3 Privacy
ssh ssh settings
Compression
Port
TimeOut
Login TimeOut
AuthFree Authfree settings
290
Item Description
IPv4
AuthFreeEntry[X] X can be set between 1 and 5.
IPv6
AuthFreeEntry[X] X can be set between 1 and 5
Parallel
USB
LPR
lprm check host
lpr prnerrchk
Certificate
Verification
6
IEEE 802.1X
User name
Domain name
EAP Type
Password
Phase 2 user name
Phase 2 Method TTLS
Phase 2 Method PEAP
Server cert.
Intermediate CA
Server ID
Sub domain
Shell mode Remote maintenance tool mode
291
Message List
This is a list of messages that appear in the printer's system log. The system log can be viewed using the
"syslog" command.
System Log Information
Use the following command to display the system log information:

• UNIX: Use the "syslog" command and "rsh", "rcp", "ftp", and "sftp" parameters.
• telnet: Use the "syslog" command.
Message Problem and solutions
Access to NetWare server <file server name> (In the print server mode) Login to the file server
denied. Either there is no account for this print server failed. Make sure that the print server is registered
on the NetWare server on the password was on the file server. If a password is specified for the
6 incorrect. print server, delete it.
account is unavailable: encryption is impossible. Encryption is not possible and account is disabled.
This could be because:
• Security option is not installed.
• Encryption password has not been specified.
account is unavailable: same account name be User account is disabled. This could be because it
used. uses the same account name as the administrator
account.
account is unavailable: The authentication User account is disabled. This could be because the
password is not set up. authentication password is not set, and only the
encryption account is set.
add_sess_IPv4: bad trap addr:<IPv4 address>, The IPv4 address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when the
community:<community name> community access type is TRAP. Specify the host
IPv4 address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess_IPv4: community<community name> The same community name already exists. Use
already defined. another community name.
add_sess_IPv6: bad trap addr:<IPv6 address>, The IPv6 address [::] is unavailable when the
community:<community name> community access type is TRAP. Specify the host
IPv6 address for the TRAP destination.
292
Message List
add_sess_IPv6: community <community name> The same community name already exists. Use
add_sess_IPX: bad trap addr:<IPX The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is

address>community <community name> unavailable when the community access type is
TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the TRAP
destination.
add_sess_IPX: community <community name> The same community name already exists. Use
adjust time server <NTP server> offset:XX sec. ncsd tells you the timing of the NTP server and
whether or not the time system clock is set.
Attach FileServer =<file server> Connection to the file server as the nearest server
has been established.
Attach to print queue <print queue name> (In the print server mode) Attached to the print
queue. 6
btd is disabled. Communication via Bluetooth is unavailable
because btd is disabled in the security mode.
Enable the btd in the security mode.
centrod is disabled. Communication via parallel connections

unavailable because centrod is disabled in the
security mode.
Enable centrod in the security mode.
child process exec error! (process name) The network service failed to start. Turn the printer
off and then on. If this does not work, contact your
service or sales representative.
Connected DHCPv 6 server (IPv 6 address) The IP address was successfully received from the
DHCPv 6 server.
connection from <IP address> A user logged in from the host <IP address>.
Could not attach to FileServer <error number> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the file
server has not been established. The file server has
refused the connection. Check the file server
configuration.
293
Could not attach to PServer <printer server name> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the print
server has not been established. The print server
has refused the connection. Check the print server
configuration.
Current Interface Speed: <EhternetI/F speed> Speed of the Ehternet interface (10Mbps, 100
Mbps, or 1Gbps).
Current IPX address <IPX address> Current IPX address
DHCPv6 server not found. The DHCPv6 server was not found. Make sure that
the DHCPv6 is on the network.
Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from<MAC address>). The same IP address (IPv4, or IPv6 address) was
used. Each IP address (IPv4, or IPv6 address) must
be unique. Check the address of the device
indicated in <MAC address>.
6 Established SPX Connection with PServer , (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the print
(RPSocket=<socket number>, server has been established.
connID=<connection ID>)
Exit pserver (In the print server mode) The print server function
is disabled because the necessary print server
settings have not been made.
Frametype=<frame type name> The frame type name is configured to be used on

NetWare.
IEEE 802.11 <communication mode> mode Displays Wireless LAN communication mode
(infrastructure, or 802.11 ad hoc).
IEEE 802.11 Card does NOT support WPA . A wireless card that does not support WPA is
installed. Install a wireless card that supports WPA.
IEEE 802.11 Card Firmware REV.<version> Displays the version number of the 802.11 card's
firmware.
IEEE 802.11 current channel <channel number> Displays the current channel number of the active
wireless card (in ad hoc and infrastructure mode).
IEEE 802.11 MAC Address = <MAC address> Displays the MAC address of the wireless interface.
294
Message List
IEEE 802.11 SSID <ssid> (AP MAC Address The MAC address and SSID of the access point are
<MAC address>) connected in infrastructure mode.
(IKE phase-1) mismatched authentication type: This machine's <authentication type 1> in IKE phase
local=<authentication type 1> 1 does not match the communicating host's
remote=<authentication type 2> <authentication type 2>, Make sure this machine's
ISAKMP SA authentication type matches that of the
communicating host.
(IKE phase-1) mismatched DH group: local=<DH This machine's ISAKMP SA Oakley group <DH
group number 1> remote=<DH group number 2> group number 1> in IKE phase 1 does not match
the communicating host's ISAKMP SA Oakley
group <DH group number 2>, Make sure this
machine's ISAKMP SA Oakley group matches that
of the communicating host.
(IKE phase-1) mismatched encryption type: This machine's ISAKMP SA Oakley group
local=<encryption algorithm 1> <encryption algorithm 1> in IKE phase 1 does not 6
remote=<encryption algorithm 2> match the communicating host's ISAKMP SA
Oakley group < encryption algorithm 2>, Make
sure this machine's ISAKMP SA Oakley group
matches that of the communicating host.
(IKE phase-1) mismatched hash type: local=<Hash This machine's ISAKMP SA <Hash Algorithm 1> in
Algorithm 1> remort=<Hash Algorithm 2> IKE phase 1 does not match the communicating
host's ISAKMP SA <Hash Algorithm 2>, Make sure
this machine's ISAKMP SA Hash Algorithm matches
that of the communicating host.
IKE[%s] is disable, set PSK text.
inetd start. The inetd service has started.
< Interface > started with IP: < IP address > IP address (IPv4, or IPv4 address) has been set for
the interface and is operating.
The spooled job was canceled due to error or user

job canceled. jobid=<job ID>.
request.
The resource lease time received from the DHCP

LeaseTime=< lease time >(sec), RenewTime=< server is displayed in < lease time > in seconds. The
renew time >(sec). renewal time is displayed in < renew time > in
seconds.
295
Login to fileserver <file server name>(<IPX| (In the print server mode) Login to the file server is
IP>,<NDS|BINDERY>) in the NDS or BINDERY mode.
Manual[%s] is disable, set authentication key.
Manual[%s] is disable, set encryption key.
Name registration of <NetBIOSName> failed.

Name registration failed. name=<NetBIOS name>
Change to different NetBIOS name.
Name registration success . WINS Server =<WINS Name registration of <NetBIOS Name> to <WINS
server address> NetBIOS Name=<NetBIOS server address> was successful.
name>
Name registration success in Broadcast name Name registration by Broadcast name of

=<NetBIOS name> <NetBIOS Name> was successful.
(In the remote printer mode) The NetWare service

6 npriter start. (NetWare)
has started.
(In the print server mode) The specified log file has
Open log file <file name>
been opened.
(In the print server mode) The print queue cannot

Print queue <print queue name> cannot be serviced
be established. Make sure that print queue exists
by printer 0, <print server name>
on the specified file server.
(In the print server mode) The printer is not assigned

Print server <print server name> has no printer to the print server. Using NWadmin, assign the
printer, and then restart it.
No more print jobs can be accepted. Wait a while

print sessions full
before sending any more print jobs.
(In the print server mode) The print queue is not

Printer <printer name> has no queue assigned to the printer. Using NWadmin, assign the
print queue to the printer, and then restart it.
(In the print server mode) The NetWare service has

pserver start. (NetWare)
started.
Required file server (<file server name>) not found The required file server is not found.
296
Message List
The SAP function has started. The SAP packet is

sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sapname=<SAP
issued to advertise the service on the SAP table on
name>
the NetWare server.
session_IPv4 <community name> not defined. The requested community name is not defined.
session_IPv6 <community name> not defined. The requested community name is not defined.
session_ipx <community name> not defined. The requested community name is not defined.
Set context to <NDS context name> An NDS context name has been set.
shutdown signal received. network service The smbd service has started.
rebooting...
Smbd start. (NetBIOS) SMBD (ServerMessageBlockDaemon) has been

started.
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. Connection to the SMTP server failed. This could be
because no connection to the network has been
6
established, or the network configuration is
incorrect, so there is no response from the SMTP
server, or the specified SMTP server name is
incorrect, or the specified SMTP server IP address
could not be found in the DNS server, or a server
other than the SMTP server has been specified, or
the specified SMTP server port number is incorrect.
Check the DNS Server's IP address and SMTP
server's IP address, or the SMTP server name and
SMTP port number, or the SMTP server's SMTP port
number, or the network connection and
configuration.
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. timeout. Connection to the SMTP server failed due to
timeout. This could be because the specified SMTP
server name is incorrect, or no connection to the
network has been established, or the network
configuration is incorrect, so there is no response
from the SMTP server. Check the SMTP server
name, or the network connection and
configuration.
297
SMTPC: failed to get smtp server ip-address. The SMTP server IP address could not be obtained.
This could be because:
• The specified DNS server could not be found.
• No connection to the network has been
established.
• The specified DNS server could not be found.
• An incorrect DNS server is specified.
• The specified SMTP server IP address could
not be found in the DNS server.
SMTPC: no smtp server. connection close. Connection to the SMTP server failed due to no
response from SMTP. This could be because a
server other than the SMTP server has been
specified, or the specified SMTP server port number
is incorrect. Check the SMTP server name, port
6 number, or the SMTP server port number.
SMTPC: refused connect by smtp server. Connection to the SMTP server is denied. This could
be because server other than the SMTP server has
been specified, or the specified SMTP server port
number is incorrect. Check the SMTP server name,
port number, or the SMTP server port number.
SMTPC: username or password wasn't correct. Connection to the SMTP server failed, because the
[response code] (information) specified SMTP user name is incorrect, or the
specified SMTP password is incorrect. Check the
SMTP user name and password.
Snmp over IPv4 is ready Communication over IPv4 with snmp is available.
Snmp over IPv6 is ready. Communication over IPv6 with snmp is available.
Snmp over IPX is ready. Communication over IPX with snmp is available.
snmpd start. The snmpd service has started.
The print server received error <error number> Login to the file server failed. The print server is not
during attempt to log in to the network. Access to registered or a password is specified. Register the
the network was denied . Verify that the print server print server without specifying a password.
name and password are correct .
298
Message List
trap account is unavailable. v3Trap cannot be sent. This could be because the
Trap destination account is different from the
account specified by the printer.
Updated (option name) (value) via DHCPv6 Server The parameter obtained from the DHCP server has
been updated.
WINS name registration: No response to server There was no response from the WINS server.
(WINS server address) Check the correct WINS server address is entered.
Alternatively, check the WINS server is functioning
properly.
WINS wrong scopeID =< scopeID > An invalid scope ID was used. Use a valid scope
ID.
write error occurred.(diskfull) A "diskfull" error occurred while the printer was
writing to the spool file. Wait for the current print
job to finish. When it finishes, more HDD space will 6
be available. Only page that were spooled when
the error occurred will be printed.
write error occurred.(fatal) A fatal error occurred while the printer was writing
to the spool file. Turn off the power of the printer,
and then turn it on again. If the error recurs, contact
your service representative. The print job that was
being spooled when the error occurred will not be
printed.
• For details about "syslog" command, see p.234 "Remote Maintenance by telnet".
299
300
This chapter explains how to configure this printer to work as a network printer.
Preparing Printer Server

This section explains how to configure the printer as a Windows network printer. The printer is configured
to enabling network clients to use it. When the network printer is connected via SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client, you can set the printing notification function to notify clients of the results of their print jobs.
• Under Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2, to change printer properties
in the [Printer] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows Vista or
Windows Server 2008, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator
or member of the PowerUsers group.
1. Open the [Printers and Faxes] window from the [Start] menu.
2. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The printer
properties appear.
3. On the [Sharing] tab, click [Share this printer]. 7
4. To share the printer with users using a different version of Windows, click [Additional
Drivers...].
If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting [Share As:] during the printer driver installation,
this step can be ignored.
5. Click [OK], and then close the printer properties.
Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Follow the procedure below to configure the printer to use the printing notification function of
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
Setting the print server
• Under Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2, to change printer properties
in the [Printer] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows Vista or
Windows Server 2008, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator
or member of the PowerUsers group.
301
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [DeskTopBinder], [SmartDeviceMonitor for

Client], and then click [Print Server Setting].
The print server setting dialog box appears.
2. Select the [Notify client PCs of printout/data-transmission] check box, and then click [OK].
After print server setting is made, a dialog box appears. Confirm the dialog box content, and click
[OK].
Click [Cancel] to interrupt the procedure.
A dialog box appears for client setting.
3. Click [OK].
The print server setting is completed. Each client must be set to receive print notification.
• Current printing jobs restart from the beginning after the spooler pauses briefly.
• When the expansion function is not used, the function is automatically set as available.
• If you log on using an account that does not have Administrator privileges, the client may not be
notified.
• For details, see "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client".
7 • p.224 "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client"
Setting a client
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], [DeskTopBinder], [SmartDeviceMonitor for

Client], and then click [Extended Features Settings].
A dialog box for setting the expansion function appears.
2. Select the [Notify of printout/data-transmission when using print server] check box.
3. Click [OK].
The client setting is completed.
• Set the printing notification function on the printer driver as well as on SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client.
302
Using NetWare
Using NetWare
This section describes the setting procedure for network printers in the NetWare environment. In the
NetWare environment, you can connect the printer as a “print server” or “remote printer”.
• IPv6 cannot be used on this function.

Setting procedure
• When using the printer as a print server
1. Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
2. Setting the network interface board.
3. Turning the printer off and then back on.
• When using the printer as a remote printer
1. Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
2. Setting the network interface board.
3. Setting NetWare.
4. Starting the print server.
7
• This procedure assumes an environment is already prepared for normal NetWare running
the printing service setting.
• The procedure is explained with the following example settings:
• File server's name ...CAREE
• Print server's name ...PSERV
• Printer's name ...R-PRN
• Queue name ...R-QUEUE
To use the printer in a NetWare environment, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin to set the NetWare
printing environment.
Printers listed by SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin lists printers connected to the network. If you cannot identify the printer
you want to configure, print configuration page, and then check the printer name.
• The NetWare Client provided by Novell is required to set the printing environment using
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin under the following environments:
• NDS or Bindery mode in Windows 2000/XP
303
• For details about SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin".
• p.208 "Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin"
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)
Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server using NetWare 3.x.

2. Click [Login].
A dialog box for entering the login user name and password appears.
4. Click [Configuration] in the left area, and then click [NetWare Print Settings].
• Print Server Name: Enter the NetWare print server name. To use the interface board as a print
server, enter the name of a print server that is not active on the file server. Use up to 47 characters.
• Logon Mode: Specify whether to designate a file server or NDS tree when logging on to
7 NetWare.
• File Server Name: When a file server name is entered here, only the specified file server is
searched for. This item is mandatory. Use up to 47 characters.
• NDS Tree: To enable NDS mode, enter the name of the NDS tree you want to log on to. Use up
to 32 alphanumeric characters.
• NDS Context Name: To enable NDS mode, enter the print server context. Use up to 127
characters.
• Operation Mode: Specify whether to use the interface board as a print server or a remote printer.
• Remote Printer No.: This item is effective when the interface board is specified as a remote printer.
Enter the same number as the number of the printer to be created on the print server (0 to 254
characters).
• Job Timeout: When the interface board is used as a NetWare remote printer, the printer cannot
detect when a print job ends. Therefore, the printer terminates printing when a certain period of
time has elapsed since it last received print data (i.e., when it has not received print data for a
certain period of time). Specify here this period of time (3 to 255 seconds). The initial value is
15 (seconds).
• Frame Type: Select the frame type from the drop-down menu.
• Print Server Protocol: Select the protocol for NetWare from the drop-down menu.
• NCP Delivery Protocol: Select the protocol for NCP delivery.
304
Using NetWare
5. Confirm the settings, and then click [Device Name].

Configuration is now complete. Wait several before restarting Web Image Monitor.
6. Click [Logout].
• To check the configuration is correct, enter the following from the command prompt:
F:> USERLIST
• If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as a connected user.
• If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check the printer name against the
configuration page printed from the printer. For details about printing a configuration page, see "Test
Printing", Quick Installation Guide.
• If no printer names appear in the list, match the frame types of IPX/SPXs for the computer and printer.
Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of the computer.
• For details about Web Image Monitor, see "Using Web Image Monitor".
• For details about login user names and passwords, see Security Guide, which is the administrator's
manual.

7
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5)
Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server using NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5 / 5.1,
or NetWare 6 / 6.5.
• When using the printer as a print server in NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5 / 5.1, or NetWare 6 / 6.5,
set it to the NDS mode.
• When using NetWare 5 / 5.1 or NetWare 6 / 6.5, set the printer as a print server.

2. Click [Login].
A dialog box for entering the login user name and password appears.
Configuration is now complete. Wait several minutes before restarting Web Image Monitor.
305
6. Click [Logout].
• To check the configuration is correct, enter the following from the command prompt:
F:> USERLIST
• If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as a connected user.
manual.
7 Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5 / 5.1 or 6 / 6.5 Environment
Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare
5 / 5.1 or NetWare 6 / 6.5.
• When creating a queued print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare 5 / 5.1 or NetWare 6 /
6.5, create a print queue on the file server using NetWare Administrator.
• This printer is not available as a remote printer for use in a pure IP environment.
• To use the printer in a pure IP environment, set it to IPv4.
Setting up using NWadmin
1. From Windows, start NWadmin.

For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.
2. Select the object in which the print queue is located in the directory tree, and then click
[Create] on the [Object] menu.
3. In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Queue], and then click [OK].
4. In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue.
5. In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse].
306
Using NetWare
6. In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and then
click [OK].
7. Check the settings, and then click [Create].
8. Select the object in which the printer is located, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
9. In the [Class of new object] box, click [Printer], and then click [OK]. For NetWare 5, click
[Printer (Non NDPS)].
10. In the [Printer name] box, enter the printer name.
11. Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
12. Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
13. In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you created, and then click [OK].
14. Click [Configuration], click [Parallel] in the [Printer type] list, and then click
[Communication].
15. Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] area, and then click [OK].
16. Check the settings, and then click [OK].
17. Select a context specified, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
18. In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Server], and then click [OK]. For NetWare 5,
click [Print Server (Non NDPS)].
19. In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the print server name. 7
Use the same print server name specified using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
21. Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
23. Check the settings, and then click [OK].
24. Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.
To quit
CAREE: unload pserver
To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
Setting up using Web Image Monitor

2. Click [Login].
307
3. Enter the user login user name and password, and then click [Login].
For details about the login name and password, contact your administrator.
6. Click [Logout].
manual.
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x)
Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare 3.x.
Setting up using PCONSOLE
1. Enter “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.

F:> PCONSOLE
2. Create a print queue.
When using the existing print queue, go to the procedure for creating a printer.
3. From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information], and then press the
[Enter] key.
4. Press [Insert] key, and then enter a print queue name.
5. Press [Esc] key to return to the [Available Options] menu.
6. Set up the network connection to a printer.
7. On the [Available Options] menu, click [Print Server Information], and then press the [Enter]
key.
308
Using NetWare
8. To create a new print server, press the [Insert] key, and then enter a print server name.
For a currently defined print server, select a print server in the [Print Server] list.
Use the same printer name specified using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
9. From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
10. From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration].
11. Select the printer indicated as [Not Installed].
Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin.
12. To change the printer name, enter a new name.
A name “printer x” is assigned to the printer. The “x” stands for the number of the selected printer.
13. As type, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1].
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured.
14. Press the [Esc] key, and then click [Yes] on the confirmation message.
15. Press the [Esc] key to return to [Print Server Configuration Menu].
16. Assign print queues to the created printer.
17. From [Print Server Configuration Menu], select [Queues Serviced By Printer].
18. Select the printer created.
7
19. Press the [Insert] key to select a queue serviced by the printer.
You can select several queues.
20. Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.
Following these steps, check that the queues are assigned.
21. Press the [Esc] key until “Exit?” appears, and then select [Yes] to exit PCONSOLE.
To quit
To start
If the printer works as configured, the message “Waiting for job” appears.

2. Click [Login].
309
6. Click [Logout].
manual.
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5)
Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1 and 6 /
6.5.
• To use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare 4.x, 5 / 5.1, 6 / 6.5, set it to NDS mode.
• Do not use the printer as a remote printer when Pure IP is used.
Setting up using NWadmin
1. From Windows, start NWadmin.

For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.
2. Set up the network connection to a print queue. Select the object in which the print queue is
located in the directory tree, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
3. In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Queue], and then click [OK].
4. In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue.
5. In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse].
310
Using NetWare
6. In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and then
click [OK].
7. Check the settings, and then click [Create].
8. Set up the network connection to a printer. Select the object in which the printer is located,
and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
9. In the [Class of new object] box, click [Printer], and then click [OK]. For NetWare 5, click
[Printer (Non NDPS)].
10. In the [Printer name] box, enter the printer name.
12. Assign print queues to the created printer. Click [Assignments, and then click [Add] in the
[Assignments] area.
14. Click [Configuration], click [Parallel] in the [Printer type] list, and then click
[Communication].
15. Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] area, and then click [OK]. Check the
settings, and then click [OK].
16. Set up the network connection to a print server. Select a context specified, and then click
[Create] on the [Object] menu.
17. In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Server], and then click [OK]. For NetWare 5,
7
click [Print Sever (Non NDPS)].
18. In the [Print Server Name:] box, enter the print server name.
Use the same print server name specified using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
20. Assign the printer to the created print server. Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in
the [Assignments] area.
22. In the [Printers] area, click the printer you assigned, and then click [Printer Number].
23. Enter the printer number, and then click [OK]. Check the settings, and then click [OK].
Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin.
To exit
To start
311
25. Enter the printer server name as the context name, and then press the [Enter] key.
26. Select the printer name on the context menu, and then press the [Enter] key.

2. Click [Login].
3. Enter the user login name and password, and then click [Login].
6. Click [Logout].
7 Printing", Quick Installation Guide.
manual.
312
This chapter explains how to use this printer with a Mac.
Mac OS 9
This section explains how to configure a Mac OS to use AppleTalk and USB.
The following explains how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are not using Mac OS 9.1, see the manual
of the Mac OS you are using for details.
• For Mac OS 8.6 and higher. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)
• The PostScript 3 printer driver is stored in “Mac OS 8 and 9:PS Driver:(language):Disk1” on the CD-
ROM.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File
It is necessary to install a printer driver and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files to print from a Mac
OS.
Follow the procedure below to install a printer driver and a PPD file into a Mac OS using Mac OS 8.6 and
higher. 8
PostScript 3 Printer Driver

2. Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
3. Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
4. Double-click the [PS Driver] folder.
5. Double-click the folder of the language you use.
6. Open [Disk1], and then double-click the installer icon.
PPD Files

3. Double-click the [Printer Descriptions] folder.
4. Double-click the folder of the language you use.
313
5. Open the [Disk1] folder.

6. Drag the PPD file and the plugin file into [Printer Descriptions] in [Extensions] under [System
Folder].
7. Restart the Mac OS.
Setting Up PPD Files
• Make sure that the printers are connected to an AppleTalk network before performing the following
procedure.
1. On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser].

2. Click the Adobe PS icon.
3. In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want to use.
4. Click [Create].
5. Click the printer you want to use, and then click [Select].
6. A PPD file is set up and the Adobe PS icon appears at the left of the printer name in the list.
Creating a Desktop Printer Icon
8
• Make sure that printers are connected to the USB before performing the following procedure.
To use a printer connected by USB, create a desktop printer icon.
1. Double-click [Desktop Printer Utility] in the [AdobePS Components] folder.

2. Click [AdobePS] in [With], click [Printer (USB) in] Create Desktop, and then click [OK].
3. Click [Change] in [USB Printer Selection].
4. Select the model you are using in [Select a USB Printer:], and then click [OK].
5. Click [Create].
6. Enter the printer name, and then click [Save].
7. Quit Desktop Printer Utility.
Setting Up Options
1. On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser].

2. Click the Adobe PS icon.
314
Mac OS 9
3. In the [Select the PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and
then click [Setup...].
4. Click [Configure].
A list of options appears.
5. Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it.
6. Click [OK].
The list of options closes.
7. Click [OK].
The [Chooser] dialog box appears.
8. Close the [Chooser] dialog box.
• If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete
the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.
Installing the ColorSync Profiles
ColorSync profiles enable a printer to print colors consistent with those on the computer display. You must
install the ColorSync profile to use this function.
Follow the procedure below to install the ColorSync profiles.
1. Start a Mac OS. 8

2. Double-click the hard disk icon, and then open the appropriate folder for installing the
ColorSync profiles.
The location of the appropriate folder may vary depending on the version of the Mac OS. The
following are examples:
• System: Preferences: ColorSync profiles
• System: ColorSync profiles
The CD-ROM drive icon appears.
The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
6. Double-click the [ColorSync Profiles] folder.
7. Drag the file to the [ColorSync Profiles] folder under [System Folder].
The ColorSync profiles are installed.
315
The ColorSync profiles are consistent with color characteristics defined by the International Color
Consortium (ICC).
For some computer displays, particular settings need to be created by ColorSync. For details, see the
appropriate manuals for your computer display.
Installing Adobe Type Manager
• Quit all applications currently running before installation. Install ATM after you restart the computer.
1. Start a Mac OS.

3. Double-click the CD-ROM drive con.
5. Double-click the [ATM] folder.
6. Double-click the ATM 4.6.2 installer icon.
8. When the procedure is complete, restart the computer. ATM will be completely installed only
after restarting.
9. On the [Apple] menu, open [Control Panel], and then click [~ATM].
8 The ATM control panel opens.
• For details about installation, see the operating instructions in the ATM folder.
Installing Screen Fonts
Follow the procedure below to install screen fonts.

The screen fonts described below can be found in the [Fonts] folder on the CD-ROM.
1. Start a Mac OS.

The CD-ROM drive icon appears.
5. Double-click the [Fonts] folder.
316
Mac OS 9
6. Double-click the [ScreenFonts] folder.

7. Double-click the [TrueType] or Type1 folder.
Select the font type you want to use.
8. Copy the fonts you want to install in Fonts under [System Folder].
9. A confirmation message appears.
10. Click [OK].
The fonts are installed.
11. Restart the Mac OS.
Changing to AppleTalk
Follow the procedure below to configure to a Mac OS to use AppleTalk.
1. Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the AppleTalk icon.

2. On the [Connect via:] pop-up menu, click [Ethernet].
3. If you change zones, select a name on the [OK] pop-up menu.
4. Close the AppleTalk control panel.
5. Restart the computer.
• The procedures used to configure Mac OS may vary depending on the Mac OS version. The 8
following describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are using a different version of Mac
OS, use the following procedures as a reference and see the manuals for your Mac OS version.
• Confirm the Connection to the Printer with TCP/IP.
• For information about installing applications required for AppleTalk, see the Mac OS manuals.
317
Mac OS X
This section explains how to configure a Mac OS X to use AppleTalk and USB.
Follow the procedure below to configure Mac OS X 10.1. If you are not using Mac OS X 10.1, see the
manual of the Mac OS X you are using for details.
• For Mac OS X 10.1 or higher.
• The PPD files are stored in “Mac OS X:PPD Installer”on the CD-ROM.
Installing the PPD Files
Follow the procedure below to install a PPD file to print from Mac OS X.
• You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, contact your administrator.

3. Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
8 4. Double-click the [MacOSX PPD Installer] folder.

5. Double-click the installer icon.
Setting Up the PPD File
1. Start Printer Setup Utility.

Under Mac OS X 10.5, start System Preferences and click [Print & FAX].
2. Click Add.
Mac OS X 10.5
Click [Default]. If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your
network environment such as AppleTalk.
When several AppleTalk zones exist on the network, select the zone the printer belongs to.
Mac OS X 10.4 or later
Click [More Printers...]. Then select the zone from the second pop-up menu.
318
Mac OS X
Other Mac OS X
Click [AppleTalk] on the first pop-up menu.
If the zone is set, select the zone from the second pop-up menu.
3. Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [Printer Model:] pop-up menu.
Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, select the printer you are using from the [Print Using] popup menu.
Under Mac OS X 10.5, select the printer you are using from the [Printer Name] list.
A list of printer types appears.
4. Select the PPD file for the model you are using, and then click Add.
5. Quit Printer Setup Utility.
Setting Up Options
1. Start System Preferences.

2. Click [Print & Fax].
3. In the [Printer] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [Printer
Setup...].
4. Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it.
5. Click [Apply Changes].
• If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete
8
the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.
Using USB Interface
Follow the procedure below to setup USB connection.

2. Click Add.
Mac OS X 10.5
Click [Default].
Click a printer that has "USB" indicated in the "Connection" column.
Other Mac OS X
Click [USB] on the pop-up menu.
319
The connected printer appears.

3. Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [Printer Model:] pop-up menu.
Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, you are using from the [Print Using] pop-up menu.
A list of printer types appears.
Under Mac OS X 10.5, select the printer you are using from the [Printer Name] list, and [kind] of USB.
4. Select the connected printer from the list of printer models, and then click Add.
• When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, printer language does not
change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer to change printer language to [Auto]
or [PS] before printing.
• USB2.0 can be used only with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.
Using Bonjour
Follow the procedure below to print using Bonjour under Mac OS X 10.2.3 or higher. Ethernet, wireless
LAN connections can also be used.

8 2. Click Add.
Mac OS X 10.5
Click [Default]. If the printer name is not displayed, select the icon that corresponds to your
network environment such as AppleTalk.
When several AppleTalk zones exist on the network, select the zone the printer belongs to.
Click a printer that has "Bonjour" indicated in the "Connection" column.
Other Mac OS X
Click [Rendezvous] on the pop-up menu.
3. Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models, and then click Add.
Under Mac OS X 10.4 or later, Installable Options window appears. Select the option you want to
set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it, and then [Continue].
Under Mac OS X 10.5, select the printer you are using from the [Printer Name] list, and [kind] of
bonjour.
320
Mac OS X

When printing with a Rendezvous connection to a Macintosh computer, printer language does not
change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer to change printer language to [Auto] or
[PS] before printing.
Changing to AppleTalk
Follow the procedure below to configure a Mac OS X to use AppleTalk.
• You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, contact your administrator.
1. Open [System Preference], and then click the Network icon.

2. Click [Built-in Ethernet] in the [Show:] list box.
3. Click the [AppleTalk] tab.
4. Select the [Make AppleTalk Active] check box.
5. To change Apple Talk zones, select a name from the [AppleTalk Zone:] pop-up menu.
6. When the settings are made, click [Apply Now].
7. Quit [System Preference].
• For information about installing applications required for AppleTalk, see the Mac OS manuals.
8
321
Configuring the Printer

Use the control panel to enable Apple Talk. (The default is active.)
322
Using PostScript 3
Using PostScript 3
Job Type
Use this to select the type of print job.

The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Mac OS [Job Type:] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Job Type:] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box.
You can select the following items:

Normal Print
Select this for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after the print command is given.
Sample Print
Use this function to print only one set of a multiple print jobs.
The other sets are saved in the printer. The saved job can be printed from the printer's control panel.
You can also delete the saved job.
• The "User ID:" can contain up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters.

• Entering the "User ID:" helps you distinguish your print job from others.
8
Locked Print
Use this function to save documents in the printer memory with a password, and then edit and print
them as you want.
• The "User ID:" can contain to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. The "Password"
must be 4-8 digits.
Hold Print
Use this function to temporarily hold a file in the printer, and print it from the computer or the printer's
control panel later.
• The "User ID:" can contain up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters.

• The "File Name:" can contain to 16 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
323
Stored Print
Use this function to store a file in the printer, and then print it from the computer or the printer's control
panel later.
• The "User ID:" can contain up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters. The "Password"
must be 4-8 digits.
• You can assign a password to a saved document, but password assignment is not mandatory.
Store and Print
Use this function to prints the file at once and also stores the file in the printer.
• The "User ID:" can contain up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9) characters. The "Password"
must be 4-8 digits.
• You can assign a password to a saved document, but password assignment is not mandatory.
Using sample print

8
• You need Mac OS X v10.2 or higher to use this function.
• The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents of the print images. At
most, the printer can save 100 jobs or 9,000 pages for Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print and
Stored Print.
• Sample Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been executed or deleted
using the Web browser before you select [Sample Print] from the control panel.
• Sample Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you select [Sample Print] using
to print or delete those Sample Print files.
• If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By
default, sample print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is
selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.
• Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check the error log for jobs
not saved.
324
Using PostScript 3
• When there are 100 Sample Print, Locked Print, Hold Print and Stored Print jobs saved on the
hard disk.
• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 9,000 pages.
1. In the application, on the [File] menu, click [Print].

2. Set the number of copies to two or more.
The sample print job is sent to the printer, and one set is printed.
3. In the pop-up menu, click [Job Log].
4. On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, select [Sample Print].
5. In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9)
characters.
The user ID associates the user with his/her jobs.
6. Check the printed output to make sure the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, perform the following steps to print the remaining sets.
If you want to delete a saved job, see "Sample Print".
8. Select [Sample Print Jobs], and then press [Job List].
A list of sample print files stored in the printer appears.
User ID, Date/Time and File Name also appear.
9. Select the file you want to print by pressing it.
8
A list of print files stored in the printer appears.
10. Press [Print] to change the number of sets to be printed.
11. Enter the new number of sets using the number keys.
If you do not want to change the set quantity, perform the following steps.
You can enter up to 999 sets.
Press [Escape] to correct any entry mistakes.
12. Press [Print].
• Press [Cancel] to cancel printing.

• When printing finishes, the stored file is deleted.
• To stop printing after printing has started, press [JobReset]. The file will be deleted.
• If there is a print job outstanding, this is printed before the sample print job.
325
Deleting a Sample Print File
2. Select [Sample Print Jobs], and then press [Job List].
A list of sample print files stored in the printer appears.
3. Select the file you want to delete by pressing it.
To cancel a selection, press the highlighted jobs again.
Only one file can be selected at a time.
4. Press [Delete].
A confirmation screen appears.
5. Press [Delete] to delete the file.
After the file is deleted, the printer screen reappears.
• Press [Cancel] to cancel the delete request.
8 Using locked print

most, the printer can save 100 jobs or 9,000 pages for Sample Print, Locked Print and Hold Print.
• Locked Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted
using Web Image Monitor before you select [Locked Print] using the control panel.
• Locked Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [Locked Print]
using the control panel will still appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear
if you try to print or delete those Locked Print files.
default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected
in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.
not saved.
hard disk.
326
Using PostScript 3
1. In the application, click [Print] on the [File] menu.

3. On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, click [Locked Print].
characters, and then enter a 4-8 digit password in the [Password:] box.
5. After making the necessary settings, click [Print].
The document file is saved in the printer.
To print the document, perform the following steps.
To delete the document, see "Locked Print".
7. Select [Locked Print Jobs], and then press [Job List].
A list of locked print files stored in the printer appears.
9. Press [Print]. 8
10. Enter the password using the scroll keys, and then press [OK].
A confirmation screen will appear if the password is not entered correctly. Press [OK] to enter the
password again.
11. Press [Print].
The locked file is printed.

• When printing finishes, the stored file is deleted.
327
Deleting a Locked Print File
2. Select [Locked Print Jobs], and then press [Job List].
A list of locked print files stored in the printer appears.
To cancel a selection, press the highlighted jobs again.
4. Press [Delete].
A password screen appears.
password again.
When multiple files are selected, the printer deletes only files that correspond to the entered password.
The number of files to be deleted is displayed on the confirmation screen.
6. Press [Delete].
8
Using hold print

most, the printer can save 100 jobs or 9,000 pages for Sample Print, Locked Print and Hold Print.
• Hold Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted using
Web Image Monitor before you select [Hold Print] using the control panel.
• Hold Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [Hold Print] using
the control panel will still appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you
try to print or delete those Hold Print files.
default, Hold print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected
328
Using PostScript 3
not saved.
hard disk.

3. On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, click [Hold Print].
characters. File Name can also be set.
To delete the document, see "Hold Print".

2. Select [Hold Print Jobs], and then press [Job List].
A list of hold print files stored in the printer appears.
8
4. Press [Print].
The hold print file is printed.

• When printing is completed, the stored file is deleted.
Deleting a Hold Print File
329
2. Select [Hold Print Jobs], and then press [Job List].

A list of hold print files stored in the printer appears.
To cancel a selection, press the highlighted job again.
4. Press [Delete].
5. Press [Delete].
Using stored print

• Stored Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted
using Web Image Monitor before you select [Stored Print] using the control panel.
8 • Stored Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [Stored Print]
using the control panel will still appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear
if you try to print or delete those Stored Print files.
default, Stored print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected
not saved.
hard disk.

3. On the [Job Type:] pop-up menu, click [Stored Print] or [Store and Print].
• [Stored Print]
330
Using PostScript 3
Stores the file in the printer and print it later using the control panel.
• [Store and Print]
Prints the file at once and also stores the file in the printer.
characters, and then enter a 4-8 digit password in the [Password:] box. File Name can also
be set.
You can assign a password to a saved document, but password assignment is not mandatory.
The password must be entered when printing or deleting.
To delete the document, see "Stored Print".
7. Select [Stored Print Jobs], and then press [Job List].
8. Select the file you want to print by pressing it. 8
9. Press [Print].
If you have already set a password, proceed to the following step.
password again.
If you have not set the password, proceed to the following step.
11. Press [Print].
The Stored Print file is printed.

• Stored Print files sent to the printer is not deleted unless you delete them in the printer, or enable
automatic deletion of Stored Print files.
331
Deleting a Stored Print File
2. Select [Stored Print Jobs], and then press [Job List].
4. Press [Delete].
password again.
6. Press [Delete].

8 • If you have already set a password in the printer driver, enter it to delete.
User Code
Use this to set a user code for print logging.

Enter a user code using up to eight digits. A user code identifies a group of users and allows you to check
the number of sheets printed under each code with SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Mac OS Select the [Enable User Code] check box, and then
enter a user code in the [User Code] box on [Job
Log] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X Select the [Enable User Code] check box, and then
enter a user code in the [User Code] box on [Job
Log] in the print dialog box.
332
Using PostScript 3
Paper Size
Use this to select the size of paper you want to use.

Mac OS [Paper:] on the [Page Attributes] tab in the Page

Setup dialog box.
Mac OS X [Paper Size:] in the Page Setup dialog box.
• For details about the paper sizes supported by this printer, see Hardware Guide.
Fit to Paper
When the size of the document and paper size differ, set whether or not to print according to paper size.
Mac OS [Fit to Paper] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Fit to Paper] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer

Features] in the print dialog box.
8
Prompt User
Print is performed with the size of document to be printed unchanged.
Nearest Size and Scale
If the paper size is smaller than the selected paper size, the driver reduces the print size.
If the paper size is larger than the size of document to be printed, print is not to fit the paper size.
Nearest Size and Crop
When the paper size is smaller than the size of document to be printed, print is adjusted to meet the
paper size.
Input Slot
Use this to select the paper sources.

333
Mac OS [Paper Source:] on [General] in the print dialog

box.
Mac OS X [Paper Feed] in the print dialog box.
• For details about the paper sources, see Hardware Guide.
Resolution
Use this to set the resolution types.

Mac OS [Resolution] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print

dialog box.
Mac OS X [Resolution] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer

• For more information about the resolution types, see Hardware Guide.
8
Orientation Override
Use this to set the paper orientation.

Mac OS [Orientation Override] on [Printer Specific

Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Orientation Override] on the [Feature Sets: X] tab

on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box.

• Off
• Landscape
• Portrait
334
Using PostScript 3
Duplex Printing
Use this function to select duplex printing.

Mac OS [Print on Both Sides] on [Layout] in the print dialog

box.
Mac OS X • 10.3 or higher

The [Two Sided Printing] check box on
[Layout] in the print dialog box.
• Other Mac OS X
The [Print on both Sides] check box on
[Duplex] in the print dialog box.
None
Disables duplex printing.
Flip on Long Edge
Prints so you can open it to the long edge when bound along the long edge.
Flip on Short Edge
Prints so you can open it to the short edge when bound along the short edge.
8
Color Mode
Use this function to select whether the document is printed in color or black and white.
Mac OS [Color Mode] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Color Mode] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer

Color
Prints color documents in full color.
• Color images are printed using CMYK toner: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black. CMYK
represents the three primary subtractive colors.
335
• If you want to adjust the print color, use the settings in the Advanced dialog box accessed from
the Advanced button on the [Print Quality] tab.
Black and White
Prints everything, including color documents, in black and white. Black and White printing is faster
than Color. To stop black and white areas being printed with CMYK toner, select [Black and White]
in the printer driver as well as in the application.
Gradation
Use this function to select a type of gradation suited to your requirements.

Mac OS [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Gradation] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer

Fast
Prints quickly but loses smoothness.
Standard
Prints with good gradation.
8
Color Profile
Use this function to select the color profile pattern.

Mac OS [Color Profile] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Color Profile] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer

Auto
Use this setting to automatically configure the best color profile pattern based on the appearance of
the document to be printed.
Photographic
Use this setting to enhance reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones.
336
Using PostScript 3
Presentation
Use this setting to enhance reproduction of documents containing text and graphics. This CRD is best
for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing
photographs, color and gradation might not reproduce so well.
Solid Color
Use this setting to print specific single colors, logos and so on.
User Setting
Use this setting to print images using a CRD downloaded from your application.
CLP Simulation
Prints the output colors similar to the colors displayed on the computer screen.
• Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching,
so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also
referred to when [Fine] or [Fine] is selected for "Colour Setting". The following items are available:
[Auto], [Photographic], [Presentation], and [Solid Color].
Color Setting
Use this function to select the correction method used for color conversion.
• The color rendering dictionary selected in the Color Profile setting is used.
8
Mac OS [Color Profile] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Color Profile] on the [Features x] tab on [Printer

Off
No modification to the color setting.
Fine
Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries,
and to perform CMYK conversion. This setting performs printing at an output target of Monitor g =
1.8.
337
Super Fine
Select this setting to use a color rendering dictionary similar to the Fine setting but is capable of
producing output that is more vivid. Use this setting to emphasize lighter colors. This setting performs
printing at an output target of Monitor g = 2.2.
• Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching,
so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also
referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for "Color Setting". The following items are available:
[Auto], [Photographic], [Presentation], and [Solid Color].
Toner Saving/Level Color
Use this function to reduce the amount of toner used when printing.
Mac OS [Toner Saving] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Toner Saving] on the [Features: Set x] tab on

[Printer Features] in the print dialog box.
8
• For details about this function, see printer driver Help.
Collate
Use this function to enable collation. With this feature, the printer can efficiently print collated sets of multiple-
page documents.
• Make sure that the following check boxes have not been selected.
• Mac OS
The [Collate] check box in the print dialog box.
• Mac OS X
• The [Collate] check box on [Copies & Pages] in the printer dialog box.
338
Using PostScript 3
Mac OS [Collate] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print

dialog box.
Mac OS X [Collate] on the [Features: Set x] tab on [Printer

Feature] in the printer dialog box.
Paper Type
Use this to select the paper type.

Mac OS [Paper Type:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the

print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Paper Type] on the [Feature Set: x] tab on [Printer

• For details about the media type supported by this printer, see Hardware Guide.
Black Over Print

8
Select whether or not to apply a black color over any other colors when printing.
Mac OS [Black Over Print] on [Printer Specific Options] in

the print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Black Over Print] on the [Features: Set x] tab on

Image Smoothing
Use this to select the image smoothing type.

Mac OS [Image Smoothing] on [Printer Specific Options] in

the print dialog box.
339
Mac OS X [Image Smoothing] on the [Feature Set: x] tab on

Off
Disables image smoothing.
On
Performs image smoothing unconditionally.
Auto
Performs image smoothing automatically for images that have a resolution less than 25% of supported
printer resolution.
Less than 90 ppi - Less than 300 ppi
Performs image smoothing only when the image has an image resolution (pixels per inch) less than
the respective value you have selected in the list.
• When Auto is selected, data processing may take a long time.

• When [Image Smoothing] is used for a mask image, this function may have an undesired effect on
the print result.
Separate into CMYK

8
Use this to select the print separation type.
You can separate the printing data into CMYK to specify a specific color combination.
Mac OS [Separate into CMYK] on [Printer Specific Options]

in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Separate into CMYK] on the [Features: Set x] tab

on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box.
CMYK Simulation Profile
You can simulate the color tone of the printing ink.

You can select the printing ink standard from US OffsetPrint, Euroscale, JapanColor and PaletteColor.
Mac OS [CMYK Simulation Profile] on [Printer Specific

Options] in the print dialog box.
340
Using PostScript 3
Mac OS X [CMYK Simulation Profile] on the [Features: Set x]

tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box.
Dithering
Use this function to set the Image Rendering mode.

Mac OS Dithering: on Printer Specific Options in the print

dialog box.
Mac OS X Dithering: on the Feature Set: x tab on Printer

Features in the print dialog box.

Auto
Use this setting to configure the best dithering method automatically depending on the appearance
of the document to be printed.
Photographic
Performs dithering using an appropriate pattern for photographs.
Text
Performs dithering using an appropriate pattern for text.
8
User Setting
Use this setting to print images set in half tone in your application.
Gray Reproduction
Use this function to select Black Color mode for text and line art.
Mac OS [Gray Reproductions (Text/LineArt)] on [Printer

Specific Options] in the print dialog box.
Mac OS X [Gray Reproductions (Text/LineArt)] on the

[Features: Set x] tab on [Printer Features] in the print
dialog box.
341
Black by K
Select this setting to use a black toner.
Black/Gray by K
Black portions are printed in gray.
CMY+K
Select this setting to use all toners.
Black/Gray by K (Text only)
Prints black text in gray.
Black by K (Text only)
Prints text using black toner.
Color Matching
Use this function to select whether or not you want the colors in the documents to be adjusted before printing,
so that the printed page matches the colors on the screen closer.
Image Color Control
Open the [Image Color Matching] dialog box, and then click this button to specify exactly how you
want the colors on your screen adjusted before printing.
342
Printer Utility for Mac

By using Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name of the printer and so on.
• If a Macintosh and printer are connected by USB, you cannot use Printer Utility for Mac.
• Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled "Printer Drivers and Utilities".
• Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 7.6.1-9.x, or Mac OS X 10.1.x or 10.2.1. Mac OS X 10.0.x
and 10.2 are not supported.
Installing Printer Utility for Mac
Follow these steps to install Printer Utility for Mac on the printer.
1. Start the Macintosh.

The CD-ROM icon appears.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
4. Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] icon to open it.
8
Under Mac OS X, double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
5. Double-click the [PS Utility] folder on the CD-ROM, and then drag the [Printer Utility for
Mac] file, and then drop it into the Macintosh hard disk.
6. Drag the CD-ROM icon and drop it into [Trash] to eject the CD-ROM.
Printer Utility for Mac is installed.
• Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled "Printer Drivers and Utilities".
• Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 8.1 or higher. (Mac OS X Classic environment is
supported.)
• Printer Utility for Mac cannot use Mac OS X (native mode).
343
Starting Printer Utility for Mac
Mac OS
• Before starting Printer Utility for Mac, make sure the printer is selected in [Chooser] on the Apple
menu.
1. Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears.
2. Click [OK].
Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
Mac OS X
1. Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears.
2. Click [OK].
3. In the [Available Printers:] box, select the printer you want to use.
If you change zones, select a name from [Available Network Zones:].
8 Click [Choose Printer...] on the Printer Utility for Mac menu if you want to change the printer.
4. Select the printer you want to use.
Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
5. Click [Choose].
Printer Utility for Mac Functions
Downloading PS fonts
You can download the PS fonts to the printer memory or hard disk drive.
• The following procedure to download the fonts assume that you are a system administrator. If you
are not, be sure to consult your system administrator.
• During the download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel or open or close the cover.
• If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to the defaults.
344
• Confirm that a Macintosh and the printer are connected with Apple Talk.
1. Select [Download PS Fonts...] on the [File] menu.

2. Click [Add to list].
The dialog box to select fonts appears.
3. Select the desired font files, and then click [Open].
The list of selectable font names appears.
4. After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [OK].
The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.
5. Click [Download].
The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.
6. When the completion message appears, click [OK].
7. Click [Cancel].
• Some fonts cannot be downloaded.

• Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to use.
Displaying printer fonts

You can display the available fonts currently downloaded to the printer. Fonts in the printer memory and
hard disk drive can be displayed. 8
1. Select [Display Printer's Fonts...] on the [File] menu.
A dialog box appears.
2. Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].
3. Click [OK].
• The fonts displayed in italics are the default fonts.
Deleting fonts
You can delete fonts from the printer's memory or hard disk drive.
• You cannot delete the fonts displayed in italic.
1. Select [Display Printer's fonts] on the [File] menu.

A dialog box appears.
345
2. Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].

3. Select the fonts you want to delete.
4. Click [Delete].
5. Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from which you want to delete
the fonts.
6. Click [Continue], and then click [OK].
7. Click [OK].
Initializing the printer disk

When initializing the printer hard disk, all the fonts downloaded to the printer hard disk drive are deleted.
Before initializing, be sure to check the fonts on the hard disk drive.
• When initializing the printer hard disk drive from the control panel, all of the data on the printer hard
disk drive is deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the data on the hard disk drive.
• Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed, otherwise the hard disk drive might be
damaged.
1. Select [Initialize Printer's Disk...] on the [File] menu.
8 The confirmation message appears. To cancel initialization, click [Cancel].

2. Click [Execute].
Initializing starts.
3. When the completion message appears, click [OK].
Page Setup
You can set the paper size on which to print "Print Fonts Catalogue" and "Prints Fonts Sample".
1. Select [Page Setup...] on the [File] menu.

2. Select the paper size.
3. Click [OK].
Printing font catalog

You can print the names of fonts available on the printer.
1. Select [Print Fonts Catalog...] on the [File] menu.
346
2. Click [Print].
• The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used.
Printing font sample

You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the hard disk drive or memory.
1. Select [Print Fonts Sample...] on the [File] menu.

2. Click [Print].
• Print by using the paper selected on [Page Setup].
Renaming the printer

You can change the printer name displayed under Apple Talk. If you connect several printers on the
network, assign different names so you can identify them. If several printers have the same name, a digit
appears next to the printer name in [Chooser].
• You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.

• Do not use symbols, for example "*", ":", "=", "@", "~".
8
Mac OS
1. On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...].

2. In the [New Name:] filed enter a new name.
3. Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
4. Click [OK].
5. On the Apple menu, click [Chooser].
6. Click the [AdobePS] icon.
7. Select the printer whose name you changed, and then close the [Chooser] dialog box.
If there are several Apple Talk zones, select the zone the printer belongs to.
Mac OS X
1. On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...].

2. In the [New Name:] filed enter a new name.
347
3. Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
4. Click [OK].
5. On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...].
6. In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone for the Macintosh in use.
7. In the [Available Printers:] list, select the printer whose name you changed, and then click
[Choose].
Restarting the printer

You can restart the printer.
1. Select [Restart Printer] on the [File] menu.

2. Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [Restart].
The printer restarts.
The fonts downloaded in the printer memory will be deleted.
If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to the defaults.
Downloading PostScript files

You can download a PostScript file to the printer.
8 1. Select [Download PostScript File...] on the [Utility] menu.
2. Select the file name to download, click the file name, and then click [Open].
3. Type the log file name, and then click [Save].
The selected file is downloaded.
Errors are recorded in the log file.
Selecting the zone

You can change the zone to which the printer belongs under Apple Talk.
• Confirm that a Macintosh and printer are connected with Apple Talk.
Mac OS
1. On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.
348
2. Select the zone in which you want to locate the printer, and then click [Change].
4. Click [OK].
5. On the Apple menu, click [Chooser].
6. Click the [AdobePS] icon.
7. In the [AppleTalk zone:] list, select the zone you changed.
8. In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, select the printer you want to use.
9. Close the [Chooser] dialog box.
Mac OS X
1. On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.
2. Select the zone which you want to locate the printer in, and then click [Change].
4. Click [OK].
5. On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...].
8
6. In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone you changed.
7. In the [Available Printers:] list, select the model of printer in use, and then click [Choose].
Displaying the printer status

You can display and confirm the current status of the printer.
1. Select [Display Printer Status...] on the [Utility] menu.

The current status of the printer appears.
2. Confirm the current status of the printer.
You can confirm the memory capacity, the VM (Virtual Memory) space, the hard disk drive status and
available space on the hard disk drive. You can also confirm the zone to which the printer belongs.
3. Click [OK].
349
Launching the dialogue console

You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and then download it to the printer.
• "Launch Dialogue Console" is recommended for users with an understanding of PostScript.

• Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the printer.
• "Launch Dialogue Console" must be used at your own responsibility.
1. Select [Launch Dialogue Console...] on the [Utility] menu.

Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.
2. Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.
To edit a PostScript file, select [Open] on the [File] menu to open it.
You can search or replace a character string by using the [Search] menu.
3. After editing the PostScript file, select [Download Top Window] on [Console] menu to start
printing.
The PostScript file is sent to the printer.
The [Reply from Printer] box opens, depending on the PostScript file you sent.
4. Select [Return To Main Menu] on the [Console] menu to close the PostScript file.
350
9. Appendix
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

This section explains the software and utilities included on the "Printer Drivers and Utilities" CD-ROM that
comes with this printer.
Font Manager
For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in the system. For details
about Font Manager, see the manual on the CD-ROM labeled "Printer Drivers and Utilities".
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
For the system administrator to manage network printers.
DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
For users to manage their network print status.
This utility allows users to download and manage a variety of fonts as well as manage printers. For
details about this utility, see "Printer Utility for Mac".
• Some documentation about using the machine is included on the CD-ROM in PDF format. For details
about using Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader, see Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader
online Help.
• For details, see p.343 "Printer Utility for Mac". 9

Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM
This section explains how to view the contents of the CD-ROM.

2. Click [Browse This CD-ROM].
Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.
Printer Drivers for This Printer
This section explains printer drivers for this printer.
351
9. Appendix
• You can install the PCL printer drivers (PCL 5c and PCL 6), the RPCS printer driver, and the Adobe
PostScript printer drivers from the CD-ROM provided with this machine or download them from the
supplier's Web site. If your operating system is Windows XP x64/Vista x64, Windows Server
2003/2003 R2/2008 x64, you must download the printer drivers from the supplier's Web site.
Select this machine and the operating system you are using, and then download them.
Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The following drivers are included
on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
Printer Language PCL 6 PCL 5c RPCS PostScript 3
Windows 2000 *1 OK OK OK OK
Windows XP *2 OK OK OK OK
Windows Vista *3 OK OK OK OK
Windows Server OK OK OK OK
2003/2003 R2/2008 *4
Mac OS 9 *5 OK
Mac OS X *6 OK
*1 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional /Microsoft Windows 2000 Server/Microsoft Windows 2000
Advanced Server
*2 Microsoft Windows XP Professional/Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
9 *3 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise/Microsoft Windows Vista Business/
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
*4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008 Enterprise Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 Web Edition/Microsoft
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 Datacenter Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008 Standard Edition/Microsoft Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 Enterprise Edition/Microsoft
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 Datacenter Edition
*5 Versions 8.6 to 9.2 of the Mac OS 9 (Mac OS X Classic mode is supported.)
*6 Mac OS X 10.1 or later (Native mode)
PCL printer drivers
Two kinds of PCL printer driver (PCL 5c and PCL 6) are included. These drivers allow your computer
to communicate with this machine via a printer language. To use these drivers, the Printer Enhance
Option is required.
352
RPCS printer driver

This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. In
addition to the conventional user interface, another preset user interface is provided. In addition to
the conventional user interface, another preset user interface is provided.
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files
Adobe PostScript printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer
language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions. These drivers require
the PostScript 3 Unit.
PPD files
PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
• Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5c printer driver. In this case, you can install
PCL 5c without having to install PCL 6.
• For details, see p.21 "Preparing for Printing", p.63 "Printing Documents".
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
This section describes the file path and available functions of SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and IPX/SPX to monitor network printers.
It can monitor multiple network printers using IP address. We recommend that the administrators use this
application.
File path 9
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder in the CD-ROM:
\NETWORK\DEVMON\ADMIN\DISK1
Operating system Protocol stack
Windows 2000 TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000
Windows XP TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP
353
9. Appendix
Windows Vista TCP/IP provided with Windows Vista

Novell Client provided with Windows Vista
Windows Server TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008

2003/2003 R2/2008 IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008
Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the following functions to check the followings:
• Printer supplies such as paper or toner
• Results of print jobs executed from the computer
• For information about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
DeskTopBinder - SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
This section describes the file path and system requirements of DeskTopBinder-SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client.
9 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions. We recommend that users install this application.
• Printing in a peer-to-peer network, using TCP/IP, and IPP from Windows 2000/XP/Vista or Windows
Server 2003/2003 R2/2008.
• Constantly monitoring the status of devices on the network using TCP/IP and IPX/SPX.
• To perform Recovery or Parallel printing, the same options that are installed on the original printer
must be installed on the other printers also. Printers that lack a required option cannot be used for
Recovery or Parallel printing.
• To perform Recovery or Parallel printing, the same paper loaded in the original printer must be loaded
in the other printers also. Load all printers with the same paper as that loaded in the tray selected for
printing.
• Results of Recovery or Parallel Printing might differ, depending on the model of the other printer and
the options installed on it.
• If you select Sample Print or Locked Print, you cannot select Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.
354
File path
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
NETWORK\DEVMON\CLIENT\DISK1
Windows 2000 TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000
Windows XP TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP
Windows Vista TCP/IP provided with Windows Vista

Novell Client provided with Windows Vista
Windows Server TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008

2003/2003 R2/2008 IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008
9
Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions.
• Peer-to-peer print function
• Prints directly on the network printer without sending any data to a print server.
• Prints on a substitute printer when there are too many jobs waiting on the specified printer,
or when an error disables printing (Recovery Printing).
• Allocates multiple print jobs to multiple printers (Parallel Printing).
• Executes prior group registration of printers specified for Recovery Printing or Parallel
Printing.
• Notification function
• Displays an error message when there is an error on the specified printer while transferring
or printing data.
355
9. Appendix
• Notifies a print completion. You can also be notified of the print condition, such as displaying
the notice only when Recovery Printing is executed.
• Monitoring function
• Checks printer supplies such as paper or toner.
• Simultaneously monitors multiple printers in use.
• Checks the printer's network settings and detailed information of printers.
• Enables you to check the print job log using the user ID.
• For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Manuals
The supplied "Manuals" CD-ROMs contain HTML format manuals and PDF manuals.
Depending on the printer model, PDF manuals may not be supplied.
HTML Format Manuals
File path: MANUAL_HTML
PDF Format Manuals
File path: MANUAL_PDF
356
Printing Files Directly from Windows

You can print files directly using Windows commands. For example, you can print PostScript files for
PostScript 3.
Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008
You can print files directly using "lpr", "rcp", or "ftp" command.
• To use “sftp” commands, use an sftp client software that is compatible with ssh v2.
Setup
Follow the procedure below to make network environment settings.
1. Enable TCP/IP with the control panel, and then set up the printer's network environment
about TCP/IP including IP addresses.
TCP/IP of the printer is set as default.
2. Install a TCP/IP in Windows to set up the network environment.
Contact your administrator for the local setting information.
3. To print under Windows 2000/XP/Vista or Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008, install
"Printing service for UNIX" as the network application.
• For details about setting up IPv4 address, see Hardware Guide.

9
• For details about setting the IPv4 address of the printer using DHCP, see p.364 "Using
DHCP".
Using a Host Name Instead of an IPv4 Address
When a host name is defined, you can specify a printer by host name instead of IPv4 address. The host
names vary depending on the network environment.
When using DNS

Use the host name set to the data file on the DNS server.
357
9. Appendix
When setting the IPv4 address of a printer using DHCP

Use the printer name on the configuration page as the host name.
• For details about printing a configuration page, see p.162 "List/Test Print Menu".
In other cases
Add the IPv4 address and host name of the network printer to the hosts file on the computer used for printing.
Methods of addition vary depending on operating systems.
Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008
1. Open the hosts file using memo pad files, for instance.
The hosts file is in the following folder:
\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC\HOSTS
"\WINNT" is the directory of the installation destination for Windows 2000/XP/Vista, Windows
Server 2003/2003 R2/2008.
2. Add an IPv4 address and host name to the hosts file using the following format:
192.168.15.16 host # NP
"192.168.15.16" is the IPv4 address, "host" is the printer's host name, and "#NP" is replaced by
comments. Insert a space or tab between "192.168.15.16" and "host", between "host" and "#NP"
respectively, using one line for this format.
3. Save the file.
9
• When using a host name under Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008 with IPv6 protocol,
perform host name resolution using an external DNS server. The host file cannot be used.
Printing Commands
The following explains printing operations using the "lpr", "rcp", and "ftp" commands.
Enter commands using the command prompt window. The location of the command prompts varies
depending on operating systems:
• Windows 2000
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] - [Command Prompt]
• Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008
[Start] - [All Programs] - [Accessories] - [Command Prompt]
358
• Match the data format of the file to be printed with the emulation mode of the printer.
• If the message "print requests full" appears, no print jobs can be accepted. Try again when sessions
end. For each command, the amount of possible sessions is indicated as follows:
• lpr: 10
• rcp, rsh: 5
• ftp: 3
• Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing commands.
• The "option" specified in a command is an intrinsic printer option and its syntax is similar to printing
from UNIX. For details, see UNIX Supplement.
lpr
When specifying a printer by IP address
c:> lpr -Sprinter's IP address [-Poption] [-ol] \pass name\file name
When using a host name instead of an IP address
c:> lpr -Sprinter's host name [-Poption] [-ol] \pass name\file name
When printing a binary file, add the "-ol" option (lowercase O, and lowercase L).
When using a printer with the host name "host" to print a PostScript file named "file 1" located in the "C:
\PRINT" directory, the command line is as follows:
c:> lpr -Shost -Pfiletype=RPS -ol C:\PRINT\file1
rcp
9
First, register the printer's host name in the hosts file.
c:> rcp [-b] \pass name\file name [pass name\file name...] printer's host name:
[option]
When using a printer with the host name "host" to print a PostScript file named "file 1" or "file 2" located in
the "C:\PRINT" directory, the command line is as follows:
c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2 host:filetype=RPS
• In file names, "*" and "?" can be used as wild cards.

• When printing a binary file, add the "-b" option.
359
9. Appendix
ftp
Use the "put" or "mput" command according to the number of files to be printed.
When one file is printed
ftp> put \pass name\file name [option]
When multiple files are printed
ftp> mput \pass name\file name [\pass name\file name...] [option]
1. Formulate the printer's IP address or the host name of the hosts file printer as an argument
and use the "ftp" command.
% ftp printer's IP address
2. Enter the user name and password, and then press the [OK] key.
User:
Password:
3. When printing a binary file, set the file mode to binary.
ftp> bin
When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.
4. Specify files to be printed.
The following shows the examples of printing a PostScript file named "file 1" in the "C:\PRINT"
directory and printing file 1 and file 2.
ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1 filetype=RPS
9 ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2

5. Quit ftp.
ftp> bye
• "=", ",", "_", and ";"cannot be used for filenames. File names will be read as option strings.
• For "mput" command, option can not be defined.
• For "mput" command, "*" and "?" can be used as wild cards in file names.
• When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.
sftp
To use the “sftp” command, a client software is required.
Use the client software that is compliant with ssh ver2.
360
1. Start the client software.

“psftp>open “host name”” appears.
2. Enter the host name, and then press the [Enter] key.
“Login as: “user name”” appears.
3. Enter the user name, and then press the [Enter] key.
When you access the “sftp” command initially, “Store key in cache? (y/n)”
message appears. Select whether or not to store the key and key information,
and then press the [Enter] key.
The entered “user name” and “host name” appears.
4. Enter the password, and then press the [Enter] key.
The entered password will not appear.
• Not all client can use this function.

• For details, see the client software help or the manual help.
361
9. Appendix
When Using Windows Terminal Service/Citrix

Presentation Server(MetaFrame)
The following explains how to use Windows Terminal Service and Citrix Presentation Server(MetaFrame).
Operating Environment
The following operating systems and MetaFrame versions are supported.

Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1+SP3/SP4
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/SP3/SP4/FR1/FR2/FR3
• MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0
• Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR3
• MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0
• Citrix Presentation Server 4.0
Supported Printer Drivers
When Windows Terminal Service is operating

9 • PCL printer drivers
• PostScript 3
• RPCS drivers
• Some RPCS printer driver functions do not work if Windows Terminal Service is installed.
Limitations
The following limitations apply to the Windows Terminal Service environment.

These limitations are built in Windows Terminal Service or MetaFrame.
Windows Terminal Service
In an environment where Windows Terminal Service is installed, some printer driver functions are
unavailable, even if no Windows Terminal Service functions are used. Use the install mode to install
362
When Using Windows Terminal Service/Citrix Presentation Server(MetaFrame)
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client in an environment where Terminal Service is running on a Windows

2000 Server family computer. The following are the two methods of installation using the install mode:
1. Use [Add/Remove Programs] in [Control Panel] to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
2. Enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:
CHANGE USER /INSTALL
To quit the install mode, enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:
CHANGE USER /EXECUTE
• For more information, see Windows Help.

MetaFrame's [Auto-creating client printers]
Using [Auto-creating client printers], you can select a logical printer created by copying the client's
local printer data to the MetaFrame server. We strongly recommend testing this function in your
network environment before using it for your work.
• The settings for optional equipment will not be stored in the server after the equipment is
disconnected. The settings for optional equipment will be restored to its defaults each time the
client computer logs on to the server.
• When printing a large number of bitmap images or using the server in a WAN environment over
dial-up lines such as ISDN, printing may not be possible or errors may occur, depending on
data transfer rates.
• When using MetaFrame XP 1.0 or higher versions, we recommend making settings in [Client
Printer bandwidth] under [Citrix Management Console] according to the environment.
• If a print error occurs on the server and the print job or a printer created in [Auto-creating client
printers] cannot be deleted, we recommend the following:
9
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3, MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/FR1
Make settings in [Delete unfinished print jobs] in the registry. For details, see the Readme
file provided with MetaFrame.
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR2
Make settings in [Delete pending print jobs at logout] under [Printer Properties
Management] of Citrix Management Console.
MetaFrame's [Printer driver replication]
Using [Printer driver replication], you can distribute printer drivers across all servers in a server farm.
We strongly recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it for your
work.
• If the printer drivers are not properly copied, install them directly onto each server.
363
9. Appendix
Using DHCP
You can use the printer in a DHCP environment. You can also register the printer NetBIOS name on a
WINS server when it is running.
• Printers that register the printer NetBIOS name on a WINS server must be configured for the WINS
server.
• Supported DHCP servers are Microsoft DHCP Server included with Windows 2000 Server, Windows
Server 2003, and the DHCP server included with NetWare and UNIX.
• If you do not use the WINS server, reserve the printer's IP address in the DHCP server so the same IP
address is assigned every time.
• To use the WINS server, change the WINS server setting to “active” using the control panel.
• Using the WINS server, you can configure the host name via the remote network printer port.
• DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you use DHCP relay-agent on a network via ISDN, it will result
in increased line charges. This is because your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet
is transferred from the printer.
• If there is more than one DHCP server, use the same setting for all servers. The machine operates using
data from the DHCP server that responds first.
• DHCP servers can operate in an IPv6 environment, but they cannot be configured to allocate IPv6
addresses or obtain host names.
Using AutoNet
If the printer IPv4 address is not automatically assigned by the DHCP server, a temporary IP address starting
9 with 169.254 and not used on the network can be automatically selected by the printer.
• The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is given priority over that selected by AutoNet.
• You can confirm the current IPv4 address on the configuration page. For more information about the
configuration page, see Quick Installation Guide.
• When AutoNet is running, the NetBIOS name is not registered on the WINS server.
• The machine cannot communicate with devices that do not have the AutoNet function. However, this
machine can communicate with Macintosh computers running Mac OS X 10.2.3. or higher.
364
Configuring the WINS Server
Configuring the WINS Server

The printer can be configured to register its NetBIOS name with a WINS server when the power is turned
on. This enables the NetBIOS name of the printer to be specified from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin even
in a DHCP environment.
This section explains configuring the WINS server.
• The WINS server is supported with Windows 2000 Servers WINS Manager.
• For details about the WINS server settings, see Windows Help.
• If there is no reply from the WINS server, the NetBIOS name is registered by broadcast.
• The NetBIOS name can be entered using up to 13 alphanumeric characters.
1. Start a Web browser.

2. Enter “http://(printer's IP address or host name) /” in the address bar to access the printer
whose settings you want to change.
3. Click [Login].
The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.
4. Enter the user name and password, and then click [Login].
9
5. In the left area, click [Configuration], and then click [Network].
6. Click [TCP/IP].
7. Check that [Enable] is selected for [WINS] in the [Ethernet + Wireless LAN] column, and then
enter the WINS server IPv4 address in [Primary WINS Server] and [Secondary WINS
Server].
8. Click [Apply].
Using telnet
You can also use telnet to configure WINS.
365
9. Appendix
Using the Dynamic DNS Function

Dynamic DNS is a function which dynamically updates (registers and deletes) records (A record, AAAA
record, CNAME, and PTR record) managed by the DNS server. When a DNS server is part of the network
environment to which this printer, a DNS client, is connected, records can be dynamically updated using
this function.
Updating
Updating procedure varies depending on whether the printer IP address is static or acquired by DHCP.
• Dynamic update using message authentication (TSIG, SIG(0)) is not supported.

For a static IPv4 setting
If the IP address or host name is changed, the A and PTR records are updated. If the A record is
registered, CNAME is also registered. CNAMEs that can be registered are as follows:
• Ethernet and wireless LAN
RNPXXXXXX (XXXXXX represents the last 3 hexadecimal bytes of the MAC address)
However, if CNAME (PRNXXXXXX) overlaps with the host name, CNAME will not be registered.
For DHCPv4 settings
As a substitute for the printer, the DHCP server updates the record, and one of the following occurs:
• When the printer acquires the IP address from the DHCP server, the DHCP server updates the A
and PTR records.
9 • When the printer acquires the IP address from the DHCP server, the printer updates the A record,
and the DHCP server updates the PTR record.
If the A record is registered, CNAME is also registered. CNAMEs that can be registered are as follows:
• Ethernet and wireless LAN
RNPXXXXXX (XXXXXX represents the last 3 hexadecimal bytes of the MAC address)
For IPv6 settings
This printer updates the AAAA record and PTR record.
It also updates CNAME when the AAAA record is updated.
When a stateless address is newly set, it is automatically registered on the DNS server also.
• When the dynamic DNS function is not used, records managed by the DNS server must be updated
manually, if the printer's IP address is changed.
• To update the record using the printer, the DNS server has to have one of the following:
366
Using the Dynamic DNS Function
• No security settings made.

• If security settings are made, an IP-specified client (this printer) permits updating.
DNS Servers Targeted for Operation
For static IP setting

• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003 features
• BIND 8.2.3 or higher
For DHCP setup, when the printer updates the A record
For DHCP setup, when the DHCP server updates records
• DNS servers with standard NetWare 5 (or a higher version) features
For IPv6 setting
• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows Server 2003 features
DHCP Servers Targeted for Operation
As a substitute for the printer, DHCP servers capable of updating the A record and PTR record are as 9
follows:
• Microsoft DHCP servers with standard Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack 3 or higher versions)/
Windows Server 2003 features
• ISC DHCP 3.0 or higher
• DHCP server with standard NetWare 5 features
Setting the Dynamic DNS Function
Make settings with telnet using the “dns” command.
• For details, see "Remote Maintenance by telnet".
367
9. Appendix
368
Precautions
Precautions
Please pay attention to the following when using the network interface board. When configuration is
necessary, follow the appropriate procedures below.
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network
When using NetWare (file server)

If the NetWare file server and printer are on opposite sides of a router, packets are sent back and forth
continuously, possibly incurring communications charges. Because packet transmission is a feature of
NetWare, you need to change the configuration of the router. If the network you are using does not allow
you to configure the router, configure the printer instead.
Configuring the router
Filter packets so they do not pass over the dial-up router.
Configuring the printer with NetWare
1. Following the setup method described earlier in this manual, configure the file server.
2. Set the frame type for NetWare environment.
Configuring the printer without NetWare
1. When not printing, the network interface board sends packets over the network. Set
NetWare to “inactive”.
9
• The MAC address of the filtering printer is printed on the printer configuration page. For more
information about printing a configuration page, see “Test Printing”, Quick Installation Guide.
• For more information about configuring the printer if the router cannot be configured, see the following
instructions.
• For more information about selecting a frame type, see “Ethernet Configuration”, Hardware Guide.
• For more information about selecting a protocol, see “Ethernet Configuration”, Hardware Guide.
When the Wireless LAN Interface Unit Is Installed
When using the wireless LAN interface on the network, note the following:
When moving the printer
Detach the antennas when relocating the printer locally.
369
9. Appendix
After moving the printer, reattach the antennas, ensuring that:

• The antennas are positioned clear of obstacles.
• There is 40 to 60 mm between the antennas, so that they do not touch.
If the network area provides poor radio environment
Where radio wave conditions are bad, the network may not function due to interrupted or failed
connections. When checking the wireless LAN signal and the access point, follow the procedure
below to improve the situation:
• Position the access point nearer to the printer.
• Clear the space between access point and printer of obstructions.
• Move radio wave generating appliances, such as microwaves, away from the printer and access
point.
• For information about how to check radio wave status, see “Wireless LAN Configuration”, Hardware
Guide.
• For more information about access point radio wave conditions, refer to the access point manual.
370
Security Measures Provided by this Printer

Using Authentication and Managing Users
This section explains how to improve this printer's security.

The setting can be done only by the administrator.
Enabling Authentication
To control administrators' and users' access to the printer, perform administrator authentication and
user authentication using login user names and login passwords. To perform authentication, the
authentication function must be enabled.
Specifying Authentication Information to Log on
Users are managed using the personal information managed in the printer's address book.
Enabling user authentication limits usage of printer to people registered in the address book to use
the printer. Users can be managed in the address book by the administrator.
Specifying Which Functions are Available
This can be specified by the administrator. Specify the functions available to registered users. By
making this setting, administrators can limit the functions available to users.
Preventing Information Leaks
Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying (Unauthorized Copy Prevention)

Using the printer driver, mask and pattern can be embedded in the printed document.
9
Guarding Against Unauthorized Copying (Data security for copying)
Using the printer driver with the data security for the copying function, a document can be printed
with an embedded pattern of hidden text.
To gray out the copy or stored file of a copy-guarded document when the document is copied or
stored, the optional security module is required.
Printing confidential files
Using the printer's Locked Print, files can be stored in the printer as confidential files and then print
them. Those file can be printed using the printer's control panel and collected on the spot to prevent
others from seeing it.
Preventing Data Leaks Due to Unauthorized Transmission
You can specify in the address book which users are allowed to send files using the scanner or fax
function.
You can also limit the direct entry of destinations to prevent files from being sent to destinations not
registered in the address book.
371
9. Appendix
Protecting Registered Information in the Address Book

This function allows administrator to specify which users have permission to access the data in the
address book. Usage of the data in the address book by unregistered users can be prevented.
Administrator can also encrypt the data in the address book to protect the data from unauthorized
reading.
Managing Log Files
Data security can by improved by deleting log files stored in the printer. By transferring the log files,
administrator can check the history data and identify unauthorized access.
To transfer the log data, the log collection server is required.
Overwriting the Data on the Hard Disk
Before disposing of the printer, make sure all data on the hard disk is deleted. Prevent data leakage
by automatically deleting transmitted printer jobs from memory.
To overwrite the hard disk data, the optional ipp unit is required.
Limiting and Controlling Access
Preventing Modification or Deletion of Stored Data

Users with access permission to stored files can be specified. Permit selected users who have to access
permissions to stored files to modify or delete the files.
Preventing Modification of Printer Settings
The printer settings that can be modified depend on the type of administrator account.
Register the administrators so that users cannot change the administrator settings.
9 Limiting Available Functions
This function allows administrator to specify which users have accessibility to each of the printer's
functions, to prevent unauthorized operation.
Enhanced Network Security
Preventing Unauthorized Access

Limit IP addresses or disable ports to prevent unauthorized access over the network and protect the
address book, stored files, and default settings.
Encrypting Transmitted Passwords
Prevent login passwords, group passwords for PDF files, and IPP authentication passwords being
revealed by encrypting them for transmission.
Also, encrypt the login password for administrator authentication and user authentication.
372
Configuring SSL Encryption
When you access the printer using a Web Image Monitor or IPP, you can establish encrypted
communication using SSL.
When you access the printer using an application such as SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can establish
encrypted communication using SNMPv3 or SSL. To protect data from interception, analysis, and
tampering, you can install a server certificate in the printer, negotiate a secure connection, and encrypt
transmitted data.
SSL (SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)Secure Sockets Layer)
BBC003S
1. To access the printer from a user's computer, request for the SSL server certificate and public key.
2. The server certificate and public key are sent from the printer to the user's computer.
3. Create shared key from the user's computer, and then encrypt it using public key.
4. The encrypted shared key is sent to the printer.
5. The encrypted shared key is decrypted in the printer using private key.
373
9. Appendix
6. Transmit the encrypted data using the shared key, and then decrypt the data at the printer to
attain secure transmission.
374
Copyright Information about Installed Applications
Copyright Information about Installed

Applications
expat
• The software including controller, etc. (hereinafter "software") installed on this product uses the expat
under the conditions mentioned below.
• The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of the product including the
expat, and the product manufacturer makes the initial developer and copyright holder of the expat,
free from these obligations.
• Information relating to the expat is available at:
http://expat.sourceforge.net/
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Centre, Ltd. and Clark Cooper.
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions
of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR 9
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
NetBSD
1. Copyright Notice of NetBSD

For all users to use this product:
This product contains NetBSD operating system:
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not in the public domain; its
authors retain their copyright.
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD source code. For exact copyright
notice applicable for each of the files/binaries, the source code tree must be consulted.
375
9. Appendix
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.

Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
2. Authors Name List
9 All product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trade-marks of their respective owners.
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software that we have mentioned in
this document:
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,Berkeley and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation.
• This product includes software developed by The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project. See http://www.netbsd.org/ for
information about NetBSD.
• This product contains software developed by Ignatios Souvatzis for the NetBSD project.
• This product contains software written by Ignatios Souvatzis and MichaelL. Hitch for the NetBSD
project.
• This product contains software written by Michael L. Hitch for the NetBSD project.
• This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected])
376
• This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected])

• This product includes software designed by William Allen Simpson.
• This product includes software developed at Ludd, University of Lulea,Sweden and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed at Ludd, University of Lulea.
• This product includes software developed at the Information Technology Division, US Naval Research
Laboratory.
• This product includes software developed by Berkeley Software Design, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by David Jones and Gordon Ross
• This product includes software developed by Gordon W. Ross and Leo Weppelman.
• This product includes software developed by Hellmuth Michaelis and Joerg Wunsch
• This product includes software developed by Internet Research Institute, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by Leo Weppelman and Waldi Ravens.
• This product includes software developed by Mika Kortelainen
• This product includes software developed by Aaron Brown and Harvard University.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Ciarcinski for the NetBSD project.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles M.Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.
• This product includes software developed by Advanced Risc Machines Ltd.
• This product includes software developed by Alex Zepeda, and Colin Wood for the NetBSD Projet.
• This product includes software developed by Alex Zepeda.
• This product includes software developed by Alistair G. Crooks.
• This product includes software developed by Alistair G. Crooks. for the NetBSD project.
9
• This product includes software developed by Allen Briggs
• This product includes software developed by Amancio Hasty and Roger Hardiman
• This product includes software developed by Bill Paul.
• This product includes software developed by Bodo Moeller. (If available, substitute umlauted o for
oe)
• This product includes software developed by Boris Popov.
• This product includes software developed by Brad Pepers
• This product includes software developed by Bradley A. Grantham.
• This product includes software developed by Brini.
• This product includes software developed by Causality Limited.
377
9. Appendix
• This product includes software developed by Charles D. Cranor and Seth Widoff.
• This product includes software developed by Charles D. Cranor and Washington University.
• This product includes software developed by Charles D. Cranor, Washington
• University, and the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Charles D. Cranor, Washington University, the University
of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Charles D. Cranor.
• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum, by the University of Vermont and
State Agricultural College and Garrett A.Wollman, by William F. Jolitz, and by the University of
California,Berkeley, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Christian E. Hopps, Ezra Story, Kari Mettinen, Markus
Wild, Lutz Vieweg and Michael Teske.
• This product includes software developed by Christian E. Hopps.
• This product includes software developed by Christian Limpach
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.
• This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
• This product includes software developed by Chuck Silvers.
• This product includes software developed by Colin Wood for the NetBSD Project.
9 • This product includes software developed by Colin Wood.

• This product includes software developed by Cybernet Corporation and Nan Yang Computer
Services Limited
• This product includes software developed by Daishi Kato
• This product includes software developed by Dale Rahn.
• This product includes software developed by Daniel Widenfalk and Michael L. Hitch.
• This product includes software developed by Daniel Widenfalk for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Darrin B. Jewell
• This product includes software developed by David Miller.
• This product includes software developed by Dean Huxley.
• This product includes software developed by Eduardo Horvath.
• This product includes software developed by Eric S. Hvozda.
• This product includes software developed by Eric S. Raymond
378
• This product includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@@mincom.oz.au)

• This product includes software developed by Eric Young ([email protected])
• This product includes software developed by Eric Young ([email protected])
• This product includes software developed by Ezra Story and by Kari Mettinen.
• This product includes software developed by Ezra Story, by Kari Mettinen and by Bernd Ernesti.
• This product includes software developed by Ezra Story, by Kari Mettinen, Michael Teske and by
Bernd Ernesti.
• This product includes software developed by Ezra Story, by Kari Mettinen, and Michael Teske.
• This product includes software developed by Ezra Story.
• This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Gardner Buchanan.
• This product includes software developed by Gary Thomas.
• This product includes software developed by Gordon Ross
• This product includes software developed by Gordon W. Ross
• This product includes software developed by HAYAKAWA Koichi.
• This product includes software developed by Harvard University and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Harvard University.
• This product includes software developed by Herb Peyerl.
• This product includes software developed by Hubert Feyrer for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Iain Hibbert
• This product includes software developed by Ian F. Darwin and others.
• This product includes software developed by Ian W. Dall.
9
• This product includes software developed by Ichiro FUKUHARA.
• This product includes software developed by Ignatios Souvatzis for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Internet Initiative Japan Inc.
• This product includes software developed by James R. Maynard III.
• This product includes software developed by Jared D. McNeill.
• This product includes software developed by Jason L. Wright
• This product includes software developed by Jason R. Thorpe for And Communications, http://
www.and.com/
• This product includes software developed by Joachim Koenig-Baltes.
• This product includes software developed by Jochen Pohl for The NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Joerg Wunsch
• This product includes software developed by John Birrell.
379
9. Appendix
• This product includes software developed by John P. Wittkoski.

• This product includes software developed by John Polstra.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R. Thorpe for the NetBSD
Project.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.
• This product includes software developed by Jukka Marin.
• This product includes software developed by Julian Highfield.
• This product includes software developed by Kazuhisa Shimizu.
• This product includes software developed by Kazuki Sakamoto.
• This product includes software developed by Kenneth Stailey.
• This product includes software developed by Kiyoshi Ikehara.
• This product includes software developed by Klaus Burkert,by Bernd Ernesti, by Michael van Elst,
and by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by LAN Media Corporation and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Leo Weppelman for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Leo Weppelman.
• This product includes software developed by Lloyd Parkes.
• This product includes software developed by Luke Mewburn.
• This product includes software developed by Lutz Vieweg.
• This product includes software developed by MINOURA Makoto, Takuya Harakawa.
9 • This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.
• This product includes software developed by Marc Horowitz.
• This product includes software developed by Marcus Comstedt.
• This product includes software developed by Mark Brinicombe for the NetBSD project.
• This product includes software developed by Mark Brinicombe.
• This product includes software developed by Mark Murray
• This product includes software developed by Mark Tinguely and Jim Lowe
• This product includes software developed by Markus Wild.
• This product includes software developed by Martin Husemann and Wolfgang Solfrank.
• This product includes software developed by Masanobu Saitoh.
• This product includes software developed by Masaru Oki.
• This product includes software developed by Mats O Jansson and Charles D.Cranor.
• This product includes software developed by Mats O Jansson.
380
• This product includes software developed by Matt DeBergalis

• This product includes software developed by Matthew Fredette.
• This product includes software developed by Matthias Pfaller.
• This product includes software developed by Michael Graff for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Michael Graff.
• This product includes software developed by Michael L. Hitch.
• This product includes software developed by Michael Shalayeff.
• This product includes software developed by Michael Smith.
• This product includes software developed by Mike Glover and contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Mike Pritchard.
• This product includes software developed by Minoura Makoto.
• This product includes software developed by Nan Yang Computer Services Limited.
• This product includes software developed by Niels Provos.
• This product includes software developed by Niklas Hallqvist, Brandon Creighton and Job de Haas.
• This product includes software developed by Niklas Hallqvist.
• This product includes software developed by Onno van der Linden.
• This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.
• This product includes software developed by Paul Mackerras.
• This product includes software developed by Per Fogelstrom
• This product includes software developed by Peter Galbavy.
• This product includes software developed by Phase One, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by Philip A. Nelson.
9
• This product includes software developed by Philip L. Budne.
• This product includes software developed by RiscBSD.
• This product includes software developed by Roar Thronaes.
• This product includes software developed by Rodney W. Grimes.
• This product includes software developed by Roger Hardiman
• This product includes software developed by Roland C. Dowdeswell.
• This product includes software developed by Rolf Grossmann.
• This product includes software developed by Ross Harvey for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Ross Harvey.
• This product includes software developed by Scott Bartram.
• This product includes software developed by Scott Stevens.
381
9. Appendix
• This product includes software developed by Shingo WATANABE.

• This product includes software developed by Softweyr LLC, the University of California, Berkeley, and
its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Soren S. Jorvang.
• This product includes software developed by Stephan Thesing.
• This product includes software developed by Steve Woodford.
• This product includes software developed by Takashi Hamada
• This product includes software developed by Takumi Nakamura.
• This product includes software developed by Tatoku Ogaito for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.
• This product includes software developed by Tetsuya Isaki.
• This product includes software developed by Thomas Gerner
• This product includes software developed by Thomas Klausner for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Tobias Weingartner.
• This product includes software developed by Todd C. Miller.
• This product includes software developed by Tohru Nishimura and Reinoud Zandijk for the NetBSD
Project.
• This product includes software developed by Tohru Nishimura for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Tohru Nishimura. for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.
• This product includes software developed by Toru Nishimura.
9 • This product includes software developed by Trimble Navigation, Ltd.
• This product includes software developed by WIDE Project and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Waldi Ravens.
• This product includes software developed by Wasabi Systems for Zembu Labs, Inc. http://
www.zembu.com/
• This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by Wolfgang Solfrank.
• This product includes software developed by Yasushi Yamasaki
• This product includes software developed by Zembu Labs, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by the Alice Group.
• This product includes software developed by the Center for Software Science at the University of Utah.
• This product includes software developed by the Charles D. Cranor, Washington University, University
of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
382
• This product includes software developed by the Computer Systems Engineering Group at Lawrence
Berkeley Laboratory.
• This product includes software developed by the David Muir Sharnoff.
• This product includes software developed by the Harvard University and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by the Kungliga Tekniska Hogskolan and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by the Network Research Group at Lawrence Berkeley
Laboratory.
• This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.OpenSSL.org/)
• This product includes software developed by the PocketBSD project and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by the RiscBSD kernel team
• This product includes software developed by the RiscBSD team.
• This product includes software developed by the SMCC Technology Development Group at Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors,
as well as the Trustees of Columbia University.
• This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley
Laboratory and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley
Laboratory.
• This product includes software developed by the University of Illinois at Urbana and their contributors.
• This product includes software developed by the University of Vermont and State Agricultural College
and Garrett A. Wollman.
9
• This product includes software developed by the University of Vermont and State Agricultural College
and Garrett A. Wollman, by William F. Jolitz, and by the University of California, Berkeley, Lawrence
Berkeley Laboratory, and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed for the FreeBSD project
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Bernd Ernesti.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Christopher G. Demetriou.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Christos Zoulas
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Emmanuel Dreyfus.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank van der Linden
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Ignatios Souvatzis.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R. Thorpe.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by John M. Vinopal.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Matthias Drochner.
383
9. Appendix
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Michael L. Hitch.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Perry E. Metzger.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Scott Bartram and Frank van der
Linden
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Allegro Networks, Inc., and
Wasabi Systems, Inc.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Genetec Corporation.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jonathan Stone.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Piermont Information Systems
Inc.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by SUNET,Swedish University
Computer Network.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Shigeyuki Fukushima.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Wasabi Systems, Inc.
• This product includes software developed under OpenBSD by Per Fogelstrom Opsycon AB for RTMX
Inc, North Carolina, USA.
• This product includes software developed under OpenBSD by Per Fogelstrom.
• This software is a component of "386BSD" developed by William F. Jolitz,TeleMuse.
• This software was developed by Holger Veit and Brian Moore for use with "386BSD" and similar
operating systems. "Similar operating systems" includes mainly non-profit oriented systems for
research and education, including but not restricted to "NetBSD", "FreeBSD", "Mach" (by CMU).
• This software includes software developed by the Computer Systems Laboratory at the University of
9 Utah.
• This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University
(http://www.cmu.edu/computing/).
• This product includes software developed by Allen Briggs.
In the following statement, "This software" refers to the Mitsumi CD-ROM driver:
• This software was developed by Holger Veit and Brian Moore for use with "386BSD" and similar
operating systems. "Similar operating systems" includes mainly non-profit oriented systems for
research and education, including but not restricted to "NetBSD", "FreeBSD", "Mach" (by CMU).
In the following statement, "This software" refers to the parallel port driver:
• This software is a component of "386BSD" developed by William F. Jolitz, TeleMuse.
Netatalk(NetBSD)/NetaTalk 1.4b2+asun2.1.3
Copyright (c) 1990,1991 Regents of The University of Michigan. All Rights Reserved.
384
FreeBSD 4.6.2/netipx
Copyright (c) 1984, 1985, 1986, 1987, 1993

The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Modifications Copyright (c) 1995, Mike Mitchell
Modifications Copyright (c) 1995, John Hay
Sablotron
Sablotron (Version 0.82) Copyright (c) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved
a) The application software installed on this product includes the Sablotron software Version 0.82
(hereinafter, "Sablotron 0.82"), with modifications made by the product manufacturer. The original code
of the Sablotron 0.82 is provided by Ginger Alliance Ltd., the initial developer, and the modified code of
the Sablotron 0.82 has been derived from such original code provided by Ginger Alliance Ltd.
b) The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the application software of this product
including the Sablotron 0.82 as modified, and the product manufacturer makes Ginger Alliance Ltd., the
initial developer of the Sablotron 0.82, free from these obligations.
c) The Sablotron 0.82 and the modifications thereof are made available under the terms of Mozilla Public
License Version 1.1 (hereinafter, "MPL 1.1"), and the application software of this product constitutes the
"Larger Work" as defined in MPL 1.1. The application software of this product except for the Sablotron
0.82 as modified is licensed by the product manufacturer under separate agreement(s).
d) The source code of the modified code of the Sablotron 0.82 is available at: http://support-
download.com/services/device/sablot/notice082.html
e) The source code of the Sablotron software is available at: http://www.gingerall.com 9
f) MPL 1.1 is available at: http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html
JPEG LIBRARY
• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
SASL
CMU libsasl
Tim Martin
Rob Earhart
Rob Siemborski
385
9. Appendix
Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.

3. The name "Carnegie Mellon University" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written permission.
For permission or any other legal details, please contact:
Office of Technology Transfer
Carnegie Mellon University
5000 Forbes Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890
(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395
[email protected]
4. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product
includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University (http://
www.cmu.edu/computing/)."
CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL
CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
9 DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Samba(Ver 3.0.4)
For SMB transmission, this machine uses Samba ver 3.0.4 (hereinafter referred to as Samba 3.0.4).
Copyright (c) Andrew Tridgell 1994-1998
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your
option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675
Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
386
• The source code for SMB transmission by this machine can be downloaded from the following website:
http://support-download.com/services/scbs
RSA BSAFE®
• This product includes RSA BSAFE (c) cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc.
• RSA, BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
• RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.
Open SSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided 9
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://
www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-
[email protected].
387
9. Appendix
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://
www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product
includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared
to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc.,
code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same
9 copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If
this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the
library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online
or textual) provided with the package.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used
are not cryptographic related :-).
388
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence
[including the GNU Public Licence.]
Open SSH
The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows. First, we will summarize and say
that all components are under a BSD licence, or a licence more free than that.
OpenSSH contains no GPL code.
1)
Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <[email protected]>, Espoo, Finland All rights reserved
As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used freely for any purpose. Any 9
derived versions of this software must be clearly marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible
with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure Shell".
[Tatu continues]
However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights held by third parties, and the
software includes parts that are not under my direct control. As far as I know, all included source code is
used in accordance with the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose (the GNU
license being the most restrictive); see below for details.
[However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of these restrictively licenced software
components which he talks about have been removed from OpenSSH, i.e.,
- RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library
- IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated
- DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL
389
9. Appendix
- Zlib is now external, in a library

- The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included
- TSS has been removed
- MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL
- Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library
[The licence continues]
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software are publicly available on the
Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific library, and patent office worldwide. More information can
be found e.g. at "http://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions and restrictions. Use only at
your own responsibility. You will be responsible for any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any
claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any responsibility
on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
9 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY

COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY
TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by CORE SDI S.A. under a
BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained.
390
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE
OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <[email protected]>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
3)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by the University of California,
since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley code.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
9
DAMAGE.
4)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term BSD licence with the
following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Kevin Steves
391
9. Appendix
Daniel Kouril
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Jason Downs
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
5)
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses:
9 c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the openbsd-compat/ subdirectory
are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright holders:
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
392
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
DAMAGE.
Open LDAP
The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003

Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document. 9
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is distinguished by a
version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any
subsequent revision of the license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR
OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
393
9. Appendix
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright
in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright (c) 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights
Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.
Heimdal
Copyright (c) 1997-2005 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm,
Sweden). All rights reserved.
3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
9 SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

DAMAGE.
IPSTM print language emulations
Copyright (c) 1987-2006 Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved.
racoon
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project.

All rights reserved.
394
TrouSerS
THE ACCOMPANYING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS COMMON PUBLIC
LICENSE ("AGREEMENT"). ANY USE, REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM
CONSTITUTES RECIPIENT'S ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT.
1. DEFINITIONS
"Contribution" means:
a) in the case of the initial Contributor, the initial code and documentation distributed under this Agreement,
and
b) in the case of each subsequent Contributor:
i) changes to the Program, and
ii) additions to the Program;
where such changes and/or additions to the Program originate from and are distributed by that particular
Contributor. A Contribution 'originates' from a Contributor if it was added to the Program by such
Contributor itself or anyone acting on such Contributor's behalf. Contributions do not include additions to
the Program which: (i) are separate modules of software distributed in conjunction with the Program under
their own license agreement, and (ii) are not derivative works of the Program.
"Contributor" means any person or entity that distributes the Program.
"Licensed Patents " mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the
use or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program.
"Program" means the Contributions distributed in accordance with this Agreement.
"Recipient" means anyone who receives the Program under this Agreement, including all Contributors.
2. GRANT OF RIGHTS
a) Subject to the terms of this Agreement, each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non-exclusive,
9
worldwide, royalty-free copyright license to reproduce, prepare derivative works of, publicly display,
publicly perform, distribute and sublicense the Contribution of such Contributor, if any, and such derivative
works, in source code and object code form.
b) Subject to the terms of this Agreement, each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non-exclusive,
worldwide, royalty-free patent license under Licensed Patents to make, use, sell, offer to sell, import and
otherwise transfer the Contribution of such Contributor, if any, in source code and object code form. This
patent license shall apply to the combination of the Contribution and the Program if, at the time the
Contribution is added by the Contributor, such addition of the Contribution causes such combination to be
covered by the Licensed Patents. The patent license shall not apply to any other combinations which include
the Contribution. No hardware per se is licensed hereunder.
c) Recipient understands that although each Contributor grants the licenses to its Contributions set forth
herein, no assurances are provided by any Contributor that the Program does not infringe the patent or
other intellectual property rights of any other entity. Each Contributor disclaims any liability to Recipient for
claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise. As a
395
9. Appendix
condition to exercising the rights and licenses granted hereunder, each Recipient hereby assumes sole
responsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed, if any. For example, if a third party
patent license is required to allow Recipient to distribute the Program, it is Recipient's responsibility to acquire
that license before distributing the Program.
d) Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution, if
any, to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement.
3. REQUIREMENTS
A Contributor may choose to distribute the Program in object code form under its own license agreement,
provided that:
a) it complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement; and
b) its license agreement:
i) effectively disclaims on behalf of all Contributors all warranties and conditions, express and implied,
including warranties or conditions of title and non-infringement, and implied warranties or conditions of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose;
ii) effectively excludes on behalf of all Contributors all liability for damages, including direct, indirect,
special, incidental and consequential damages, such as lost profits;
iii) states that any provisions which differ from this Agreement are offered by that Contributor alone and
not by any other party; and
iv) states that source code for the Program is available from such Contributor, and informs licensees how
to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange.
When the Program is made available in source code form:
a) it must be made available under this Agreement; and
b) a copy of this Agreement must be included with each copy of the Program.
9 Contributors may not remove or alter any copyright notices contained within the Program.
Each Contributor must identify itself as the originator of its Contribution, if any, in a manner that reasonably
allows subsequent Recipients to identify the originator of the Contribution.
4. COMMERCIAL DISTRIBUTION
Commercial distributors of software may accept certain responsibilities with respect to end users, business
partners and the like. While this license is intended to facilitate the commercial use of the Program, the
Contributor who includes the Program in a commercial product offering should do so in a manner which
does not create potential liability for other Contributors. Therefore, if a Contributor includes the Program
in a commercial product offering, such Contributor ("Commercial Contributor") hereby agrees to defend
and indemnify every other Contributor ("Indemnified Contributor") against any losses, damages and costs
(collectively "Losses") arising from claims, lawsuits and other legal actions brought by a third party against
the Indemnified Contributor to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of such Commercial Contributor
in connection with its distribution of the Program in a commercial product offering. The obligations in this
section do not apply to any claims or Losses relating to any actual or alleged intellectual property
infringement. In order to qualify, an Indemnified Contributor must: a) promptly notify the Commercial
396
Contributor in writing of such claim, and b) allow the Commercial Contributor to control, and cooperate
with the Commercial Contributor in, the defense and any related settlement negotiations. The Indemnified
Contributor may participate in any such claim at its own expense.
For example, a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering, Product X. That
Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor. If that Commercial Contributor then makes performance
claims, or offers warranties related to Product X, those performance claims and warranties are such
Commercial Contributor's responsibility alone. Under this section, the Commercial Contributor would have
to defend claims against the other Contributors related to those performance claims and warranties, and
if a court requires any other Contributor to pay any damages as a result, the Commercial Contributor must
pay those damages.
5. NO WARRANTY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS
IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE, NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Each Recipient is
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using and distributing the Program and assumes
all risks associated with its exercise of rights under this Agreement, including but not limited to the risks and
costs of program errors, compliance with applicable laws, damage to or loss of data, programs or
equipment, and unavailability or interruption of operations.
6. DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, NEITHER RECIPIENT NOR ANY
CONTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS),
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED 9
HEREUNDER, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
7. GENERAL
If any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not affect the
validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this Agreement, and without further action by the
parties hereto, such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision
valid and enforceable.
If Recipient institutes patent litigation against a Contributor with respect to a patent applicable to software
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit), then any patent licenses granted by that Contributor
to such Recipient under this Agreement shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. In addition, if
Recipient institutes patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Program itself (excluding combinations of the Program with other software or hardware)
infringes such Recipient's patent(s), then such Recipient's rights granted under Section 2(b) shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
397
9. Appendix
All Recipient's rights under this Agreement shall terminate if it fails to comply with any of the material terms
or conditions of this Agreement and does not cure such failure in a reasonable period of time after becoming
aware of such noncompliance. If all Recipient's rights under this Agreement terminate, Recipient agrees to
cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable. However, Recipient's
obligations under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall
continue and survive.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute copies of this Agreement, but in order to avoid inconsistency
the Agreement is copyrighted and may only be modified in the following manner. The Agreement Steward
reserves the right to publish new versions (including revisions) of this Agreement from time to time. No one
other than the Agreement Steward has the right to modify this Agreement. IBM is the initial Agreement
Steward. IBM may assign the responsibility to serve as the Agreement Steward to a suitable separate entity.
Each new version of the Agreement will be given a distinguishing version number. The Program (including
Contributions) may always be distributed subject to the version of the Agreement under which it was
received. In addition, after a new version of the Agreement is published, Contributor may elect to distribute
the Program (including its Contributions) under the new version. Except as expressly stated in Sections 2
(a) and 2(b) above, Recipient receives no rights or licenses to the intellectual property of any Contributor
under this Agreement, whether expressly, by implication, estoppel or otherwise. All rights in the Program
not expressly granted under this Agreement are reserved.
This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of New York and the intellectual property laws of the
United States of America. No party to this Agreement will bring a legal action under this Agreement more
than one year after the cause of action arose. Each party waives its rights to a jury trial in any resulting
litigation.
• To obtain the source code for opening TrouSerS (Version 0.27), which is provided with this machine,
access the Web site at the following URL: http://www.ricoh.com/support/trousers/index.html
9 • TrouSerS version control is by SourceForge CVS. For methods of obtaining the source code, access
the Web site at the following URL: http://sourceforge.net/cvs/?group_id=126012
398
INDEX
Copyright information.........................................375
Counter................................................................163
120 V model............................................................4
Cover sheets..........................................................78
220-240 V model...................................................4
Custom setting........................................................63
A
D
access...................................................................236
Data In indicator......................................................7
Administrator mode............................................. 200
Data security for copying......................................94
Adobe Type Manager........................................316
DeskTopBinder....................................................351
Advanced printing.................................................78
DeskTopBinder Lite................................................89
Alert indicator..........................................................7
devicename.........................................................241
appletalk..............................................................237
dhcp.....................................................................241
Authentication......................................................371
DHCP...................................................................364
authfree................................................................238
dhcp6...................................................................242
autonet.................................................................238
DHCPv6...............................................................364
AutoNet................................................................364
Dial-up router......................................................369
B Direct printing from a digital camera.................131
Banner page..........................................................46 Dithering......................................................341, 342
Bidirectional communication................................60 dns........................................................................243
Bidirectional Communication...............................59 domainname........................................................244
Black and White Printing....................................105 Downloading the printer driver............................24
Black Over Print...................................................339 Duplex printing....................................................335
bonjour.................................................................239 Duplex Printing...................................335, 336, 337
Bonjour.................................................................320 Dynamic DNS......................................................366
btconfig................................................................240 E
C E-Mail notification...............................................227
CD-ROM..............................................................351 Energy saver mode.............................................218
Classification code..............................................204 Escape key...............................................................7
Classification code, configuring........................205 etherauth..............................................................245
Classification code, for a print job..............98, 205 EtherTalk......................................................317, 321
CMYK Simulation Profile....................................340 Exiting PictBridge mode......................................140
Collate...........................................................86, 338 F
Color matching....................................................139
Finishing tab...........................................................78
Color Matching...................................................342
Fit to paper...........................................................333
Color Mode.........................................................335
Font Manager...............................................61, 351
Color Profile.........................................................336
Form feed......................................................46, 106
Color Setting........................................................337
Form printing........................................................139
ColorSync Profiles...............................................315
Frequently used print methods..............................66
Combining multiple pages into single page........71
Commands...........................................93, 234, 358 G
Configuration page.............................................162 Gradation............................................................336
Connection method...............................................21 Gray Reproduction.............................................341
399
Guest mode.........................................................200 Manuals for this printer...........................................1
H Mask type..............................................................96
Memory capacity................................................104
help.......................................................................245 Menu key.................................................................7
Hold print....................................................118, 126 Message..............................................................292
Host Interface......................................................187 Messages on the control panel............................56
hostname..............................................................246 Misc. tab................................................................78
I Monitoring...........................................................224
Multi-tab.................................................................63
IEEE 802.1x.........................................................234
ifconfig.................................................................246 N
Image print size...................................................136 netware................................................................249
Image smoothing.................................................339 NetWare..............................................................303
Image Smoothing................................................340 NetWare 3.x..............................................304, 308
Index printing.......................................................133 NetWare 4.x..............................................305, 310
info........................................................................247 NetWare 5......................................... 305, 306, 310
Input slot...............................................................333 NetWare 5.1.....................................305, 306, 310
Installing the printer driver..............................50, 56 NetWare 6......................................... 305, 306, 310
Interrupt printing function....................................100 NetWare 6.5.....................................305, 306, 310
ipp........................................................................248 NetWare print server............................................44
IPP............................................................30, 32, 225 Network connection..............................................21
ipsec.....................................................................248 Network interface board...........................210, 282
ipv6......................................................................249
O
J
OK key.....................................................................7
Job Reset key............................................................7 On-demand e-mail.............................................230
Job spool..............................................................261 Option......................................................................5
L Option settings for the printer...............................59
Orientation override...........................................334
Language.............................................................194
Other Reference Information..............................142
List/Test Print........................................................162
Local connection....................................................23 P
Locked print.........................................................126 PageMaker............................................................62
Locking the menus...............................................211 Paper size....................................................135, 333
lpr.........................................................................249 Paper type...................................................211, 339
LPR........................................................................249 Paper Type...........................................................339
LPR port...................................................................36 Paper type specification.....................................139
M Parallel connection................................................50
passwd.................................................................251
Mac OS..........130, 313, 335, 336, 337, 341, 342,
344 pathmtu................................................................251
Mac OS X..........................................318, 337, 344 PCL printer driver......................................24, 27, 30
Maintenance.......................................................154 PDF direct print......................................................89
Managing users..................................................371 PictBridge....................................................131, 142
Manuals...............................................................356 PictBridge printing...............................................132
400
PostScript 3 printer driver.......24, 29, 32, 313, 323 Security Options..................................................182
Power indicator........................................................7 Selection keys..........................................................7
PPD files.......................................................313, 318 Separate into CMYK...........................................340
Print job................................................................281 set.........................................................................254
Print job function..................................................109 Setting Up Options..............................................315
Print job screen....................................................109 Setup tab................................................................78
Print log................................................................281 show.....................................................................256
Print multiple images...........................................137 Slip Sheets..............................................................80
Print server...................................................304, 305 slp.........................................................................256
Print Settings.........................................................171 SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin........208, 351, 353
Printable paper sizes...........................................104 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.........224, 351, 354
Printer configuration............................................279 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.....................25
Printer driver............................24, 47, 98, 205, 351 smb.......................................................................257
Printer driver setting screen...................................64 snmp.....................................................................257
Printer fonts..........................................................345 SNMP...................................................................272
Printer information...............................................274 sntp.......................................................................261
Printer status......................219, 225, 227, 274, 349 Software and utilities...........................................351
Printer utility for Mac...........................................343 Spool print...........................................................221
Printer Utility for Mac..........................................351 Spool printing........................................................87
Printing on both sides of sheets.............................68 spoolsw................................................................261
Printing quality.....................................................138 ssdp......................................................................262
Printing with Bluetooth Connection......................53 ssh.........................................................................262
Printing with watermark/overlay.........................74 SSL encryption.....................................................373
prnlog...................................................................252 Standard printing...................................................66
PS fonts.................................................................344 Standard TCP/IP port...........................................33
Punch......................................................................84 Staple.....................................................................81
Pure IP environment............................................. 306 Staple position.......................................................81
Q Stapling Precautions..............................................83
status.....................................................................263
Quick Install...........................................................24 Stored print..........................................................126
R Suspend/Resume key.............................................7
Symbols....................................................................3
Remote printer......................................44, 308, 310
syslog...................................................................263
Rendezvous.........................................................320
System.................................................166, 171, 182
Resolution.............................................................334
System log...................................................263, 292
rhpp......................................................................252
Ricoh Host Printing Protocol...............................252 T
route.....................................................................252 TCP/IP.............................................................27, 29
RPCS printer driver...................................24, 27, 30 TCP/IP address...................................................246
S telnet.....................................................................234
Trimming...............................................................134
Sample print........................................................126
Troubleshooting...................................................141
Screen fonts.........................................................316
Types of combined printing..................................72
Scroll keys................................................................7
Types of duplex printing.......................................69
401
Types of watermark/overlay...............................75
U
upnp.....................................................................264
USB interface.......................................................319
User authentication.............................................200
User code............................................................332
User ID.................................................................126
User information..................................................212
User Management Tool......................................212
Using custom settings............................................76
V
Virtual printer.......................................................100
W
web.......................................................................264
Web Image Monitor.........................197, 205, 365
Web Image Monitor Help.........................202, 206
wiconfig...............................................................265
Windows.....................................................129, 357
Windows 2000..............................................47, 56
Windows network printer.....................................41
Windows Server 2003..................................47, 56
Windows Server 2003 R2.............................47, 56
Windows Server 2008.........................................48
Windows Vista................................................48, 57
Windows XP...........................................................47
Windows XP Home Edition...................................57
Windows XP Professional.....................................56
wins......................................................................269
WINS Server.......................................................365
Wireless LAN..............................................265, 369
WSD port...............................................................38
wsmfp...................................................................270
402
MEMO
403
MEMO
404 GB GB EN USA G189-6635

Copyright © 2008
Software Guide
Model No.
GB GB
MLP150DN/SP8200DN/LP150dn/Aficio SP 8200DN
EN USA G189-6635

Manual de Usuario SPC 820dn Ricoh

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Usuario SPC 820dn Ricoh

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Usuario SPC 820dn Ricoh

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

1 Guide to the Printer

Do not touch! Surface may be very hot.

• Media differ according to manual.

• Manuals provided are specific to machine types.

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates important safety notes.

Indicates important safety notes.

This indicates information about the 220 to 240 V model printer.

This indicates information about the 120 V model printer.

Option name Referred to as

IEEE802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J

Memory Unit Type J 256 MB

Printer Hard Disk Drive Type 820 Hard disk

Gigabit Ethernet Type B Gigabit Ethernet board

IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A IEEE 1284 interface board

Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245 Bluetooth interface unit

HDD ENCRYPTION UNIT Type D HDD encryption unit

Data Overwrite Security Unit Type M Data overwrite security unit

Camera Direct Print Card Type F Camera direct print card

SD card for NetWare printing Type A NetWare card

VM Card Type K VM card

Finisher SR3030 2 tray finisher

Booklet Finisher SR3000 Booklet finisher

Punch Unit Type 3260 NA 3/2

Output Jogger Unit Type 3260 Output jogger unit

Paper Feed Unit PB3080 500-sheet paper feed unit

Paper Feed Unit PB3040 1000-sheet paper feed unit

LCIT PB3050 2000-sheet paper feed unit

Bridge Unit BU3030 Bridge unit

Punch Kit PU3000 NA

Mail Bin Type C820 Mailbox

Installing the HTML Format Manuals

• The system requirements for installing the manuals are as follows:

1. Select a language and a product, and then click [OK].

Opening the HTML Format Manuals

This section explains how to open the HTML format manuals.

1. Double-click the icon on your desktop.

The browser opens and the manual appears.

Opening from the [Start] Menu

Opening from the CD-ROM

1. Click [Read HTML manuals].

1. Standard Output Tray

8. Left Front Cover

• p.25 "Power on and off"

Exterior: Side View

1. Optional Interface Board Slot

• A hard disk is pre-installed in the HDD standard model.

Replace the relevant toner when the following messages appear:

1 10. [Job Reset] Key

Power on and off

Turning on the Power

This section explains how to turn on the printer's power.

1. Make sure the power switch is set to Off.

3. Turn the power switch on.

The power indicator on the control panel lights up.

• Wait until "Ready" appears on the display panel.

Turning off the Power

This section explains how to turn off the printer's power.